7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance | Wavelength Division Multiplexing | Network Topology

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A Operation and Maintenance
TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0

STUDENT GUIDE

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 1

Empty page
Switch to notes view!

2
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 2

Terms of Use and Legal Notices
1. Safety Warning Switch to notes view!
Both lethal and dangerous voltages may be present within the products used herein. The user is strongly advised not to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The equipment used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

2. Trade Marks

Alcatel-Lucent and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.

All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders, including AlcatelLucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel-Lucent or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented herein, which may be subject to change without notice.

This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training purposes only. No other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel-Lucent’s written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel-Lucent. User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 3 written consent of Alcatel-Lucent.
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

3. Copyright

Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable legislation is hereby expressly prohibited.

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

In no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not AlcatelLucent has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement, nor a recommendation. This course is intended to train the student about the overall look, feel, and use of Alcatel-Lucent products. The information contained herein is representational only. In the interest of file size, simplicity, and compatibility and, in some cases, due to contractual limitations, certain compromises have been made and therefore some features are not entirely accurate. The Alcatel-Lucent products described or used herein are presented for demonstration and training purposes only. AlcatelLucent disclaims any warranties in connection with the products as used and described in the courses or the related documentation, whether express, implied, or statutory. Alcatel-Lucent specifically disclaims all implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability, non-infringement and fitness for a particular purpose, or arising from a course of dealing, usage or trade practice. Alcatel-Lucent is not responsible for any failures caused by: server errors, misdirected or redirected transmissions, failed internet connections, interruptions, any computer virus or any other technical defect, whether human or technical in nature Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-Lucent equipment and its operation, or contact your nearest Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information.

4. Disclaimer

The products, documentation and information contained herein, as well as these Terms of Use and Legal Notices are governed by the laws of France, excluding its conflict of law rules. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices, or the application thereof to any person or circumstances, is held invalid for any reason, unenforceable including, but not limited to, the warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, then such provision shall be deemed superseded by a valid, enforceable provision that matches, as closely as possible, the original provision, and the other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices shall remain in full force and effect.

5. Governing Law

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 3

Blank Page
Switch to notes view!

4
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 4

Course Outline
1. This Course AboutProduct Overview
Course outline 1. System General Description Technical support Operation Overview 2. System Course objectives

4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 7. Topic/Section is Positioned Here

4. Cabling Description 1. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 2. NE Operation Xxx
Xxx Xxx

3. Boards Description

1. Subrack and Board Declaration 2. Optical Channel Configuration 3. Optical Power Tuning

2. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
1. Performance Monitoring 3. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 2. Alarms Handling 4. SPLM Operation 3. Boards Replacement 1. SPLM Overview 3. NE Maintenance

2. Topology Management 5. RMPM Operation and Maintenance 1. RMPM Description
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

3. Line Optimization

5

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

6. Appendix

2. RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1. Miscellaneous

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 5

Course Outline [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

6
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 6

Course Objectives
Switch to notes view!
Welcome to 1626 LM (Light Manager) R5.0A Operation and Maintenance
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to: describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A, describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A, describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards, perform optical and electrical cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards, declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the software associations, configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons, monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for maintenance reasons, monitor the signal transmission quality in line, handle the alarms raised by the NE, replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A boardReserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 safety rules and applying the appropriate respecting the All Rights procedure, describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace, setup the relevant SPLM configuration,

7

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion, describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM, get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 7

Course Objectives [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

8
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 8

About this Student Guide
Conventions used in Switch to notes view! this guide
Note
Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed. Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful or interesting.

Technical Reference

(1) 24.348.98 – Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.

Warning

Alerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment damage or personal injury.

9

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

Where you can get further information
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

If you want further information you can refer to the following: Technical Practices for the specific product Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 9

About this Student Guide [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

10
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 10

Self-assessment of Objectives
Course title :

Client (Company, Center) : Language : Switch Number of trainees :

At the end of each section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training to notes view!
Location : Dates from : to :

Contract number :

Surname, First name :

Did you meet the following objectives ? Tick the corresponding box Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Instructional objectives 1 To be able to describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A Yes (or globally yes) No (or globally no) Comments

2 To be able to describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 11 3 1626 LM (Light Manager)able to describe the faceplate and the To be R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards 4 To be able to perform optical and electrical cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards 5 To be able to declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the software associations 6 To be able to configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons 7 To be able to monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for maintenance reasons 8 To be able to monitor the signal transmission quality in line

9 To be able to handle the alarms raised by the NE

10 To be able to replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A board respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate procedure 11 To be able to describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace 12 To be able to setup the relevant SPLM configuration 13 Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 11

Self-assessment of Objectives [cont.]
Switch to notes view!
Instructional objectives 14 To be able to describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM 15 To be able to get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions Yes (or Globally yes) No (or globally no) Comments

12
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Other comments

Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 12

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 Product Overview
Module 1 System General Description
3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 1

Blank Page

1—1—2

Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A

1—1—3

Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

1—1—4

Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
Page

1 General points 7 1.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio 8 1.2 Regional Terrestrial Application 9 1.3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure 10 1.4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications 11 1.5 Raman applications 12 1.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking 13 1.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics” 14 1.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node 15 1.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets 16 2 Main features 17 2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 18 2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? 20 2.3 Loading plan at 50GHz 22 2.4 Loading plan at 100GHz 23 3 Line structures 25 3.1 Line configuration without A/D 26 3.2 Line configuration with A/D 27 3.3 Ring configuration 28 3.4 Meshed Topology 29 4 1626 LM NE type configurations 31 4.1 NE types 32 4.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch.: pass-through) 34 4.3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 channels: add/drop) 35 All Rights (total number of 1—1—5 Product Overview — System General Description (Long Haul application) 4.4 Line TerminalMaintenance 36 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and 4.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir) 37 4.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir) 38 4.7 Line Repeater 39 4.8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE 40 4.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE 41 4.10 Band-OADM 42 4.11 Small OADM 43 4.12 ROADM (WB based) 44 4.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) 45 4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) 46 4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) 48 4.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based)) 51 4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop 52 4.18 Back-to-Back Terminal 54 5 Existing infrastructure upgrade 55 5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 56 5.1.2 Upgrade up to 52 channels 58 5.2.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards 59 5.2.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards 60 5.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 61 6 Ethernet applications 63 6.1 Traffic concentration and mapping 64 6.2 Boards interconnections: examples 65 6.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service 66 7 1626 LM system layout 67 7.1 Optinex Rack layout 68 7.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf 69 7.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example 70 7.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example 71 7.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application - Example 72

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 5

9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf .10 BOADM Master shelf .7 Line Repeater Master shelf .Example 7.Example (From 9th to 72nd channel) 7.Table of Contents [cont.15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 .Example 7.Example 7.19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS .Example 7.Example 7.Example 7.Example 7.16 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 .21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 .22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 .24 Power Feeding sub-system 1—1—6 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.] Switch to notes view! Page 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 7.Example (8 first channels) 7.Example 7.Example 7.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf .Example 7.Example 7.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS .20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM .17 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 .Example 7.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf .12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf .13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf .14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Example 7.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 6 .Example 7.Example 7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application .23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf 7.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 7 .1 General points 1—1—7 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A.6nm) or 80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 8 . It is well-suited to provide GbE backhauling in a very compact format for Metro Access applications and interwork fully with the 1830 PSS-32 designed for Metro Core and Regional applications.692 recommendation. The 1830 PSS-1 GBE is an Edge Device providing the concentration of 10 GbE services over an 10. which also includes the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices. National. Channel spacing is 100 GHz. the 1830 PSS-1 GBE can work as a GbE ADM which makes it uniquely efficient and flexible for building Metro Access Ethernet networks and meet the growing demand for Triple Play. A service-optimized.0 supports up to 44 DWDM wavelength channels in the C-band from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio Core Aggregation & transport 96 λ at 10 G 80 λ at 40 G DWDM TR-OADM ROADM 1626 LM A Complete WDM Product Line Fast install & commission Reduced maintenance Bandwidth optimization Easy upgrade Simple design Metro 1830 PSS-32 44 λ at 10 G C&DWDM TR-OADM ROADM Access 1—1—8 1830 PSS-1 GBE 8 λ at 10 G CWDM All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Best-in-class footprint Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.694. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1. 1830 PSS-32 : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 is part of the 1830 PSS Metro WDM product family. Pan-continental Networks. It supports up to eight CWDM wavelength channels from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G. Video services and Business LAN services.82nm) in Rel5.0A — Operation and Maintenance The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM is designed to address efficiently green field applications for new networks and links as well as to upgrade legacy platforms without traffic interruption. GbE/10GbE and storage. flexible platform delivers advanced OADM/CWDM/DWDM transport capabilities in a highly scalable and versatile package that supports interoffice facility/converged core transport and wavelength services such as SDH/SONET.1 General points 1. 1626 LM : The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager (1626 LM in the following) is the platform of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Multi Reach systems for Regional. The 1626 LM (Light Manager) provides a high transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568. A future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support 88 channels on a 50-GHz grid.2 recommendation. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. including the 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device. In addition. Carriers can keep their installed DWDM base and increase its capacity by loading new wavelengths from the 1626 LM.709 Gb/s optical channel. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is the next generation zero-touch transparent photonic network solution. 1830 PSS-1 GBE : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device provides an optimized WDM access Platform. This provides to carriers a stateof-art technology and advanced features without wasting the investment previously granted.

2 Regional Terrestrial Application The 1626 Light Manager is a multi-reach WDM system capable of supporting different reaches on different wavelengths to easily match the demand.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 9 . from average capacity for regional networks up to large capacity for pan-continental networks. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Unified Management Regional Regional National & Pan-Continental Up to 200 km 32 channels Up to 600 km 48 channels Up to 1500 km 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s Traffic Aggregation 1—1—9 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Transport Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM addresses terrestrial applications from Metro-Core (few hundreds of kilometers) to Ultra Long-Haul (up to 4500 km) and unrepeatered submarine applications (400 Km single span).1 General points 1.

1 General points 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1626 LM is able to extend nominal capacity of installed 1686WM and 1640WM links by adding an Optical Network Extension shelf in traffic access points.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 10 .3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure 1626 LM provides in-service upgrades. composed of higher performance 1626 LM Transponders and corresponding Multiplexer/Demultiplexer modules. reusing the line terminal and line repeater from existing Alcatel DWDM links flexibility to upgrade other vendors’ DWDM links Simply add the Optical Network Extender shelf at both ends of the link where access to the traffic is needed Equipment upgrade Existing Line Terminal Existing Line Repeater New access to traffic 1 — 1 — 10 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications The Alcatel 1626 Light Manager provides an efficient solution When the terrestrial route crosses difficult terrain When operator incurs costly access problems Optimized features for single-span long distance transmission Festoon along a coast Mainland-to-island connection Island-to-island connection 1 — 1 — 11 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 11 .1 General points 1.

while at the same time initiating a transition of the fiber molecules between two vibration states. in a Line Repeater or in a OADM site. In the Raman amplifier.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 EDFA: Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier RMPM : Raman Multi Pump Module A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 12 .1 General points 1. phase and polarization as the signal and thus the stimulated scattering mechanism can be used to amplify the signal. It has to be inserted between the output of the long span and the input of the Line Optical Fiber Amplifier (LOFA). The Raman Multi Pump Module (RMPM) is to be used for long span masking in 1626LM terrestrial applications. The LOFA can be either in a Line Terminal.5 Raman applications Standard EDFA for standard span attenuation Selected use of Raman pump in some high loss attenuation spans High attenuation span(s) in a series of standard attenuation spans High loss span Raman pump Line Terminal Line Repeater Access to traffic RMPM Front Panel 1 — 1 — 12 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but in the Optinex ETSI rack. Several RMPM can be used in a transmission system but only a few of them can be cascaded between regenerators due to optical performance reasons. However some alarms and commands can be received or activated from the 1626LM Housekeeping board. In this process an incident photon is scattered to a lower energy photon. The gain medium in the case of the distributed Raman amplifier is the silica transmission fiber itself and amplification occurs along a few tens of kilometers adjacent to the pump unit. stimulated Raman scattering produces a photon with the same wavelength. The Raman unit is called RMPM1x00 which stands for Raman Multi Pump Module and where « x » represents the number of pumping diodes inside the module. Only 2 different RMPM exist today : dual and triple pumps (RMPM1200 and RMPM1300 respectively).0A. The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM from R3. either locally or remotely through a LAN. The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on a PC.

limited electrical regeneration and processing (OEO) only at the end points Integrated any-type client interfaces and aggregation But… not flexible.1 General points 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OEO : Optical Electrical Optical TCO : Total Cost of Ownership OAM : Operation And Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 10G) for compatibility Flexible reuse of wavelengths for more available bandwidth Operational automation Multi-degree for meshed topologies No need for planning.5G. manual intervention and troubleshooting + + Networking flexibility End to end wavelength rerouting up to the end points (clients) by NOC Support of 40G for increasing service demand.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking WDM technology offers the lowest cost per transported bit ‘by design’ Pure photonic traffic processing. along with existing line rates (2. easy network reconfiguration from NOC without manual intervention End to end service provisioning in minutes Extended photonic OAM and restoration capabilities Transforming WDM into a manageable transport networking layer for simplified operations. requires careful planning. accelerated time-to-service and controlled TCO 1 — 1 — 13 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 13 .

supervision and operations 1626 LM transforms WDM into a true Transport Layer 1 — 1 — 14 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. NOC based. QoS Full Operations Still need to go to sites for the add/drop Still need to go to sites for the add/drop Ultimate simplification of design. planning.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WB: Wavelength Blocker QoS: Quality of Service WSS: Wavelength Selective Switch ONDP: Optical Network Design Platform SPLM: Smart Photonic Layer Manager NOC: Network Operating Center All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics” WSS TR-OADM Architecture Traditional ROADM Architecture standard unique ONDP & SPLM unique Multi-degree TR-OADM (WSS) Colorless ports Directionless ports (Multicasting) Wavelength routing e2e E2E Photonic Management Centralized automated intelligence Wavelength routing at intermediate nodes Degree-2 ROADM (WB) Multi-degree ROADM (WSS) Increased connectivity (mesh) Easier design Path set-up. path set-up NOC based automated commissioning. monitoring. operations and inventory No need to go to sites Full Flexibility Simple.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 14 .1 General points 1.

1 General points 1.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node A Multi-Degree Node is a Node that allows wavelengths connectivity across several directions Examples of Multi-Degree Nodes: The degree of the Node equals the number of directions Degree-2 Degree-3 Degree-4 Degree-5 Degree-6 In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelengths connectivity is managed in a “true” optical domain without OEO conversions In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelength connectivity can be managed “manually” (cabling) or remotely (R/TR-OADM) 1 — 1 — 15 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 15 .

and SLA assurance Acceleration of time-to-service Unified Photonic Layer Management for rapid end-to-end services delivery Turn-up in minutes by NOC and not by field operations Restoration at the Photonic layer Optimization of Network Resilience Detection and management of degraded performance before outage events occur Better resource utilization and CAPEX savings Networking capability.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 16 . OPEX savings Optimization of overall network expenses Helping Service Providers to quickly deliver simplified.1 General points 1.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets Simplification of planning.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NOC: Network Operating Center CAPEX: Capital Expenditure OPEX: Operating Expenditure TCO: Total Cost of Ownership SLA: Service Level Agreement All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. fully managed. highly flexible. bandwidth on demand at the lowest TCO 1 — 1 — 16 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. reliable. commissioning. commissioning and overall operations Flexibility in network design and planning “Plug and Play” Turn-up.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Main features 1 — 1 — 17 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 17 .

capacityoptimized fixed OADMs (48 x 10G wavelengths supported mixing 50 & 100 GHz grid) pluggable XFP optics for 10GE LAN/WAN.1626 LM can be associated to 1696 MS in Greenfield installation Other supported features All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. tunable C-band line 4x2.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 18 .5 Gb/s applications and 9xGbE for 10G applications Tunable universal transponders Integrated SDH and GbE transparent aggregation Optical Protection support: 1+1 O-SNCP with tributary protection Reconfigurable Optical Add-Drop Multiplexers (ROADM) Improved network flexibility Easy upgrade from fixed OADM based on Wavelength Blocker (WB) technology Release 5 sets now a new milestone in product’s support for Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking 1 — 1 — 18 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1626 LM as a stand alone shelf can be used to upgrade legacy 1686 WM and 1640 WM .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 .709. G. high capacity fixed optical add-drop multiplexers (OADMs) 32 x 10G wavelengths (100GHz grid) with cost-optimized amplifiers. SDH.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 A leading platform for Multi-Reach and Long Haul WDM networks National & Pan-Continental networks Regional networks 96 x 10G wavelengths (50GHz grid) with high performance amplifiers.2 Main features 2.5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC) 2xGbE for 2.

1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 [cont.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 19 .5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC) Enhanced FEC G709 10Gb/s transponder optimized regional amplifiers Multiplexer) Q3 management interface and Ethernet layer 1) Digital Performance Monitoring (SDH Optical supervisory channel Auxiliary channels via OSC 2Mb/s UDC via TRBD and TRBC Analog Performance Monitoring Ethernet aggregation and transport JO and OTU2 traces management 1 — 1 — 19 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Main features 2.] Line optical fibre amplifiers with B-OADM (Band – Optical Add and Drop Point-to-point and ring configurations 4x2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? Tunable and reconfigurable OADM (TR-OADM) New. reliable and fully-automatic provisioning.0A is able to multiplex up to 96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568.0A — Operation and Maintenance Support of multiple grids (50/100GHz) in the same fiber for concurrent transport of 10G and 40G channels Plug&play into deployed systems (non WSS-based architecture) WSS Functional Description Phased-Shaped Binary transmission (PSBT.2 Main features 2. WSS implementation varies from one provider to another.0. WSS can be considered as an array of Nx1 optical switches placed between several demultiplexers and a single multiplexer.0A. Smart Photonic Layer Management The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork. 50GHz grid) for regional networks Differential Phase-Shift Keying DPSK (100GHz grid) or Partial P-DPSK (50GHz grid) for long-haul networks All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1626 LM R5. From a service point of view. variable attenuators.6nm) or 80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561. DPSK and P-DPSK modulation formats are available from R5. unique Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture for ROADM and Tunable mux/demux filters (all colorless ports) Multi-degree ROADM (1-2-3-4 directions) Programmable WSS grid (50/100GHz) Up to 72 x add/drop colorless ports (10G or 40G) per/from direction Modulation formats optimized for different applications 40G Wavelength Transport Ethernet L2 Performance Monitoring SPLM : Smart Photonic Layer Manager 1 — 1 — 20 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 20 . commissioning and upgrade Automatic optical parameters tuning Simplified diagnostics SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R5. 40G Wavelength Transport: PSBT modulation format is available from R5.0A) SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. intended to enable: Fast. WSS is an optoelectronic device which is used to implement TR-OADM and ROADM functions. From an optoelectronic point of view.82nm). The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager (SPLM) SW-application oriented to the photonic layer. Performance Monitoring for Ethernet layer 2 is available on ETHC1000 board.

2 Main features 2. TRBC4x12 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM64/OC192 optical signals (TDM concentrator) in a 43.018413 Gb/s G709 transponder.] 40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4312 (PSBT) Fully tunable over the C band Up to 80x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band Three slots wide. TRBC4612 (P-DPSK) Fully tunable over the C band Up to 80x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band Three slots wide.0x ? [cont. supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4612) Dedicated CMDX1012 card Embedded TDCM. supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 21 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5. supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4412) Dedicated CMDX1052 card Embedded TDCM. supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers Improved performance 40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4612 (P-DPSK). TDCM: Tunable Mode Dispersion Compensation Module PMDC: Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation Module All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance TRBD4x12 is a bidirectional 3R 43.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 21 .018413 Gb/s. supporting OSNCP protection High performance 40G G709 solution (100 GHz grid): TRBD4412 (DPSK) and TRBC4412 (DPSK) Fully tunable over the C band Up to 40x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band Three slots wide.

9. 8. 3.000 THz 191.5 191.11. 5 (ALCT removed). 9.57nm).1 Used channels 2. The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band” channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm. 12 and 5 (ALCT removed).5 Ch11.3 Loading plan at 50GHz On G652 fiber in extended C-band OSC Ch59.900 THz Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing plan (from 1530. 2 and 1. The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 10. we can use the first 10 bands (80 channels). 8.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 22 .33 nm BAND1 … BAND4 BAND5 BAND6 … BAND10 Submarine Terrestrial 194. 7.33nm up to 1568. This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH application (96 channels). 3.10.57 nm BAND11 BAND12 8 Ch ALC 1510 nm 1530. it takes 3 channel slots at 50GHz.0 Ch19. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7. Warning: when ALCT is used. 2.950 THz 1 — 1 — 22 195. 1. In an unrepeatered submarine system. 4.150 THz 1568. 4. 6. 6.

2.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 23 192. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It covers the bands #1 to #10 of the 50GHz WDM grid with one extra wavelength at 1529. This plan is based on the 50GHz WDM grid where some channels are “unused” in a way to group channels by 4.000 THz 1561.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The 100GHz channel spacing plan corresponds to the 1626 LM regional application.53nm (left side of band 1).4 Loading plan at 100GHz On G652 fiber in C transmission band OSC 1510 nm 1529. these groups being spaced from 200GHz.42 nm BAND1 BAND3 BAND5 BAND7 BAND9 .1 Used Channels 2.000 THz Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.53 nm BAND2 BAND4 BAND6 BAND8 BAND10 1 — 1 — 23 196.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 1 — 24 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 24 .

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 25 .3 Line structures 1 — 1 — 25 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 Line configuration without A/D Line Terminal Line Terminal Line Terminal Line Repeater Line Terminal 1 — 1 — 26 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Line structures 3.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 26 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 27 . the distance between transmitter and receiver can be several hundred kilometers. There are two main differences between the Back-to-Back Terminal and B-OADM configurations regarding the channels management : All channels can be added and dropped in a BtB Terminal where as some channels are “forbidden” in case of a BOADM configuration (1 channel lost in each band for a 50GHz channel spacing).3 Line structures 3.2 Line configuration with A/D WDM Terminal Back to Back Terminal WDM Terminal WDM Terminal ROADM / Band OADM / Small OADM WDM Terminal 1 — 1 — 27 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. and the number of amplifiers required between endpoints is typically less than 10. amplifiers are often not needed. In long-haul networks. These networks are characterized by ultra-high channel speeds (10 to 40Gbps).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Point-to-point topologies can be implemented with or without OADM. high signal integrity and reliability. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Pass-through channels are fully optical in BOADM where as they are regenerated in BtB Terminal (two TRBD used). In metro networks. Most powerful configurations such as ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer) and TR-OADM (Tunable ROADM) are described in the next pages of this module. and fast path restoration.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 28 .3 Line structures 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Ring configuration Back to Back Terminal Band OADM Line Repeater Back to Back Terminal 1 — 1 — 28 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Meshed networks will therefore require a high degree of intelligence to perform the functions of protection and bandwidth management. which can experience changes in its virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) values at switching points. the network can evolve into a mesh without a complete redesign. or fiber level. card. there is a graceful evolutionary path available from point-to-point to meshed topologies. The situation is analogous to that of a virtual circuit through an ATM cloud. this concept is sometimes called a light path.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Meshed architectures are the future of optical networks. This development will be enabled by the introduction of configurable optical cross-connects and switches that will in some cases replace and in other cases supplement fixed DWDM devices. Protection and restoration can be based on shared paths. and subsequently interconnecting them. The benefits in flexibility and efficiency. equipped with OADM nodes at the outset for flexibility.4 Meshed Topology ROADM TR-OADM Line Terminal TR-OADM TR-OADM Back to Back Terminal ROADM 1 — 1 — 29 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. redundancy will now migrate to the wavelength level.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 29 . including fiber and wavelength switching. DWDM meshed networks. rings and point-to-point architectures will still have a place.3 Line structures 3. From a design standpoint. but mesh will be the most robust topology. By beginning with point-to-point links. Where previous protection schemes relied upon redundancy at the system. due either to routing or to a switch in wavelength because of a fault. however. As networks evolve. can be improved in a mesh design. that a data channel might change wavelengths as it makes its way through the network. Fiber usage. Additionally. meshed and ring topologies can be joined by point-to-point links. among other things. which can be low in ring solutions because of the requirement for protection fibers on each ring. thereby requiring fewer fiber pairs for the same amount of traffic and not wasting unused wavelengths. This means. are potentially great. In optical networks. will require the next generation of protection. consisting of interconnected all-optical nodes.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 1 — 30 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 30 .

4 1626 LM NE type configurations 1 — 1 — 31 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 31 .

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 32 . maximum output power of +20dBm Programmable or Automatic Gain Equalization No regeneration. just optical amplification Regenerative Back to back terminal configuration Traffic distribution & collection point Regeneration for non added/dropped channels Double stage amplifier Maximum output power of +20dBm Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels Double stage amplifier Maximum output power of +17dBm Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LR BtB BOADM Small OADM 1 — 1 — 32 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance LT : Line Terminal LR : Line Repeater BtB : Back to Back Terminal BOADM : Band OADM All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 NE types LT Multi lambda support Simple NE for point to point topologies Double stage amplifier.

Degree-6 upgradeability) Up to 72 channels added/dropped Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture Connection point in a meshed network (Y Node) Multidirectional configuration (Local OTS) Single port configuration (four line fibers supported: Degree-4) Dual port configuration to enable diverse route (four line fibers supported: Degree-4) ROADM TR-OADM Directionless TR-OADM 1 — 1 — 33 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ROADM : Reconfigurable OADM TR-OADM : Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Degree-6 upgradeability (WSS) Multi-degree configuration (Degree-1 to Degree-4.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 33 .1 NE types [cont.] Reconfigurable channels add/drop scheme Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels Wavelength Blocker (WB) or Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture Degree-2 (WB) or Degree-1 to Degree-4.

(*) 100GHz signals can be used.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. but this is achievable in future. 77 for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3) 93 for 10G (96-3).0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 34 . 77 for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3) 93 for 10G (96-3). if the specific WMAN3374 board that supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5. PSBT.0B) 1 — 1 — 34 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch. P-DPSK) 88 for 10G (11x8).: pass-through) Configuration ROADM (WB) ROADM (WSS) TR-OADM Directionless TR-OADM 50GHz signals (10G. 72 for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8) 100GHz signals (40G DPSK) (*) Not possible 39 (40-1) 39 (40-1) 39 (40-1) 93 for 10G (96-3). 77 for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3) 40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today.

0B) 1 — 1 — 35 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. (*) 100GHz signals can be used. P-DPSK) 88 for 10G (11x8). but this is achievable in future.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. PSBT. 72 for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8) 100GHz signals (40G DPSK) (*) Not possible 39 (40-1) 39 (40-1) 39 (40-1) 93 for 10G (96-3).3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of channels: add/drop) Configuration ROADM (WB) ROADM (WSS) TR-OADM Directionless TR-OADM 50GHz signals (10G. if the specific WMAN3374 board that supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 35 . 77 for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3) 72 for 10G and PSBT/P-DPSK 64 for 10G and PSBT/P-DPSK 40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today.

4 Line Terminal (Long Haul application) CMDX 1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LT LOFA11y0_Unidir Booster CMDX 2 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 VOA 2 OSC BMDX1000 To/from WDM line ALCT CMDX 12 2 VOA 1 OSC To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 — 1 — 36 LOFA11y0_Unidir Preamplifier Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. B8. B1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Line Terminal. is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 96 channels on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C Band (1530nm -> 1568. B12. B3. transmitted over a 1510nm extra-band wavelength with a 4. B11.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. 1626LM Loading plan in Long Haul application ALCT1010 unit must be in Band 5 and removed from the 88th channel. B2.6nm). B4. The Multiplexing/Demultiplexing architecture is composed of two stages : One BMDX1000 : Band Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 12 bands Up to 12 CMDX : Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 8 channels for a 50GHz channel spacing The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel.864 Mbps bit rate. B9.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 36 . in Long Haul application. B10. is dedicated to the transport of a 2 Mbps supervision frame and a 2 Mbps UDC. B6. B5 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Channel loading order : B7.

4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir) To/from OMDX8100_S2 + OMDX8100_S1 To/from OMDX8100_L2 To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC Up to 8λ EXTRA IN/OUT EXP Up to 16λ IN/OUT LT LOFA11y1_Unidir Booster λ1 OMDX8100_L1_X λ2 1 VOA 2 OSC To/from WDM line 2 VOA 1 OSC To/from TRBD/TRBC 1 — 1 — 37 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 37 . The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel.864 Mbps bit rate. S1. is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a 100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529.55nm -> 1561. 1626LM Loading plan in Regional application Channel loading order : L1. in Regional application. S2.42nm). transmitted over a 1510nm extra-band wavelength with a 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y1_Unidir Preamplifier λ8 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Line Terminal. is dedicated to the transport of a 2 Mbps supervision frame and a 2 Mbps UDC. L2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

S2.0A — Operation and Maintenance λ8 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Line Terminal.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir) To/from OMDX8100_S2 + OMDX8100_S1 To/from OMDX8100_L2 To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC Up to 8λ EXTRA IN/OUT EXP Up to 16λ IN/OUT LT λ1 LOFA11y1_Bidir OMDX8100_L1_X λ2 2 OSC To/from WDM line VOA 1 OSC To/from TRBD/TRBC 1 — 1 — 38 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. L2. S1. 1626LM Loading plan in Regional application Channel loading order : L1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 38 . in Regional application.42nm). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.55nm -> 1561. The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel. is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a 100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529. is dedicated to the transport of a 2 Mbps supervision frame and a 2 Mbps UDC. transmitted over a 1510nm extra-band wavelength with a 4.864 Mbps bit rate.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.

7 Line Repeater LR LOFA11y0_Unidir VOA 1 2 OSC To/from WDM line OSC To/from WDM line 2 OSC VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 39 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The line repeater consists of 2 optical double-stage in-line amplifiers.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 39 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 OSC VOA 2 WMAN1 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN1 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 40 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 40 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. a link requires a PGE (and/or ROADM used as PGE) every around 6 amplifiers. WMAN1100 is used for equalization (PGE functionality) when the link is composed of 17 amplifiers or more. Furthermore.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 PGE functionality is available in R-OADM and LR nodes. Programmable Gain Equalizer (PGE) The WMAN1100 board (including the wavelength blocker that is used as building block of the 1626LM ROADM) is used to compensate channel-by-channel for ripple and non-uniformities accumulation It is called “programmable” because it must be SW-adjusted in field (by a skilled operator) Typically.

4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 OSC VOA 2 WMAN3 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 41 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 41 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 AGE: Automatic Gain Equalizer All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 42 .10 Band-OADM To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 7) CMDX 1 CMDX 1 BOADM LOFA11y0_Unidir Band 1 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 OSC VOA 2 VOA 2 OSC BMDX1100 BMDX1100 ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 Band 12 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 42 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 1 channel out of 8 is lost to guarantee a better band separation (reduced crosstalk for pass-through traffic). With the BMDX1100. without any regeneration. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. A link with BOADM supports a maximum of 12 Bands of 7 channels (maximum of 84 channels).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through.

11 Small OADM Expansion loop Up to 16λ Small OADM Extra loop Up to 8λ LOFA11y1_Unidir To/from TRBD/TRBC LOFA11y1_Unidir OMDX8100_L1_X OMDX81000_L1_X 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC λ1 λ1 2 OSC VOA 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Channel loop λ8 LOFA11y1_Unidir LOFA11y1_Unidir 1 — 1 — 43 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through. The LOFA11y1 in Bidirectional configuration can be used for the Small OADM as well. A link with Small OADM supports a maximum of 32 channels. without any regeneration.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 43 .4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 44 . the other part being dropped to BMDX1000.via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be blocked in WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct” wavelengths are coupled via OADC1102. For each wavelength to be added in the ROADM . The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme. In a given band.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WMAN : Wavelength MANager board OADC : Optical Add Drop Coupler The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module. some channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.12 ROADM (WB based) ROADM WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 Band 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC OADC1102 BMDX1x00 OADC1102 BMDX1x00 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 CMDX 12 2 OSC VOA 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Band 12 WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 44 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. One part continues through WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths).4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is present).

In particular. This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution. fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers. The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-OADM node. the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir Multi-degree R-OADM : Degree-1 to Degree-4 The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on: WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node. this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node. any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC CMDX 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) Express Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT CMDX 1 VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 R-OADM To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) BMDX1000 BMDX1000 CMDX 12 1 VOA 2 LOFA1110 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 OTS 1 ALCT ADD OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 45 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 45 . but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) TR-OADM Rx side OADC1100 1:2 30% 70% OCNC1220 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC1300 1:8 1 1 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 VOA VOA TDMX1180 x8 2 2 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) TDMX1180 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 — 1 — 46 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. then several drop paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices. OADC1100 and OADC1300). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability The WSS. which implements the power equalization. the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes. The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler (OADC0104).4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier. is an N port device with the following functionalities: Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing WDM channels spectrum equalization Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and is reported in the following slide: On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier. Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 46 . The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers (TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels. On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750 and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 47 .4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.] LOFA11y0_Unidir ALCT WMAN3174 OADC0104 OSC 2 2 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ ADD Up to 32λ Express TR-OADM Up to 32λ 2 VOA 1 Tx side OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ LOFA1110 LOFA1110 4:1 4:1 4:1 VOA 1 VOA 1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) OADC1300 8:1 Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8 4:1 OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 — 1 — 47 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 48 . WMAN3 provides the following functions: WDM channels Multiplexing Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. removing the need for sites interventions unless new add/drop transponders are required All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices. then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC splitter card.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 Express Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT WMAN3174 ADD D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) TR-OADM OTS 1 ALCT M D OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 — 1 — 48 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. WDM channels spectrum equalization This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received by any transponder locally installed.

.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 49 . AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions. it can be used also for Degree 2 and 3 applications. AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. In particular when at Degree 3 application installation. Blocked : the channel is blocked. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s. Nevertheless. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM. it provides the opportunity to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1:8 De-multiplexing part 1 VOA 2 x8 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 LOFA1110 VOA 2 TDMX1180 M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part OCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler . it can be kept instead of OCNC1230.OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason: . Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice: OCNC1230. it is already know that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.] OCNC1230 Up to 72λ 1:2 OADC1100 TR-OADM D OADC1300 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LOFA1110 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 — 1 — 49 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2. Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states : Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1. TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths to/from the aggregate signal for both directions. OCNC1240 or OADC1102. before TR-OADM Degree 2.

] WMAN3174 ADD TR-OADM Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ M Multiplexing part 2 LOFA1110 VOA 4:1 2 VOA LOFA1110 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 1 OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 — 1 — 50 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) M : Multiplexing part All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 50 .

AddDrop_3 : the channel from OTS 3 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 3. A Y Node configuration may be used as a connection point in a meshed network. AddDrop_1 and Express from OTS23 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 direction and transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2. Each channel of the Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following states : Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1. Nevertheless.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based)) LOFA11y0 1 OSC OCNC 1230 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s Express OADC 0104 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA11y0 1 VOA 2 OSC VOA 2 D OTS 1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) ALCT 2 VOA OSC M D Express Express ALCT To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) OTS 3 M ADD 1 OADC 0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 2 VOA OCNC 1230 1 OSC LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 WMAN3174 ADD Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M OCNC 1230 2 LOFA11y0 VOA OSC OADC 0104 ALCT 1 VOA 2 OSC TR-OADM LOFA11y0 1 OTS 2 1 — 1 — 51 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 51 . AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 3 directions. Blocked : the channel is blocked. it is already known that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be done in the future). OCNC 1230 is the recommended board for Degree-3 application.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. OCNC1240 can be used also (mainly when at the installation phase. AddDrop_2 and Express from OTS13 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1. AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1. AddDrop_3 and Express from OTS12 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 3 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1. Express from OTS23 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 2 directions. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80 channels. Express from OTS13 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1.

Each Multidirectional add/drop block is able to manage up to 64 chs in add/drop and these channels can be dynamically associated to any direction supported by the TR-OADM node All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 provides the capability to re-configure any nodes remotely in terms of wavelength assignment to each channel and pass-through. The only missing degree of flexibility is the capability to add/drop channels dynamically to/from any direction supported by the TR-OADM node.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop LOFA11y0 1 OSC OCNC 1280 VOA 2 DEMUX part (DROP side) ALCT Express OTS 1 2 VOA OSC 1 OADC 0104 WMAN3174 Up to 64λ MUX part (ADD side) Directionless LOFA11y0 Connectivity Block OCNC 1280 TR-OADM LOFA11y0 1 OSC VOA 2 DEMUX part (DROP side) ALCT Express OTS 2 2 VOA OSC 1 OADC 0104 WMAN3174 Up to 64λ MUX part (ADD side) LOFA11y0 Connectivity Block All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 52 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance TR-OADM with Multidirectional add/drop architecture (Local OTS) The TR-OADM described in R. This additional functionality is supported through the so-called Multidirectional add/drop configuration.5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 52 .4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 53 .4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Up to 32λ 4:1 x8 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 VOA 1 LOFA1110 OADC1750 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop [cont.] DEMUX part (DROP side) Up to 64λ OADC 0104 1 LOFA11y0 VOA 2 8:1 x8 WMAN3174 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) ALCT TDMX1180 MUX part (ADD side) OCNC 1280 Up to 64λ OADC1300 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ 4:1 ALCT 2 VOA LOFA1110 1 OADC 0104 WMAN3174 2 VOA 1 8:1 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) x8 LOFA1110 Up to 32λ Up to 4λ 8:1 Up to 4λ 4:1 DEMUX part (DROP side) MUX part (ADD side) 1 — 1 — 53 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.18 Back-to-Back Terminal To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 1 CMDX 1 BtB LOFA11yz_Unidir LOFA11yz_Unidir Band 1 1 1 OSC VOA 2 VOA 2 OSC BMDX1000 BMDX1000 ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 TRBD TRBD 2 VOA 1 OSC CMDX 12 CMDX 12 LOFA11yz_Unidir LOFA11yz_Unidir Band 12 1 — 1 — 54 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When all the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated. The non added/dropped channels are 3R (retiming. the 1626 LM is a back-to-back terminal or a hub node. reshaping.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 4. reamplifying) regenerated.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 54 . WARNING : The optical pass-through is not permitted for BMDX1000.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Existing infrastructure upgrade 1 — 1 — 55 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 55 .

TRBD : legacy 1686 WM boards : new 1626 LM boards 1 — 1 — 56 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.10Gb/s 1 OMDX 16 16 1626 LM -TRBD 1626 LM .5. This configuration allows to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels to/from the DWDM line. whatever the actual number “N” of installed channels. the diagram is similar with Demux and without attenuator (Att.1 and Att.1 EXP 1686 WM .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 56 . The remaining 32–“N” channels can be filled with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the OMDX16 boards of the 1686 WM mux/demux scheme. able to multiplex (or de–multiplex.2). the other one in blue band) on a 100GHz grid. This upgrade is always possible. the second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 16 channels at 100GHz each to have one DWDM signal of 32 channels at 100GHz in C band (by means of the expansion board). For the receiver side. 1626 LM transponders connected to the 1686 WM mux/demux and OADM’s for both upgrades and greenfield (in this last case no 1686 WM transponders used).0A — Operation and Maintenance The 1686 WM is based on two mux/demux stages: the first one is made up of two OMDX boards.2 OMDX 16 New NE 16 1626 LM .1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. because the boards are bi-directional) up to 16 chs each (one in red band.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 1686 WM Terminal ATT.TRBD 1 ATT.

5.] 1st stage 1686 WM OFA 2nd stage 1686 WM OADM4/8 1686 WM OADM 1626 LM . able to add/drop up to 4/8 channels per direction (east/west) according to the board type.TRBD New NE : legacy 1686 WM boards : new 1626 LM boards 1 — 1 — 57 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. with the extraction/insertion of the OSC before/after the double–stage amplifier. the OADM structure is the same than the upgrade one but with only 1626 LM transponders. In greenfield installation. 1626 LM transponders.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OADM repeater is made up of: line amplifiers. directly connected to the 1686 WM boards. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. transponders. In upgrade installation.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected [cont. OADM board.10 Gb/s 1686 WM .TRBD 1686 WM .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 57 . can be added to the already installed 1686 WM OADM system.1.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.10 Gb/s 1626 LM .

Up to 32 1626 LM channels in the Blue band for 48 channels final system capacity. Hence it is possible to increase the channels number to more than 32.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 58 .2 50 Ghz 1626 LM -TRBD New NE : legacy 1686 WM boards : new 1626 LM boards 1 — 1 — 58 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. filling the available band with 50GHz spaced channels.1 EXP OMDX 16 16 1686 WM -10 Gb/s 1626 LM -TRBD 1 1626 LM -TRBD 1626 LM -TRBD 1 8 8 CMDX BMDX CMDX ATT.2: chosen to have the same power/band at the EXP inputs ATT. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The free band (Blue or Red) is filled with 1626 LM transponders at 50 GHz . The advantage of this configuration is that one band is filled @ 50 GHz channel spacing and the total capacity is up to 52 channels (when Red band is upgraded with the 1626 LM transponders).0A — Operation and Maintenance This configuration is possible when only one 1686 WM Mux/Demux is installed (up to 16 channels).1. It is applicable to both upgrades and greenfields (no 1686 WM transponders in this last case).1 and Att. allowing the connection of the 1626 LM mux/demux to the unused port of the 1686 WM EXP board.1 1686 WM upgrade 5.5. The total link capacity is decreased when there are add/drop channels in the band populated with 1626 LM transponders and mux/demux: the channels 50 GHz spaced from the add/drop channels must be skipped for filtering issues (up to 8 channels skipped).2 Upgrade up to 52 channels Att. For the receiver side. Up to 36 (33) 1626 LM channels in the Red band for 52 (49) channels final system capacity with the +20 dBm amplifier (+17/+14 dBm amplifier).2).1: from 1686 WM installation 1686 WM -10 Gb/s 1 100 Ghz Att. the diagram is similar without attenuator (Att.

1 1626 LM -TRBD 1626 LM -TRBD BMDX 1 8 CMDX 1626 LM -TRBD : legacy 1640 WM boards New NE : new 1626 LM boards 1 — 1 — 59 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. On grid channels).1: value to be chosen to equalize the channel powers 1640 WM -10 Gb/s 1 8:1 8 TCS401 5:1 1640 WM -10 Gb/s 2:1 1626 LM -TRBD 1 8 CMDX ATT.2 1640 WM upgrade 5. BMDX). The second one can mix up to 5 aggregate signals of 8 channels to reach 40 wavelengths on a 100GHz grid (supported by the TCS302. The upgrade configuration connecting directly the 1626 LM tributaries with the TCS boards is not allowed. Off–grid channels. The upgrade is allowed only when up to 40 channels of the 1640 WM system are installed.2. TCS302 and TCS401 boards).5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 59 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The receiver side is similar without attenuator. The third one combines the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have one DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (function provided by the TCS401 board). The 1626 LM aggregate signal is connected to the unused input/output port of the 2:1 combiner/1:2 splitter of the TCS401 board. all the remaining 80–“N” channels can be added with 1626 LM transponders + Mux/Demux (CMDX.0A — Operation and Maintenance The TCS scheme is based on 3 mux/demux stages (only the B&W to WDM direction is described): The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 8 channels on a 200GHz grid (function supported by the TCS1xx. and TCS401.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards Att. Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels (40).

TRBD MDX 441 1626 LM.2. Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels the remaining 80–“N” channels can be filled with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the MDX342 boards of the 1640 WM mux/demux scheme. this function is supported by the MDX342 (On grid channels).TRBD 1 MDX 343 50 Ghz 100 Ghz Off Grid New NE 40 1626 LM -TRBD : legacy 1640 WM boards : new 1626 LM boards 1 — 1 — 60 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 60 . It is not allowed to upgrade an already installed 1640 WM system (with MDX441 and MDX342 boards) with the 1626 LM mux/demux scheme (instead of MDX343) connected to the MDX441 board.0A — Operation and Maintenance The MDX multiplexing architecture is based on two mux / demux stages: The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 40 channels on a 100GHz grid. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5. The second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have one DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (by means of the MDX441 board).2 1640 WM upgrade 5.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards 1640 WM .10 Gb/s 1 MDX 342 100 Ghz On Grid 40 1626 LM .

TRBD MCC / OCC10 8 MUX 1 New NE 8 DEMUX 1 MCC / OCC10 8 DEMUX 1 8 MUX 1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS SB λ SPV 1626 LM -TRBD OMDX8100_M_S2 MCC / OCC10 LB WDM out MCC / OCC10 8 DEMUX 1 SB LB λ SPV WDM in 1 — 1 — 61 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 61 .3 1696 MS addition 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected OMDX8100_M_S1 8 MUX 1 : legacy 1696 MS boards : new 1626 LM boards 8 DEMUX 1 OMDX8100_M_L2 8 MUX 1 1626 LM.5.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 62 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 1 — 62 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Ethernet applications 1 — 1 — 63 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 63 .

In order to be compatible with the STM-64 transponders of the 1626LM .From user side.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front plate).0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 64 . 2xGBE_FC board . VC-4-7v for Gigabit Ethernet). each received GbE signal is first tagged with a VLAN ID and then is concentrated into . These VC-4-nv are then multiplexed into the final 2.From User side. Line 1 – P#13 Line 2 – P#14 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. but only two of them can be used (U1 and U2 on the front plate). Each resulting GFP-T frame is then encapsulated into a Virtual Container (VC-4-nv) via a Virtual Concatenation according to the signal type (VC-4-6v for Fibre Channel. this latter frame is finally converted in 10GbE WAN PHY thanks to the WIS mapping. the Generic Framing Procedure – Transparent mode is used first to transport the data traffic (two Gigabit Ethernet or two Fibre Channel signals) into a SDH/SONET (STM-16/OC-48) frame. ETHC1000 board .5G SDH/SONET signal.1 Traffic concentration and mapping 2xGBE_FC board User side * #1 GE or FC #1 Front side ETHC1000 board User side * #2 GE or FC #2 #1 GE #xx #12 GE #yy GFP-T Mapping VLAN tagging VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v Virtual Concatenation 10GE WAN Line P#13 10GE WAN XFP P#13 Line #1 Front side Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration Matrix 10GE WAN Line P#14 10GE WAN XFP P#14 Line #2 Front side Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48 (Bridge & Switch) SFP SFP Line #1 Line #2 Not used in 1626 LM R5.0A Front side Back plane access 1 — 1 — 64 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.There are two 10GbE ports on the line side: - a 10GbE LAN frame.* Warning: Four interfaces/ports are present on client side.6 Ethernet applications 6. Two interfaces/ports (and related bridge & switch) are present on line/aggregate side.

or a WDM SFP module to be connected directly to the relevant CMDX or OMDX.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 65 . 2xGBE_FC : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module. The optical line interface is either a B&W SFP module to be connected to a TRBC (4 User inputs).2 Boards interconnections: examples STM-64 TRBD User#1 User#1 User#9 ETHC 1000 2x GBE_FC 10GbE WAN B&W STM-16 B&W λ1 User#2 λ2 TRBC CMDX BMDX User#1 User#2 2x GBE_FC λ3 WDM 1626LM R5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The optical line interface is B&W XFP module and must be connected to a STM-64 (OC-192) TRBD. .0A Master shelf All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance ETHC1000 : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module.0A Master shelf or Secondary shelf 1 — 1 — 65 1626LM R5.6 Ethernet applications 6.

6 Ethernet applications 6. by means of up to sixteen 2xGE_FC boards (managing up to 2 x 1GbE/1FC streams each). up to 32 x GbE/FC streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568. Two boards (2xGE_FC and ETHC1000) are supported in order to perform the traffic concentration and mapping. per each shelf : up to 144 x GbE streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568. up to twelve boards can be plugged in current release). These data traffic boards are used in point to point applications (transparent LAN to LAN services).0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 66 .6nm). mixed configurations are supported.0A provides a modular transmission capacity by multiplexing. by means of up to twelve ETHC1000 boards (managing up to 12 x 1GbE streams each.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service WDM Terminal with several GbE ports Dedicated wavelength approach WDM Terminal with several GbE ports 2xGBE_FC 1 — 1 — 66 ETHC1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6nm).0A — Operation and Maintenance The main purpose of the Ethernet applications is to improve data traffic transport capabilities of the 1626 LM. System capacity The Alcatel 1626 LM R 5.

7 1626 LM system layout 1 — 1 — 67 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 67 .

Up to 5 trays can be installed. Each rack is equipped with a maximum of three sub-racks with a fan unit and an air filter located at the bottom of each sub-rack. either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or Optical trays (3AL 94942 AA). if DCU is needed.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 68 . For Optinex Rack with TRU. Power supply. All subracks are identical. if DCU is needed. it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA) located at the bottom of the rack. shelf controller and rack alarm interface units must be fitted to all shelves. fitted with different units depending on the subrack functionality.1 Optinex Rack layout OPTINEX > Top Rack Unit Fiber storage P P W W R R P P W W R R Up to 16x10Gb/s or 4x40Gb/s optical channels in one single shelf Up to 48x10Gb/s or 12x40Gb/s 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 > FANS Fan Fan optical channels in one single rack Up to 3 shelves can be hosted in one rack Up to 6 racks are managed Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R > 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R > 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan 1 — 1 — 68 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA) located at the bottom of the rack. either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or Optical trays (3AL 94942 AA). fans.7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 There is no requirement for access to the rear for maintenance. One shelf is declared as the “Master shelf” and the other shelves are declared as “secondary shelves”. so racks can be installed back-toback. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. For Optinex Rack with MA NG-TRU. Up to 3 trays can be installed.

39 and 40. medium height. 19 and 20. small height. medium height slots plus the two 25mm wide. this mechanic fits into slots 1. this mechanic fits into slots 21. Six different mechanics are available for the 1626 LM boards: 20 mm width. it can fit in slots 5. 2. 25 mm width. 26.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf 11 1 — 1 — 69 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. medium height slot plus one 25mm wide. small height ones which are under them. it fits in slots 3 plus 23. The units which have this mechanics use the connector from the left medium height slot (slot 5 in the above example) to communicate with the SC. Double width. The relevant units use the connector from the medium height slot to communicate with the SC.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 69 . this mechanic fits into slots 23 to 38 20 mm width. I. this mechanic takes four slots : two adjacent 25mm wide. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4 plus 24 to 18 plus 38.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The shelf is divided into 41 slots. tall height (these boards are foreseen for future releases). tall height. 25 mm width. small height one which is under it.7 1626 LM system layout 7. this mechanic fits into slots 3 to 18 25 mm width. 25. small height.e. this mechanic takes two slots: one 25mm wide. medium height. 6. 22. Thus.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 70 .7 1626 LM system layout 7.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application .Example 21 22 3 4 55 6 6 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP HSKU OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 BMDX1000 LOFA11y0 ALCT1010 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 TRBD11y1 35 36 37 TRBD11y1 USIB 38 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 70 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0_Unidir Booster CMDX 2 ALCT CMDX 12 1 VOA TRBD11y1 2 OSC To/from RAIU PSUP CMDX 1 BMDX1000 WDM line 2 VOA 1 OSC To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LOFA11y0_Unidir Preamplifier All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 71 RAIU PSUP .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP CMDX1010 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 TRBD11y1 ESCT2000 CMDX1010 19 20 TRBD11y1 38 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 71 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application .

7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance To/from OMDX8100_S2 + OMDX8100_S1 To/from OMDX8100_L2 To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC Up to 8λ EXTRA IN/OUT EXP Up to 16λ IN/OUT λ1 LOFA11y1_Unidir Booster λ2 1 VOA 2 OSC RAIU To/from WDM line 2 VOA 1 OSC To/from TRBD/TRBC LOFA11y1_Unidir Preamplifier λ8 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 72 PSUP 21 22 3 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 OMDX8100_L1_X .Example PSUP HSKU OSCU1010 LOFA11y1 LOFA11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 TRBD11y1 35 36 37 TRBD11y1 USIB 38 19 OMDX8100_L1_X 20 ESCT2000 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 72 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Example PSUP OMDX8100_L2 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 OMDX8100_S2 19 20 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 73 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 1626 LM system layout 7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 73 TRBD11y1 ESCT2000 38 RAIU PSUP 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y0_Unidir VOA 1 2 OSC To/from WDM line OSC To/from WDM line 2 OSC VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.Example 21 22 3 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP OSCU1010 ESCT2000 1 2 23 24 25 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 41 20 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 74 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 74 PSUP .7 Line Repeater Master shelf .

0A — Operation and Maintenance PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir WMAN1 OADC0104 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN1 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 75 PSUP RAIU .7 1626 LM system layout 7.Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) ALCT1010 ALCT1010 OSCU1010 WMAN1100 ESCT2000 USIB OADC 0104 OADC 0104 1 2 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 WMAN1100 38 19 20 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 75 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf .

0A — Operation and Maintenance AGE: Automatic Gain Equalizer LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir WMAN3 OADC0104 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 76 PSUP RAIU .Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 (booster) ALCT1010 ALCT1010 LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) WMAN3174 ESCT2000 OADC 0104 OADC 0104 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 WMAN3174 35 36 37 38 19 20 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 76 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf .

7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 7) CMDX 1 CMDX 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 Band 1 1 OSC VOA 2 TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 VOA 2 OSC 2 VOA OSC 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Band 12 LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Example 21 22 3 4 4 55 6 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 HSKU PSUP BMDX1100 ALCT1010 LOFA11y0 ALCT1010 BMDX1100 OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 31 32 33 34 TRBD11y1 35 36 37 TRBD11y1 38 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 77 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 77 PSUP RAIU BMDX1100 BMDX1100 ALCT ALCT .10 BOADM Master shelf .

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 78 RAIU PSUP CMDX1010 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.Example 21 22 3 3 4 4 55 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 39 40 PSUP BOFA (optional) BOFA (optional) BOFA (optional) TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 BOFA (optional) OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 TRBD4312 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 78 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf .

Example 21 22 3 3 4 4 55 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 39 40 PSUP BOFA (optional) BOFA (optional) BOFA (optional) TRBD4412 TRBD4412 TRBD4412 BOFA (optional) OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 TRBD4412 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 CMDX1052 20 ESCT2000 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 79 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 79 RAIU PSUP .7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Example PSUP OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 TRBD11y1 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 TRBD11y1 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 80 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance The 1626 LM subracks and software give flexibility in the unit declaration.13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 80 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 RAIU PSUP 21 22 3 3 4 4 55 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 39 40 .7 1626 LM system layout 7.

in comparison with shelves/racks number. 10Gb/s rate.Warning: 1626 LM R 5. one color is used per OTS.Example TRU Line & WMAN Shelf OTS 1 Air deflector TRU Line & WMAN Shelf OTS 2 Air deflector N°2 N°2 N°2 Line 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD & WMAN With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX Shelf OTS 3 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector TRU TRU TRU TRU N°3 N°3 N°3 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA N°1 N°4 N°4 N°1 N°1 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA Air input Air input Air input Air input Air input Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector N°4 8 TRBD With TDMX & OADC1750 & LOFA Air input Air deflector 1 — 1 — 81 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The following table summarizes the capacity of a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration. 10Gb/s rate.0A is able to manage 6 racks at the maximum All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. unprotected.7 1626 LM system layout 7. .14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack . which can support up to 72 added/dropped channels.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 81 . In the illustration. CAUTION : It is strongly recommended not to mix OTS in racks and subracks. This organization brings a clear position of each function/direction and makes easier the implementation and the operation. unprotected.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The complete rack view example illustrates a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration.

Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 1 OADC1300 OSCU1010 ESCT2000 USIB USIB 25 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 OSCU1010 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 82 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 82 PSUP .15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 .7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y0 OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M ALCT 2 VOA OSC LOFA11y0 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance OCNC1230 Up to 72λ 1:2 OADC1100 OADC1300 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LOFA1110 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1:8 x8 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 83 PSUP D 1 1 VOA LOFA1110 VOA 2 2 .16 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 .Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 2 OADC1300 ESCT2000 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 83 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance WMAN3174 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 PSUP M LOFA1110 2 VOA 4:1 LOFA1110 2 VOA To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ 8:1 OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ 1 OADC1300 x8 x8 4:1 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 3 OADC1300 ESCT2000 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 84 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 84 .17 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 .

Example (8 first channels) PSUP OADC TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 1100 TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) (Booster) OADC ALCT1010 TRBD11y1 0104 ESCT2000 OADC1750 25 1 2 2 25 25 25 OCNC TRBD11y1 1230 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TDMX1180 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 85 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance WMAN3174 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 M 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) OCNC1230 Up to 72λ 1:2 OADC1100 D TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 85 PSUP 21 22 33 3 25 23 23 44 24 25 24 55 25 25 25 24 66 26 77 7 25 27 25 24 8 8 28 9 9 25 29 25 24 10 10 30 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 .7 1626 LM system layout 7.

7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance OADC1100 D OADC1300 WMAN3174 Up to 32λ Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ RAIU PSUP 21 22 33 3 25 23 23 44 24 25 24 55 25 25 25 24 66 26 77 7 25 27 25 24 8 8 28 9 9 25 29 25 24 10 10 30 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 M LOFA1110 2 VOA 1:8 1 1 LOFA1110 VOA Up to 32λ x8 OADC1300 8:1 x8 4:1 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 TDMX1180 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 86 .19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS .Example (From 9th to 72nd channel) PSUP OADC TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 1100 TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) (Booster) OADC ALCT1010 TRBD11y1 0104 ESCT2000 OADC1750 OCNC TRBD11y1 1230 TRBD11y1 TDMX1180 TRBD11y1 25 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 1 2 2 25 25 25 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 LOFA1110 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 86 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 HSKU PSUP LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) OSCU1010 ALCT1010 ALCT1010 WMAN1100 ESCT2000 BMDX1000 BMDX1000 OADC OADC USIB 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 WMAN1100 38 19 20 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 87 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the WMAN1100 boards are located in the “Master shelf” and related transponders are inserted in a “Secondary shelf”.24 and 25] [16.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 87 PSUP RAIU .20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM . WMAN1100 boards can be inserted in: [3.37 and 38] All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance In the above example. It that case.17 and 18] + [36.4 and 5] + [23.7 1626 LM system layout 7. It is also possible to insert the WMAN1100 in a “Secondary shelf” with the related transponders to reduce the inter-shelf cabling between.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 88 PSUP BMDX1000 CMDX 12 LOFA1110 1 VOA 2 Express .21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 .Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 1 OSCU1010 ESCT2000 BMDX1000 ALCT1010 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 25 27 25 24 28 OCNC 1230 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 88 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 1626 LM system layout 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC CMDX 1 VOA 2 Express To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) OTS 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) ALCT ADD 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 .0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 89 PSUP LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 BMDX1000 12 .Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 2 ESCT2000 BMDX1000 ALCT1010 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 25 27 25 24 28 OCNC 1230 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 89 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance Express ADD Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT CMDX 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) WMAN3174 OTS 2 CMDX To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 1626 LM system layout 7.

7 1626 LM system layout 7.23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf 495 mm 73 mm PSUP 12 200 mm LOFA11YZ OSCU1010 5 4 3 2 HSKU1100 10 RAIU1100 6 PSUP 11 LOFA11YZ 8 1 9 7 F A N S 13 ESCT2000 1 — 1 — 90 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. it only supports the following boards : ESCT2000 (slot 1) LOFA11yz (from slot 2 to 5) – Slots 2 and 5 are recommended OSCU (from slot 2 to 6) FANS2000 (slot 13) EMPM1000 (slots 3 and 4) PUSP (slots 11 and 12) RAIU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 9 is recommended HSKU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 10 is recommended All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In R 5.0A. As a consequence. the 1626LM compact shelf is only used for Line Repeater configuration.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 90 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Each power distribution supply to a subrack is protected by an individual thermo-magnetic circuit breaker. 5V Duplicated supply for each card Main boards PSUP -48V B -40. Lower voltages are also generated by DC-DC converters and distributed through the backplane to functional units on the subrack.0 V and provide filtering and surge suppression.7V A 5.5 to -57 V Supplied from Top Rack Unit DC input 3. An auxiliary supply (3.4V) is also provided to each board to maintain alarm operation in the case of local DC/DC converter failure.24 Power Feeding sub-system Subrack -48V A Filter DC/ DC Filtered -48V A Sharing diodes DC/ DC 3V.7V B 5. which can provide up to 3 kW at a nominal -48 V DC.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 91 .5 V to –57. Each subrack has two power supply units (PSUP) working from the –48v supply in a load-sharing configuration for protection against failure of one unit. These have an acceptance range of –40. 5V PSUP 3. The power supply for each subrack is provided from the top of the rack through the Top Rack Unit.7V and 5. The power supply is divided between two power rails to increase reliability.4V A Filter DC/ DC Filtered -48V B Back Panel Power supply distribution Auxiliary boards 3V. A return path to each of the two -48V supplies (A & B) from the units to the power supplies is provided.7 1626 LM system layout 7. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4V B 1 — 1 — 91 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

6nm. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 92 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Your answers : window is used for DWDM systems. 1 – The 3rd optical 1 – The extended C-Band is used by the 1626 LM R 5.0A. TR-OADM and back-to-back 6– terminal configurations are available for 1626 LM R 5. 3 – The minimum spacing between 2 channels is 50GHz for 1626 LM R5. LR.0A. Small OADM. ROADM.0A. 4 – The OSC is mainly dedicated to the transport of a 2Mb/s supervision frame and if needed an other 2Mb/s signal as user data channel. 5 – Up to 12 CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit. between 1530nm 2– 2– 3– 4– 5– and 1568. 8 8 -– BMDX1100 unit is needed for B-OADM repeater configuration. 7– 7 – O-SNCP and OMSP. 6 – LT.Answer the Questions 1 – What is the operating window of DWDM systems ? 2 – Which optical band is used by the 1626 LM ? 4 – What is the function of the OSC ? 3 – What is the minimum spacing between 2 channels ? 5 – How many CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit ? 6 – Which NE type configurations are available ? 7 – Which protections are available ? 8 – Which BMDX unit is needed for BOADM repeater configuration ? Time allowed: 15 minutes 1 — 1 — 92 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. BOADM.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 93 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 1 — 93 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Small OADM.709 10Gb/s and 40Gb/s Transponders Ethernet aggregation and transport J0 and OTUk traces management 1640 WM.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 94 .0A is a very flexible solution Terrestrial applications : Regional. ring and meshed network topologies Terminal. ROADM and TR-OADM configurations G.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 1686 WM Upgrade of existing infrastructures Highly integrated Up to 48 transponders in one rack All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 1 — 94 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ULH 50GHz or 100GHz channel spacing Linear. B-t-B. LH. B-OADM.Module Summary 1626 LM R 5. Repeater.

Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 1 — 1 — 95 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 95 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 1 — Page 96 .End of Module System General Description 1 — 1 — 96 Product Overview — System General Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 1 .0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 1 Product Overview Module 2 System Operation Overview 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 1—2—2 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.

0A 1—2—3 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 3 . you should be able to: Describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Module Objectives [cont.] 1—2—4 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 4 .

2 Optical Transport Network benefits 3.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work? 3.4 G709 framing structure 3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? 3.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle 4.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work? 3.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 Management tools 1.2 Management internal architecture 1.5 UNI and NNI interfaces 3.5 OMSP Protection: Failure detection Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 OSNCP architecture 4.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1—2—5 4.709 standard in 1626 LM 3.1 Main operation facilities 2.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf 1.1 1626 LM management 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 5 .5 Navigation diagram 2 Operation and maintenance facilities 2.3 1626 LM Equipment view 1.9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work? 4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy 3.1 OTN network layers 3.3 OMSP Protection: Principle 4.2 Main maintenance facilities 3 G.

] Switch to notes view! 1—2—6 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Table of Contents [cont.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 6 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 7 .1 Management tools 1—2—7 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface. carried also by the OSC.0A).0 The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork. SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R 5. A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G. SPLM is integrated in the 1350 OMS from NR9.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 8 .DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes) In addition to DCC. the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice channel) and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel. In latter case.703) between each NE is available for any purpose.1 1626 LM management Three software applications can be used to operate and maintain the WDM network : 1320 CT 1350 OMS SPLM Tool 1350 OMS & SPLM DC N DC N GNE BtB Q3 DCC/OSC DCC/OSC BtB WDM Metro ring network DCC/OSC All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 SPLM 1320 CT 1—2—8 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the same optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels. SPLM tool description All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the directly connected NE to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE.0A — Operation and Maintenance F LR DCC/OSC BOADM Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1350 OMS.1 (1626LM R 5.1 Management tools 1. carried by the OSC : OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes) OTS.

When the board is located in the master shelf. Equipment Controller function EC is in charge of equipment configuration. The IS-LINK realizes the communication between the EC and all the SCs located in separated shelves.1 Management tools 1. Analogue Measurement. logging and forwarding of events and alarms received by SCs. The Database which contains the NE configuration is saved in the pluggable Flash card. history storage of 15 Minutes and 24hour PM data. Communication between the EC and the local SC is done through the ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus). OSI/IP routing capability configuration. ASAP. removal of ESCT card in Master shelf when power comes back will clear configuration registers of secondary cards (all units).: alarms collection. access control. filtering. only the SC functionality is provided. Performance data.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 SECONDARY SHELF The controller sub–system is based on a two–level model: Equipment Controller (EC) Shelf Controller (SC). Failure or removal of either type of management unit (EC/SC) will not directly affect traffic. Alarms correlations. The ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the EC function and the SC function. Card Detection. When the board is located in secondary shelves. There is one active Equipment Controller in each node (first level controller) and one active Shelf Controller in each shelf (second level controller). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Management internal architecture MASTER SHELF 1—2—9 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In case of complete power outage. both functionalities are operational and active.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 9 . remote inventory and data EEPROM reading). software download. Firmware version.g. Shelf Controller function In a shelf. software version management. all the boards are connected to the SC via the SPI or ISPB (for PM collection on ETHC1000 board) bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e. software activation.

WMAN3. TMDX1180. ALCT1010 and FAN1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The above shelf belong to a 1626 LM R5. slot configuration.1 Management tools 1. the following: 2 x PSUP1000.0A installed in Degree 3 TR-OADM application. “Board alarm synthesis indicator” colour from Equipment view (as shown above) reflects the highest current alarm severity.0A — Operation and Maintenance From 1320 CT or from the OS (135O OMS). number of shelves per rack.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 10 . 2 x LOFA1110. When a board is “in service and locked”. This first shelf includes among other boards. TRBD1191. OADC1750. Alarm and administrative status are provided through the different “view” levels. regarding the “Equipment domain” alarms only. ESCT2000. port view. The board must be set “out of service” before any change (removal or modification of slot configuration). OSCU1010. no modification is enabled regarding the corresponding slot configuration. board view.3 1626 LM Equipment view Subrack identification and location in the equipment Board alarm synthesis indicator Empty board slot “In service and locked” administrative state indicator 1 — 2 — 10 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ETHC1000. For instance. the “Equipment view” application (also called EML-USM) displays in graphical mode the NE hardware configuration such as defined in NE software database (Management Information Base): number of racks.

0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 11 .2 x PSUP1000.1 Management tools 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above Line Repeater includes the following boards: . 2 x LOFA1120 and FAN2000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. ESCT2000.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf Configuration corresponding to a Line Repeater 1 — 2 — 11 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. OSCU1010.

1 Management tools 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 12 .5 Navigation diagram 1 — 2 — 12 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

2 Operation and maintenance facilities 1 — 2 — 13 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 13 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

ODU. 1626 LM R5. OTU and J0 traces management on OSCU. transponders and Ethernet boards Optical power management Power tuning Thresholds tuning 1 — 2 — 14 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The TR-OADM configuration (Multi-degree application) includes 3 main steps - WMAN board configuration TDMX1180 configuration Related cross-connections management All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Optical channel management .0A provides the operate a way to force the “Line state” (ON / OFF) for a given channel .2 Operation and maintenance facilities 2. boards and drawers declaration Remote inventory Optical cabling declaration Optical channel management ROADM and TR-OADM configuration O-SNCP and OMPS: cross-connections display TRBD1191 cross-connections management Ethernet transport: cross-connections management OTS.To facilitate the TR-OADM management.1 Main operation facilities Equipment configuration Subrack.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 14 .

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 15 . SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with 1350 OMS on a server. through 1350 OMS. calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel. In the current release the SPLM: provides a network topology management function. tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based) configurations.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The 1626LM provides the possibility.2 Main maintenance facilities Performance Monitoring : activation and data collection Power level measurements Spectrum acquisition on WMAN accesses SPLM tool Alarms handling OSNCP and OMSP status management Loopback management Backup and restore Remote inventory Board replacement OCPU 2104 M S 1 — 2 — 15 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The obtained data can be stored for history tracking and dedicated threshold crossing alarms can be set SPLM tool description Analog Performance Monitoring The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork.2 Operation and maintenance facilities 2. of performing a regular and configurable polling of the optical powers measured on each monitoring point of the equipment.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 2 — 16 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 16 .

709 standard in 1626 LM 1 — 2 — 17 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 17 .3 G.

0A — Operation and Maintenance BACK TO BACK TERMINAL All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LINE TERMINAL The 1626 LM implements the Optical Transport Network standard (specified in ITU-T G.709) to provide Operations. Conn. Administration. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 18 . Maintenance and Provisioning functionalities to this DWDM platform.1 OTN network layers Digital Signal Path OCH Trail OMS Trail Ops OTS Phys. CLIENT TERMINAL IN LINE REPEATER IN LINE REPEATER OMS Trail Ops OTS Phys. Conn. wavelength manageable multiwavelength networks. CLIENT TERMINAL LINE TERMINAL 1 — 2 — 18 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. This recommendation – sometimes referred to as Digital Wrapper (DW) – takes single wavelength SONET/SDH technology a step further enabling transparent.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OTN (Optical Transport Network) architecture is defined in the ITU-T G. alarms. OTN makes leverage on the transport layers defined in the OTH in order to provide: Mapping of a client signal of any rate (up to payload capacity) into containers at pre-defined bit-rates. while the ITU-T G.) Capability to support hierarchical multiplexing and concatenation To map a synchronous signal (SDH) into an asynchronous one (WDM) Client-independent networking 1 — 2 — 19 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.872 Recommendation. The principles of these Architectures are implemented in Alcatel-Lucent WDM Equipment starting from 1626 LM R 2.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3. support for complex connectivity. etc. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This allows: Embedded associated overhead information for management and networking purposes (monitoring.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 19 .0. protections.709 Recommendation defines its interface in terms of Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH).2 Optical Transport Network benefits The implementation of the OTN Architecture in the WDM Equipment extends the transport control capabilities of the WDM optical channels.

The index n in OTM-n specifies the number of OCC transported by the structure (not including the OSC). The Optical Channels.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3. ODUk and OTUk layers are introduced in OTH in order to support the network management and supervision functionality through the contents of the additional signal overhead (OH) of the Units. mapped to the OCC structure.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 20 OTUk: Optical (channel) Transport Unit . according to the following convention: K=1 represents an approximate rate of 2. are transported into an information structure named Optical Transport Module (OTM-n). the OCCs acting as tributary slots within the OTM-n architecture. The OTM-n with full functionalities transports an additional overhead: the OTM Overhead Signal (OOS). The OSS information is mapped into a separate channel named Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC). OTM-n plays a role similar to STM-n in SDH architecture. OMS and OTS sections.5 Gbit/s K=2 represents an approximate rate of 10 Gbit/s K=3 represents an approximate rate of 40 Gbit/s The OPUk.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy Optical (channel) Payload Unit Optical (channel) Data Unit Optical Channel Optical Transport (channel) Unit Optical Channel Carrier Optical Multiplex Section OTM Overhead Signal Optical Transmission section Optical Supervisory Channel Optical Physical Section 1 — 2 — 20 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. containing overhead information related to the OCh.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In OTH the Optical Channel layer is further structured in layers: OPUk: Optical (channel) Payload Unit ODUk: Optical (channel) Data Unit The index k specifies the signal rate supported. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

PM. like for example. ODU-k is then obtained by adding another OH to the OPU-k. OTU-k section). the justification bits required for asynchronous mappings. FA OH consists of a Frame Alignment Signal to detect the beginning of the OTU-2 signal and a Multi Frame Alignment Signal as OTU and ODU frames can span multiple OTU frames. The OTU-2 OH provides bytes for the Section Monitoring (Trail Trace Identifier. The OPU OH is therefore terminated at the point where the OPU is assembled and disassembled. TTI.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 First. The ODU-k OH consists of portions dedicated to the end-to-end ODU-k path and to six levels of tandem connection monitoring. The framing structure depicted above does not take into account the level 3 (k=3) corresponding to 40Gbit/s bit-rate.4 G709 framing structure G-709 framing performed by transponders provides Operation and Maintenance tools for the WDM line management GCC0. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. respectively.709 Gb/s : Other ODU-2 O ODTUG-12 H 10.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3. The OPU OH consists of the Payload Structure Identifier (PSI) which includes the Payload Type (PT) and overhead bits associated with the mapping of client signals into the payload. The OTU-2 frame structure is based on the ODU-2 frame structure by adding an OH and a FEC code. The overhead of OTU-2 is composed of a Frame Alignment Overhead (FA OH in the figure above) and an OTU-2 OH to support operational functions for transport via one or several Optical Channel Carriers (OCC). The ODU-k path OH is terminated where the ODU-k is assembled and disassembled. Additional bytes provides two General Communication Channels (GCC1/GCC2) and Protection Communication Channels to manage Automatic Protection Switching at different levels (ODU-k path. TCM ODTUG-12 x4 ODU-1 OH OPU-1 O STM-16 H STM-16 OPU-1 1 — 2 — 21 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ODU-k TCM. TTI OPU-2 OPU-2 OTU-2 FA OH OH ODU-2 OH F E C ODU-2 OH OPU-2 O H STM-64 STM-64 OTU-2 11.09 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN 10.3 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN 9.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 21 . BIP-8…) and a General Communication Channel (GCC0).957 Gb/s : Other ODU-1 GCC1/GCC2. client signal is mapped into an OPU-k by adding an Over Head. The Tandem Connection OH is added and terminated at the source and sink of the corresponding tandem connections. APS.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 22 .709 WDM NE. In the UNI. In the UNI. while the ODUk and the OPUk sections are not. The NNI is supported over 10G TRBD only in R 5.0A.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 User to Network Interface (UNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between the Data Signal (DS).3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.5 UNI and NNI interfaces Client NE WDM Network WDM Network Client NE UNI UNI NNI Block Diagram for UNI: DS UNI OPUk ODUk OTUk OCH Block Diagram for NNI: OCH OTUk NNI ODUk frame pass-through OTUk OCH 1 — 2 — 22 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. only the OTUk section is terminated. that is the client input signal (for example a STM-64 frame) and the Optical Payload Unit (OPUk). the ODUk and the OPUk sections are terminated The UNI is the typical interface between an external NE and a G. The NNI is normally used when two transponders are connected together inside a WDM node through their B&W interface for regeneration of the client signal. Network to Network Interface (NNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between two Optical Transport Unit (OTUk).

3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3. OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to the SDH NE. It manages also the .On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. - Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side.Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-2 and OUT-2. It performs also . It is also mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this course). it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in any other one belonging to the NE. To keep an homogeneous view. - smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-2.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work? Port #1 Port #101 Client O G P I O C H O D U 2 O T U O C H O G P I Line STM64 O H STM64 OPU-2 ODU-2 OH OPU-2 FA OH OTU-2 ODU-2 OH OH OPU-2 ODU-2 G709 frame F E C 1 — 2 — 23 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 : Alarm monitoring . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 23 .

Port #1 and Port #101 are in charge of the WDM signal on the User and WDM sides in a bidirectional way. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work? Port #1 Port #101 Client O G P I O C H O T U O T U O C H O G P I Line FA OH OTU-2 ODU-2 OH OH OPU-2 G709 frame F E C ODU-2 OH OTU OTU-2 OH OPU-2 FA OH OTU-2 ODU-2 OH OH OPU-2 G709 frame F E C 1 — 2 — 24 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 24 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 : Alarm monitoring .

It is also mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). - the smallest G709 blocks of the board: OPU-1and ODU-1. It performs also the .8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? Port #1 to 4 O D U 1 O D U 2 odu 1 Port #101 Client O G P I O C H O D U 2 O T U O C H O G P I Line STM16 O H STM16 OPU-1 ODU-1 OH OPU-1 x4 ODTUG-12 ODU-1 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 2 — 25 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management: OPU-2.On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface. This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this course). To keep an homogeneous view.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. They manage also .0A — Operation and Maintenance : Alarm monitoring . it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in any other one belonging to the NE. ODU-2 and OUT-2. OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to the SDH NE.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 25 .Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. - Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side.

multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management: OPU-2.] Port #1 to 4 O D U 1 O D U 2 odu 1 Port #101 Client O G P I O C H O D U 2 O T U O C H O G P I Line O ODTUG-12 H OPU-2 ODU-2 OH OPU-2 FA OH OTU-2 ODU-2 OH OH OPU-2 ODU-2 OTU-2 F E C 1 — 2 — 26 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. They manage also . It performs also the . ODU-2 and OUT-2. it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in any other one belonging to the NE.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? [cont.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3. - Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side. It is also mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to the SDH NE.Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 : Alarm monitoring .Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this course). To keep an homogeneous view. - the smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-1 and ODU-1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 26 .On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.

it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in any other one belonging to the NE.3 G709 standard in 1626 LM 3.On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It is also mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). To keep an homogeneous view. upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-3 and OTU-3. It performs also .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 : Alarm monitoring .9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work? Port #1 Port #101 Client O G P I O C H O D U 3 O T U O C H O G P I Line STM256 O STM256 H OPU-3 ODU-3 OH OPU-3 FA OH OTU-3 ODU-3 OH OH OPU-3 ODU-3 G709 frame F E C 1 — 2 — 27 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this course).0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 27 .Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to the SDH NE. It manages also the . - Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. - smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-3.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 2 — 28 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 28 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 29 .4 Optical 1+1 Protection 1 — 2 — 29 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 and R. A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5. The OSNCP mechanism does not change in any other way compared to R. which corresponds to no alarm in default state. The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in all 10Gbs TRB of the 1626LM) is 1020 bits. The switching is still based on the backplane communication between the working and the protection transponder and takes place only if the protection path is not alarmed. this alarm is raised if the UE count overcomes a defined threshold in an observation window of 1s. The OSNCP switching based on SD relies on the count of the FEC uncorrected blocks.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle Optical Subnetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP) driven by signal degrade Revertive OSNCP over TRBD 40G and TRBD1191 1 — 2 — 30 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In R 5 the Signal Degradation (SD) switching criterion is added to the ones supported since R 3. The FUE default threshold value is 10499451. During one second there are 10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks. the new switching criterion is simply added to all the others.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 30 .4. This feature is implemented through the introduction of configurable parameters Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

the two transponders synchronize themselves such that 1 transponder shuts down the B&W laser. The protection switching is triggered by the following switching criteria : LOS.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 31 . or shutdown the laser). Switching type is “unilateral”. then to OSNCP function (that can decide to either force the B&W laser shutdown. or let the signal coming from the LSP function as it is). In fact both transponder B&W outputs are connected to a coupler. This is realized activating the OSNCP functionality on two adjacent transponders (connected by backplane links) and connecting the 2 B&W inputs to the outputs of an optical 50/50 splitter and the 2 B&W outputs to the inputs of an optical coupler supported by OCPU2104 boards. depending on the alarms on the received signal. the signal received from WDM is first submitted to LSP function (that can decide to let it as it is. ODU-AIS. in order to realize a “switch”. Thus it is important to clarify the relations between these two functions. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. in this way at anytime only one B&W output is carrying power (and signal). and the coupler always receives maximum one signal. Thus. the LSP functions operates before the OSNCP function.4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4.2 OSNCP architecture ½ OCPU2104 LR Spare Main TRBD B-t-B terminal LR TRBD Spare Main B-OADM ½ OCPU2104 1 — 2 — 31 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Switch position is independent from far end site switch position. From the functional point of view. meaning that switching criteria is local only. The maximum time allowed for the “switch” is 50 ms. The “LSP” function is also responsible for deciding whether to shutdown a B&W laser or to let it active and sending an AIS (ODU--AIS or Generic--AIS). OUT-LOF. which both act on the B&W laser. The “switch position” is not realized by means of changing the position of an optical switch. Generic AIS and FEC uncorrected errors. OTU-TIM.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM can support Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection. OTU-LOM. or generate an AIS. and the other activates it. External commands are available such as “Lockout” or “Forced switch”. not a switch.

It is therefore particularly suitable in case the main cause of transmission down-time comes from transmission fiber cable damages. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The OMSP switching is performed on the aggregated signal before the line amplification. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA board. an OCPU board acts as a splitter • On the receiving side.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OMSP consists in the following: • On the transmitting side. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS detected by Supervision board. transmission fiber) is fully protected. The corresponding alarm shall be raised.664 recommendation. • A PSCU board acts as a protection controller and manages the OCPU boards. OCPU board acts as a protection switch.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 32 .4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4. which is 70/30 in OCPU2102.3 OMSP Protection: Principle Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT and fixed add/drop (BOADM and Small OADM) The OMSP is a protection architecture that duplicates the transmission line with the exception of the transponders and the Mux/Demux. but 50/50 in OCPU2100). LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place in case the affected span is adjacent to the node itself 1 — 2 — 32 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. identical to the OCPU2102 used in 1:N protection except for the split ratio. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI signal. The APSD procedure implemented on the 1626LM line is kept unchanged and compliant to the G. The OMSP switching event is triggered by: Transmission line failure communicated to the sites where the OMSP switching takes place by means of OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC if the failed span is far. The line (optical amplifiers. OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) maintenance signal shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about failures. The fact is that the ²Split² and the ²Switch² are both implemented on the same OCPU2100 board (it is actually a double split/switch.

2 electrical signals are sent by the OSCU to PSCU3 (SGWP1 and SGWP2). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance OMSP Implementation principle On a signal failure. PSCU3 can manage 2 switches located inside the same OCPU2100.4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4. The switching decision is managed by PSCU3000 from the links SGWP1/SGWP2 coming from OSCU boards.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 33 . Only non-revertive switching is supported.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation LOFA11y0 TRBD1xyz OTS Fail OCPU2100 Protection Switch 1:12 1:8 Protection Controller PSCU3000 OSC OSCU Signal Fail 1 / 2 « SGWP 1 /2 » 1626LM Protection Commands Signal Signal Optical patch cord Backplane electrical link All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 2 — 33 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The PSCU3 board compare the actual position of OCPU2 switch and the receive signal. PSCU3000 does not support revertive switching (where the traffic is automatically switched back to the protected channel after the protection switch condition is cleared). With these informations. it controls the OCPU2 switch position.

OSCU1010 for OMSP: it is the only OSCU board version that guarantee insuring the OMSP protection switch activation (amplifiers ShutDown). PSCU3000: it is the protection controller and manages the OCPU2100 status on the basis of the protection switching criteria detected in the node. If the failure occurs on a non adjacent span (failure 2 in the figure). the amplifier masks the failure for the network elements A and D.5 OMSP Protection: Failure detection Failure 1 on adjacent span can be detected directly by NE D and protection can be activated by LOS detection NE C NE D NE E NE B NE A NE F OMS Failure 2 on non adjacent span is masked by amplification in NE F and E.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT and fixed add/drop The OMSP target switching time is < 50 ms. Can be detected by means of a remote defect indication ⇒ FDI (Forward Defect Indication) is generated in OMS overhead and transmitted to the remote terminal (F→A and E D) 1 — 2 — 34 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the network elements E and F generate a signal named FDI (Forward Defect Indicator) to the network elements D and A. in case of optical failure (failure 1 in the figure). • LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place. The OMSP protection is physically implemented by means of three cards: OCPU2100: integrates a 50/50 splitter in the transmit direction and an optical switch in the receive direction. the network element can detect directly the Loss Of Signal (LOS). In normal operation. both receiving laser amplifiers are working. when protection is activated. NE A and D assert an alarm FDI to the operator. This signal is supported by the supervision frame in the K2 byte. The OMS-P switching event is triggered by: • OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span. In this last case. if the affected span is adjacent to the node itself.4 Optical 1+1 Protection 4. but only the Main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving OCPU switch. In an amplified configuration.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 34 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 35 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 2 — 35 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 36 . ASAP. PM Data History Loopbacks are not supported J0 trace is supported Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies to Equipment domain alarms only Internal optical cabling is not managed by the software G709 implementation extends the transmission control capabilities G709 is supported for STM16. STM64 and STM256 client signals Time allowed: 10 minutes 1 — 2 — 36 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ASAP and PM Data History True False Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies to Equipment domain alarms only Loopbacks are not supported J0 trace is supported Internal optical cabling is not managed by the software G709 implementation extends the transmission control capabilities G709 is supported for STM16. STM64 and STM256 client signals All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Answer the Questions True False DCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band” CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same time EC is in charge of equipment configuration.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Notes : DCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band” CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same time EC is in charge of equipment configuration.

0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 37 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 2 — 37 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

TRBD1191 and Ethernet cross-connections display and management JO.0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 38 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A supports OTN framing (G. ODUk and OTUk traces configuration Optical power tuning Performance Monitoring and power level measurements Spectrum acquisition on WMAN accesses Alarms handling Protection status management Loopback management Backup and restore Board replacement Maintenance 1 — 2 — 38 1626 LM R 5. drawers and optical cabling declaration R-OADM and TR-ODAM configuration OSNCP.Module Summary 1626 LM R 5. OMSP.0A management Locally by 1320CT and SPLM tool through F interface Remotely by 1350 OMS (OS) and SPLM tool through Q3 interface Optical supervisory channel in the WDM link between two NEs Management communication (LAPD). Voice channel (EOW) and UDC Operation and maintenance facilities from equipment view Operation Equipment configuration : subrack.709) SPLM tool co-hosted with 132O CT or 1350 OMS All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. boards.

0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 39 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 1 — 2 — 39 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 2 — Page 40 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11705AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module System Operation Overview 1 — 2 — 40 Product Overview — System Operation Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 1 .0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 1 Product Overview Module 3 Boards Description 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 1—3—2 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.

you should be able to: Describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 3 .Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A boards 1—3—3 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 4 .] 1—3—4 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 OCNC1230 faceplate 3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 5 .1.2 CMDX1012 faceplate 2.1 OCPU2104 faceplate 2.1 2xGBE_FC faceplate 2.4.12.2 TDMX1180 functional description Page 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.8.3.2.6.2 OCNC1280 functional description 3.2 BMDX1y00 functional description 2.2 TRBD4312 functional description 2.1.1 OCPU2100 faceplate 2.2 TRBC4x12 functional description 2.2 OADC1300 functional description 3.1 TRBC4x12 faceplate 2.12.0A — Operation and Maintenance ETHC1000 functional description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 2.2 OCPU2104 functional description 2.4 NE management and related boards 2 User access and related boards description 2.4.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Boards overview 1.1 CMDX1010 faceplate 2.25.3.2 PSCU3000 functional description 2.7.2 HOST1001 functional description 2.9.1 TRBD11y1 faceplate 2.6.3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description 2.1 OADC1100 faceplate 3.2.2 TRBD11y1 functional description 2.8.2 OADC1100 functional description 3.1.6.7.6.9.8.7.9.5.1 TDMX1180 faceplate 3.2.1 User access and related boards 1.2 OMDX8100_x functional description 2.1 TRBD4xy2 faceplate 2.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate 3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description 3.13.3 CMDX1052 faceplate 2.2 OCNC1220 functional description 3.3 Line amplifier and related boards 1.11.2 WMAN1100 functional description 3.2.4 CMDX10yz functional description 2.1.1 HOST1001 faceplate 2.1 OADC1300 faceplate 3.2 OCNC1230 functional description 3.13.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate 2.5.7.8.9.2.2 OCNC1240 functional description 3.10.5.1 OCNC1240 faceplate 3.1 OCNC1280 faceplate 3.1 TRBC1111 faceplate 2.2 2xGBE_FC functional description 2.10.1 OADC1102 faceplate 3.2 OCPU2100 functional description 2.10.10.5.3.4.1 ETHC1000 faceplate All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1—3—5 Product Overview — Boards Description 2.2 OADC1102 functional description 3.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate 2.2 R/TR-OADM and related boards 1.2 TRBC1111 functional description 2.4.11.1 PSCU3000 faceplate 2.1 WMAN1100 faceplate 3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate 3.3.14.

2 PSUP1000 functional description 5.5.3.1.1 ALCT1010 faceplate 4.1 BOFA2000 faceplate 4.2 OADC1750 functional description 3.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate 4.11.] Switch to notes view! 3.3.0A — Operationsupervision frame structure 2Mb/s and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 FANS2000 functioning Page 64 65 66 67 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80 81 82 83 85 86 87 88 90 91 92 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4.2.2.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates 5.10.3 LOFA11y1 functional description 4.1 OADC1750 faceplate 3.12.5.2 USIB1000 functional description 5.6.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates 5.1 PSUP1000 faceplate 5.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 6 .2 WMAN3174 functional description 3.1 BOFA1000 faceplate 4.3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate 5.2 ESCT2000 functional description 5.12.2 EMPM1000 functional description 5 NE management and related boards description 5.2 OSCU1010 functional description © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved 1—3—6 Product Overview — Boards Description 5.2 ALCT1010 functional description 4.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions 5.1.10.2.6.1.5.5.2 BOFA2000 functional description 4.2 BOFA1000 functional description 4.2.11.Table of Contents [cont.35.8.1 ESCT2000 faceplate 5.1 WMAN3174 faceplate 3.1 FANS1000 faceplate 5.2.4.2 OADC0104 functional description 4 Line amplifier and related boards description 4.1 EMPM1000 faceplate 4.1 OADC0104 faceplate 3.2 LOFA11y0 functional description 4.1 USIB1000 faceplate 5.8.3.1 FANS2000 faceplate 5.1 OSCU1010 faceplate 5.2 FANS1000 functioning 5.7.4.4.1.2.1.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions 5.7.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 7 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Boards overview 1—3—7 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

/ FC boards With / without O-SNCP protection LOFA11y0_Unidir Booster All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 User access and related boards Board Acronym TRBD11y1 TRBD4x12 TRBC4x12 PSCU3000 Board height Tall Tall Tall Tall Board width (slot) 3 3 1 1 Maximum quantity 16 4 Generic shelf Slot # 3 to 18 3 to 18 39 3 to 18 TRBC1111 OCPU210z 2xGBE_FC 16 4 8 3 to 18 Medium Medium Medium Tall Tall Small 1 1 CMDX10yz BMDX1x00 HOST1001 ETHC1000 Medium Medium 1 1 1 1 12 2 2 16 1 3 to 18 3 to 18 OMDX4100_chx-chy Medium 1—3—8 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 8 CMDX 2 ALCT CMDX 12 1 BMDX1000 VOA 2 OSC To/fro m WDM line 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir Preamplifier .1 Boards overview 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance OMDX8100_x 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 to 19 2 to 19 3 to 18 3 to 18 3 to 18 3 to 18 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CMDX 1 To/from transponders With / without Eth.

OCNC1230 and OCNC1240.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 9 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) .2 R/TR-OADM and related boards Board Acronym WMAN1100 OCNC1280 OADC1300 TMDX1180 OADC1102 Board height Small Small Tall Board width (slot) 1 3 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 Maximum quantity (*) 2 Generic shelf Slot # 23 to 38 23 to 38 3 to 18 2 to 19 3 to 18 3 to 18 23 to 38 2 3 to 18 OCNC12y0 (**) Medium Medium Tall Tall (*) 1 1 (*) (*) WMAN3174 OADC1750 OADC0104 Medium Small (*) 1 (*): Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation.1 Boards overview 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OADC0104 WMAN 3174 1 VOA 2 OSC D M ALCT To TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) OADC1750 4:1 1: 2 ½ OADC1100 From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) WMAN 3174 Up to 4λ Up to 32λ OCNC1230 Up to 4λ 4:1 2 VOA LOFA 1110 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) OADC130 0 8:1 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 32λ 1 TDMX1180 ½ OADC1300 1:8 Up to 4λ x8 4:1 4:1 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. (**): OCNC12y0 refers to OCNC1220. 1—3—9 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 10 CMDX 12 . / FC boards CMDX 2 1 BMDX1000 VOA 2 OSC To/fro m WDM line ALCT With / without O-SNCP protection 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir Preamplifier All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CMDX 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir Booster To/from transponders With / without Eth.1 Boards overview 1. 1 — 3 — 10 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Line amplifier and related boards Board Acronym ALCT1010 BOFA1000 LOFA11yz Board height Medium Medium Medium Medium Medium Board width (slot) 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum quantity 2 4 Generic shelf Slot # 3 to 18 2 to 20 2 to 20 3 to 18 Maximum quantity 2 Compact shelf Slot # 2 to 5 EMPM1000 BOFA2000 (*) (*) 4 3 to 18 2 2 to 5 (*) To be analyzed case by case according to the network planning design.

12 13 1 1 (*) 2 1 (*) 1 2 (*) More than one board can be inserted in the shelf.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 11 Links between RAIU and TRU . to: .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 FANS2000 (**) (**) 1 TRU P P W W R R P P W W R R PP W W R R Top Rack Unit Fiber storage PP W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 11 6 5 6 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 1 6 5 16 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 FANS F aa n F n Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R PP W W R R FANS F aa n F n Air deflector PP W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 11 6 5 6 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 1 6 5 16 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 FANS F aa n F n 1320 CT P P W W R R PP W W R R FANS F aa n F n Air deflector P P W W R R Air deflector PP W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 11 6 5 6 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1 11 0 11 1 0 11 2 2 11 3 3 11 4 4 11 5 1 6 5 16 11 7 7 11 8 11 9 8 9 22 0 0 FANS F aa n F n FANS F aa n F n Links between PSUP and TRU All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation 1 — 3 — 11 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 39 3 to 18 1 1 7 to 10 7 to 10 7 to 10 11.1 Boards overview 1. Refer. for more details.4 NE management and related boards Board Acronym ESCT2000_SC OSCU10yz RAIU1000 USIB1000 ESCT2000 Board height Medium Medium Small Small Small Small Small (**) (**) Small Board width (slot) 1 1 1 Maximum quantity 1 1 Generic shelf Slot # 1 1 Maximum quantity 1 Compact shelf Slot # 1 2 to 6 Medium 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 HSKU1100 PSUP1000 FANS1000 HSKU1000 RAIU1100 1 1 1 23 to 38 23 to 38 23 to 38 21. (**) Dedicated slots. Refer to the dedicated board description pages in this documentation part for more details. 40 41 22. 39 22.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 12 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 12 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 User access and related boards description 1 — 3 — 13 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 13 .

the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to a given rule. To be able to do this.1. 1 — 3 — 14 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Refer to the “Optical channel configuration” for more details.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 14 .2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 TRBD11y1 2.1 TRBD11y1 faceplate Generic shelf Board SL Slots OTS 3 to 18 TRBD1121 TRBD1121 TRBD1131 TRBD1111 TRBD1121 TRBD1131 TRBD1191 * TRBD1191 * Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.

1) B&W optical interface and a 10. L-64. In fact all other 10 Gb/s TRBD versions of the 1626LM are able to tolerate up to 10 ps of PMD accumulated along the link. Moreover WDM bit rate is 11. 2 (VOA access for dispersion pre-compensation). with a 10GBASE-LR (10Km reach. with 50GHz spacing. 10G BASE-S. 2 (short haul (S64. transport of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G. 1310nm) B&W interface at 10. The main difference is B&W interface is dedicated to 10GbEthernet LAN PHY. The TRBD1191 MLSE is a new 10 Gb/s transponder introduced to minimize the regeneration points on WDM links where the PMD introduced by the optical transmission fiber cable is high.09Gbps. 4 (40Gb/s) 1 (NRZ). 4 (NRZ-DPSK). S-64. OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier.1 or VSR-2000)).31Gbps (UNI only).709 transponder with high sensitivity receiver.2. tunable over the whole extended C-band. The TRBDwxyz/TRBCwxyz naming rule is as follows : x stands for signal type: 6 (NRZ P-DPSK). It provides UNI at 9. 10G BASE-L or 10G BASE-E.2. the TRBD1191 MLSE can tolerate up to 24 ps of PMD thanks to electronic post-processing of the received signal based on Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) technology. The BW client interface is provided by an XFP module.1 TRBD11y1 2.709Gbps B&W interface. 7 (CSRZ DPSK) w stands for bit rate : 1 (10Gb/s). 5 (MLSE for high PMD tolerance) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 TRBD11y1 functional description WDM optical module Clock B&W optical module 4 O/E+ clock & data recovery 4 E/O G709 framing Performance monitoring FEC 4 E/O VOA 4 O/E VOA Colored Laser with locker Power supply function Local Management & Alarms Electrical Data stream Optical Colored signal Management Bus Power supply Hardware board information Management board 1 — 3 — 15 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Enhanced FEC. TRBD1191 is a bidirectional G. it’s a S64. The WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser.703) through WDM signal G. The only difference is the B&W interface. 3( 10GBase-LR). 3 (PSBT). LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder colored interface.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 15 y stands for client interface type: 1 (intra-office (I64. It provides either User to Network Interface or Network Node Interface.9532Gbps and NNI with OTU2 10. It is the universal transponder.2b)). TRBD1131 is the same as TRBD1111. 4 (). loop-backs.709 overhead (RJ45 connector). According to XFP plugged.1. tunable according to the board type over 8 frequencies or the full extended C-Band.2b. z stands for 1 (no VOA access).2b one. 9 (pluggable user interface) . NRZ modulation.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRBD11y1 (TRiButary Direct) can support 1+1 O-SNCP. 3 (tunable filter). 5 (RZ-DPSK). TRBD1121 is the same as TRBD1111.709Gbps colored WDM optical interface (NRZ). 2 (RZ). the client interface can be VSR. TRBD1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder supporting a VSR (I-64.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 16 . It can be inserted on the following slots : [3.8. 5]. [7.16.12.2. Slots 6. 7. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 9]. 10.2. 17].0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 xy The TRBD4xy2 board is 3 slots wide and tall height. 11 or 15 Power RXA TXA OOS TRBD4312 BW TX RX RJ45 G. 13]. and [15. [11.703 WDM RX Mon1 Unused RX WDM TX WDM IN VOA OUT VOA Upper part 1 — 3 — 16 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4. 14 & 18 are reserved for optional BOFA when required by configuration or for 10Gb/s transponders or PMDC upgrade .1 TRBD4xy2 faceplate Generic shelf Board SL Slots OTS 3.2 TRBD4xy2 2.

The architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications.2 TRBD4xy2 2. The rate is 43.709 FEC requirement is accomplished by a FUJITSU ASIC (UFEC40G). DPSK.2.2. They are pluggable. the B&W DB is replaced by a Concentrator card. called STM-256/OC-768 and can support bit rate 43.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface. The board TRBD can receive different daughter boards allowing to support different modulation format. PSBT.81320 Gb/s.239) or proprietary Ultra FEC. This interface is the connection to the network. The second optical interface bi-directional is the Client interface. Daughter board MiniROFA is connected at the input pigtail of the PSBT module in order to improve the sensitivity and to guarantee a constant optical power. This network is a proprietary network based on the G. For TRBD4312.709 interface. The first optical interface bi-directional is the Line interface.018413 Gb/s.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 17 . …. For the DPSK application. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the network (Tunable on the band C). The Client line carries SDH/SONET standards at 39.018413 Gb/s with the standardized Reed Salomon RS(255. and is accomplished by a colored single wavelength on the WDM module. P-DPSK.2 TRBD4312 functional description 1 — 3 — 17 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. For TRBC application. This interface is the connection of a single wavelength on the client network with the B&W module.709. The G. the WDM Daughter Board is replaced by an optical interface. refer to [x] ITU-T Recommendation G. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description 1 — 3 — 18 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. — WDM side. Grid = 50GHz. Grid = 50GHz. and one bidirectional WDM interface into transponder TRBD with: The UFEC40G is a multi-rate multiple forward error correction device supporting SONET/SDH. — B&W side.018413 Gb/s.Ch Min=192100. Grid = 100GHz.2. Grid=200GHz) or even channel (Ch Max=196000 . Different optical units are implied : one bidirectional B&W interface.2.Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 .Ch Min=191950.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 18 . Grid=200GHz) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 TRBD4xy2 2. Up to 80x40 Gb/s] Client side : External client (OPNEXT) Line side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 . TRBD4312 [C band – PSBT.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface.81320 Gb/s. The architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications.Ch Min=192050 or Ch Max=195900 .Ch Min = 192000. There is a VOA in external access (input and output optical connector on front panel. OTN and Clear Channel applications. Grid=200GHz) TRBD4612 [C band – P-DPSK. Up to 80x40 Gb/s] Client side : External client (OPNEXT) Line side : PSBT / Mini ROFA Daughter Board TRBD4412 [C band – DPSK. Up to 40x40 Gb/s] Client side : External client (OPNEXT) Line side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 . the signal is compliant STM-256/OC-768 at 39. the signal is OTU-3 at 43.Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 .

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 19 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 19 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 20 .1 TRBC1111 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots TRBC1111 3 to 18 Upper part Lower part 1 — 3 — 20 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3.2.3 TRBC1111 2.

TRBC111 can use SFP modules.666Gbps B&W interface. The WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser. type I-16. It provides UNI at 2.1.488Gbps or NNI with OTU1 2. L-16.1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The four incoming signals can be asynchronous.2.709 overhead (RJ45 connector).0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 21 . S-16.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRBC : TRiButary Concentrator.1 or L-16. loop-backs. transport of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G. for B&W interfaces (see Section 3 – Appendix). TRBC1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM16/OC48 optical signals (TDM concentrator) in a 10. RS-Trace Identifier (J0).3.2 TRBC1111 functional description Clock 1 6 WDM optical module FEC Performance Monitoring G709 Framing ASIC E/O VOA 1 6 WDM RX VOA Colored Laser with locker Local Management & Alarms Power supply function Hardware board information Electrical Data stream Optical Colored signal Management Bus Power supply Management board 1 — 3 — 21 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.703) through WDM signal G.709Gbps coloured WDM optical interface (NRZ).3 TRBC1111 2. TRBC1111 can support 1+1 O-SNCP. tunable over the whole extended C-Band. OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier.2.

1 TRBC4x12 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots Power RXA TXA OOS RJ45 G.4 TRBC4x12 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 x All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.703 U1_Tx U1_Rx WDM RX Mon1 Unused RX WDM TX WDM IN VOA OUT VOA TRBC4x12 3 to 18 U2_Tx U2_Rx U3_Tx U3_Rx U4_Tx U4_Rx 1 — 3 — 22 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 22 .4.2.

Client side : Concentrator Daughter Board TRBC4412 [C band – DPSK. called VIKINGS. — WDM side.239) compliant with G. Grid=200GHz) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Ch Min=192100.709 frame Overhead Och are managed. Up to 40x40 Gb/s] Line side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 .018413 Gb/s. Grid=100Grid.Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 . Different optical units are implied : four bidirectional B&W interfaces and one WDM interface into the Concentrator TRBC: — 1 to 4 B&W sides. extracted and inserted by the FPGA of the board.10GELAN.709 and Ultra FEC proprietary from FUJITSU (only on line side).Ch Min=191950. the signal is compliant STM-64/OC-192. OTU2. Up to 80x40 Gb/s] Client side : Concentrator Daughter Board Line side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 .2 TRBC4x12 functional description 1 — 3 — 23 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 TRBC4x12 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The TRBC4x12 is the concentrator version 4 x 10Gb/s board This unit contains a FEC encoding and decoding operator standard RS(255.Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 . the signal is OTU-3 at 43.2.Ch Min=192000. Grid=50GHz.4.Ch Min=192050 or Ch Max=195900 . Grid=200GHz) TRBC4612 [C band – P-DPSK.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 23 . The G. Grid=200GHz) or even channel (Ch Max=196000 .

1 OCPU2104 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCPU2104 3 to 18 Mid part Upper part 1 — 3 — 24 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 24 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5.5 OCPU2104 2.2.

Note : The above figure details only the sub-board 1 optical connections.5. The OCPU2104 houses a pair of optical splitters that fit into the two ’TX’ paths.2. No alarm is raised by this module.7 to 3. but it is enough to use the coupler. the OCPU2104 shall never receive both signals at the same time. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The 1x2optical coupler/splitters are specified to offer the lowest maximum insertion loss (2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OCPU2104 contains optical components for inclusion into two separate ’B/W’ Client input and output paths. and two optical couplers that are fitted into two ’RX’ output paths from ’Protected’ Transponders. The 1x2 optical couplers/splitters fitted to the OCPU2104 have a nominal optical power splitting ratio of 50/50%. The coupler/splitter devices used in this unit are specified to operate at both client wavebands identified as1530-1565nm and 1290-1330nm. always receiving at most one active input. 2spare). 2main.5 OCPU2104 2. the transponders which are connected to it arbitrate among themselves in order to have one transponder B&W output active. The same device is used for both the coupler and splitter. and 50% is fed to the ’protected’ Transponder spare). to and from 2 X two ’protected’ Transponders (called 1main.9dB). and the other one in shutdown.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 25 . 1spare. (where in the case of the splitters 50% of the applied optical power is fed to the ’Protected’ Transponder main. by this mechanism it is not necessary to use a SWITCH on OCPU2104.2 OCPU2104 functional description OCPU2104 Splitter Transponders Main Sub-board 1 Coupler WDM Sides Spare B&W user sides Sub-board 2 1 — 3 — 25 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. for use in a protection system with a 1+1 O-SNCP configuration. In the “RX” direction.

6 OCPU2100 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 26 .2.1 OCPU2100 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCPU2100 3 to 18 MonP1 (P1 Tx W1) Mon W1 (P1 Tx P1) MonP2 (P2 Tx W2) Mon W2 (P2 Tx P2) Out Trib#1 (P1 Tx W1) Out Prot#1 (P1 Tx P1) Main In#1 (P1 Tx) Main Out#1 (P1 Rx) In Trib#1 (P1 Rx W1) In Prot#1 (P1 Rx P1) Out Trib#2 (P2 Tx W2) Out Prot#2 (P2 Tx P2) Main In#2 (P2 Tx) Main Out#2 (P2 Rx) In Trib#2 (P2 Rx W2) In Prot#2 (P2 Rx P2) 1 — 3 — 26 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.6.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

6. It also incorporates 4 optical ports for monitoring function.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OCPU2100 is a bi-directional unit acting as a connection point for an Equipment Protection system. this is referred to as ‘Path 1’. Optical Switches select which of two inputs are fed back to the Client from the Equipment.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 27 . The OCPU2100 incorporates two optical switches. allowing a portion of each incoming signal to be ‘tapped off’ for passage to the Equipment Protection system.via backplane connections. 2) S64. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 OCPU2100 2.2.2b. The other input feeds from the “Protecting” path. offering comparable performance in the 1290-1330 and 1530-1565nm bands. In the OCPU2100. This allows the unit to operate at: 1) VSR2000 2R1 (1290-1330nm) and. The Unit is designed so the Optical switches are controlled by the Protection Switch Controller. One switch input feeds in from the ‘normal’ path.2 OCPU2100 functional description Transponder #1 Transponder #2 1 — 3 — 27 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the unit contains two separate tap coupler/splitter devices to be inserted into Client “Black & White” traffic feeds. other transmission formats may be supported. this is referred to as ‘Path 2’. (1530-1565nm) 3) If OCPU2100 Insertion loss performance wavelength ranges comply. All optical components used in the OCPU 210X are specified for ‘Dual-Band’ operation. and two optical splitters with a coupling ratio of 50/50%.

2. PSCU3000 is required for OMSP Protection. OSCU and OCPU2 boards involved in the protection scheme.7. in a shelf containing LOFA.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 PSCU3000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slot 39 PSCU3000 PSCU3000 can manage only one OCPU2100 (2 switches) and 2 OSCU (each switch can be associated with 1 OSCU).7 PSCU3000 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 28 . 1 — 3 — 28 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

It acts as an interface between the OSCU and OCPU2100 within a shelf involved in protection.2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The PSCU3000 currently works as a slave to the OSCU. and sends the necessary commands to the All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It performs the following functions: collects alarm information (signal fail) from the OSCU.7.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 29 . the bridge switch switches (OCPU2100) required position information of OCPU2100 and OSCU.2 PSCU3000 functional description Control Logic Remote inventory ECID Combining diodes SPIDER LEDs Combining diodes 1 — 3 — 29 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. monitors the channel selectors (OCPU2100).7 PSCU3000 2.

1 2xGBE_FC faceplate Board 2xGBE_FC Generic shelf Slots 3 to 18 Upper part Lower part 1 — 3 — 30 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Name Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2.8.8 2xGBE_FC 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 30 .

The Line interface supports: The Virtual Concatenation uses a fixed number of VC–4 : multi-rate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP).25Gb/s or two Fibre Channel at 1. FC–L B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces. Each Client interface (U1 and U2 connectors on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients of the network.1. via GFP mapping and Virtual Concatenation.0625Gb/s into a STM–16/OC–48 frame.Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate. either to a TRBC or an MCC30 (if B&W line interface) or a CMDX (if WDM line interface). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. MCC30) to obtain a WDM signal. Refer to the last Section of this training manual for SFPs list. GbE–LX. .1 and L–16.2. In this case the board needs to be connected to a B&W port of a transponder (TRBC.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 31 . The mapping of clients is Transparent GFP (GFP–T). but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front . S–16.2 2xGBE_FC functional description CDR MUX/DEMUX 1 — 3 — 31 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.8.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2xGBE_FC : concentrator which aggregates two Gigabit Ethernet client signals at 1. B&W STM–16/OC–48 pluggable modules (SFP): I–16. APD type. but only two can be used (U1 and U2 on the front plate).Four interfaces/ports are present on client side. VC–4–7v is used for Gigabit Ethernet VC–4–6v is used for Fibre Channel.8 2xGBE_FC 2. plate).All the interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that they can be alternated according to the different applications. according to the provisioned interface.2. GbE–SX. Clients mixing on the same board is not possible: only 2xGbE or 2xFC is possible in the same board. . It is optically connected.

the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to a given rule.2.1 ETHC1000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots Lower part ETHC1000 3 to 18 * Upper part * Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.9. Refer to the “Optical channel configuration” for more details. To be able to do this.9 ETHC1000 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 User10 Tx (out)** User10 Rx (in)** User11 Tx (out)** User11 Rx (in)** User12 Tx (out)** User12 Rx (in)** Name Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 32 . 1 — 3 — 32 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

2b/10GbE base E Each Client interface (P1 to P12 on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients.1/10GbE base L S–64.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 33 .2 ETHC1000 functional description 1 — 3 — 33 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. so they need to be linked to a B&W port of a transponder (TRBD) to obtain a WDM signal to be multiplexed into a single fibre and sent to the network. Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate side. including PMD. Twelve interfaces/ports are present on client side.2. All the client interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules. It can be optically connected to the client interface of a TRBD or connected to the TRBD1191 through the equipment back plane.95 Gb/s. via Layer 2 switch.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ETHC1000 : The ETHC1000 unit is an Ethernet concentrator which can aggregate up to nine Gigabit Ethernet client signals at 1 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. in point–to–point applications. Port #13 and Port#14 in CT view) ) bidirectional optical interfaces host B&W optical modules. The Layer 2 switch tags the up to nine Ethernet streams with a VLAN ID. GbE–SX and GbE–LX B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces. to one (or both) 10 GbE transceiver. When all client ports are used.3ae.953 Gb/s). The Line interfaces/transceivers are external XFP pluggable modules. Jumbo frames are supported on client side : up to 9600 bytes per frame. The 10 GbE transceiver provides the entire IEEE 802. the related traffic must be spread over the two aggregate sides with no more than 9 client signals per side.25Gbps into a 10 GbE WAN frame at 9.9 ETHC1000 2. PMA and PCS with 64B/65B encoding– decoding. over a XGMII interface. The following 10 GbE WAN B&W pluggable modules (XFP) are supported: I–64. The Line (L1 and L2 connectors on the front plate. then aggregates the different streams and send them. Its serial output is 10 GbEthernet WAN (9.9.

10.10 CMDX10yz 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 34 .1 CMDX1010 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots CMDX1010 2 to 19 Upper part Lower part 1 — 3 — 34 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2.

10.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 35 .2.10 CMDX10yz 2.2 CMDX1012 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots CMDX1012 2 to 19 * Mon_OUT Mon_IN 1st CH_IN 1st CH_OUT 2nd CH_IN 2nd CH_OUT 3rd CH_IN 3rd CH_OUT 4th CH_IN 4th CH_OUT 5th CH_IN 5th CH_OUT 6th CH_IN 6th CH_OUT 7th CH_IN 7th CH_OUT 8th CH_IN 8th CH_OUT MUX_OUT DEMUX_IN * CMDX1012 card provides fixed Mux/Demux functionality for TRBD4612 with 50GHz channel spacing 1 — 3 — 35 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

CMDX1052 card provides fixed Mux/Demux functionality for TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel spacing Mon_OUT Mon_IN 1st CH_IN 1st CH_OUT 2nd CH_IN 2nd CH_OUT 3rd CH_IN 3rd CH_OUT 4th CH_IN 4th CH_OUT MUX_OUT DEMUX_IN 1 — 3 — 36 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2.10 CMDX10yz 2. Indicates CMX and/or CDX are in the Initialisation state and are not yet at operating temperature.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CMDX1052 LED Name MAB DAB INI LED Color Yellow Managed by the Shelf Controller the Shelf Controller the optical module Meaning Yellow indicate abnormal conditions at one or more multiplexer inputs Yellow indicate abnormal conditions at demultiplexer input.3 CMDX1052 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots CMDX1052 2 to 19 * * HOST1001 and CMDX4100 are associated to get CMDX1052.10. Available only with AWG technology module All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 36 .

x The CMDX1012 component uses AWG (Arrayed Waveguide Grating) technology and is a dedicated card for TRBD4612 and TRBC4612. It’s a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412.2.4 CMDX10yz functional description Input 1 1λ Output monitor Input 8 1λ Photo detector 1 Photo Detector 8 C M X Photo detector 8λ Combined output Output 1 1λ 8 Combined C D X input 8λ APSD signal Output 8 1λ Photo detector Management Management DC Power Supply 1 — 3 — 37 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 37 .10 CMDX101yz 2. CMDX1012 (8 Channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz whose Mux has same filter shape as its Demux (for P-DPSK)) is a bidirectional unit used for multiplexing and demultiplexing in each of the 12 block paths. there is a tap coupler and a photo detector.12) optical channels from transmitters to one single optical output which is routed to either a 12:1 band mux/demux unit. there is a tap coupler and a photo detector and there is also an optical monitor port at the output side. In the demultiplexing direction the unit receives a WDM signal from BMDX before demultiplexing the signal into 8 (resp. CMDX1052 is a 4 channel Mux/Demux @ 100GHz. In the multiplexing direction the unit multiplexes 8 (resp.10. Naming rules for CMDXwxyz : w: big functional or structural differences Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1 x: today for all CMDX this is 0 y: grid 1: stands for 50GHz grid 2: stands for 40GHz grid 3: stands for 33GHz grid 4: stands for 25GHz grid z: minor modifications 0: AWG technology 1: long haul applications All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. These photo detectors measure the respective optical power via the tap coupler and feed the power level signals to the on board FPGA. It multiplexes/demultiplexes 8 colored optical signals to/from a single port connected to the BMDX.0A — Operation and Maintenance CMDX1010 is a 8 channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz for Long Haul terrestrial and submarine links. 12) channel outputs and then routing the channels to the relevant receiver. On each of the input ports and the output port of the Multiplexer. On the input port of the Demultiplexer.

2. CMDX1052 card provides fixed mux/demux functionality for TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel spacing Extractor Handle All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 3 — 38 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 HOST1001 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots Extractor Handle HOST1001 2 to 19 * * HOST1001 and CMDX4100 are associated to get CMDX1052.0A — Operation and Maintenance HOST1001 LED Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 38 .11.11 HOST1001 2.

Remote Inventory.3V +5V Micro cut off detection Internal Power supplies Backplane connector +48V Card presence SPI Bus Control board Electrical connector SPI Bus Optical connectors on Front Panel Power supply Microcontroller Power detection Alarm interface Module EEPROM Pluggable module function 1 — 3 — 39 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The pluggable optical modules that can be used with the HOST1001 are Mux/Demux modules. Temperature Sensor.11 HOST1001 2.11. Power Supply micro failure detection. It is a main board that can manage one optical pluggable module as CMDX1012 module (4 channels Mux/Demux 100 GHz) for example.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above diagram shows the main function blocks of the board on which the optical module is plugged and interfaced. module presence) are interfaced and accessible from HOST1001 through SPI link or registered into SPIDER.2. This unit is equipped with SPIDER. All the main signals from the modules (alarms. ECID.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 39 . DC-DC converter.0a. The HOST1001 is a mezzanine board designed for 1626 system Release 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 HOST1001 functional description EEPROM EEPROM Temperature sensor Remote Inventory ECID SPIDER: SPI INTERFACE +3.

12 BMDX1x00 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 40 . In such a case.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Meaning The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and BMDX boards are inserted and declared according to the following table: ALCT slot # BMDX slot # 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 3 10 9 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.12. Lower part 1 — 3 — 40 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.2. Refer to ALCT1010 description for more details.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots 3 to 18 * BMDX1000 BMDX1100 Upper part * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the BMDX board.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 41 . all the 12 Bands are managed.12.0A — Operation and Maintenance BMDX1000 is a Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux used in Line Terminal.12 BMDX1y00 2. BMDX1100 is a modified Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux for B-OADM application with up to 100% add/drop capacity in full symmetric configuration.2 BMDX1y00 functional description Input 1 Output monitor B M X Input 12 Photo detector 1 Photo detector 12 Photo detector Combined output Output 1 12 B D X Combined Photo detector input Output 12 APSD signal Management DC Power Supply 1 — 3 — 41 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In Back-to-Back configuration. B-t-B and R-OADM application 1: stands for TPXC and Band-OADM functionality y: today for all BMDX this is 0 z: today for all BMDX this is 0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It multiplexes up to 12 Bands coming from the CMDXs into the aggregate signal (up to 96 channels) to be sent to the WDM line and demultiplexes the aggregate signal into 12 Bands forwarded to the CMDXs. supporting up to 8 wavelengths per Band. Naming rules for BMDXwxyz : w: big functional or structural differences x: application Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1 0: stands for the Line Terminal. Back-to-Back terminal and ROADM configurations.2. It supports up to 7 wavelengths per Band.

2.0A — Operation and Maintenance Upper part Lower part All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color OMDX8100_x Front panel LED Meanings Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.13 OMDX8100_x 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 42 . 1 — 3 — 42 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.13.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots OMDX8100_L1_X OMDX8100_L1 OMDX8100_L2 OMDX8100_S1 OMDX8100_S2 3 to 18 The EXPANSION interface (SB IN/OUT) is only present on the OMDX8100_L1_X faceplate.

OMDX4100_Ch30-33. OMDX4100_Ch57-60.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OMDX8100_x is 100GHz grid channel multiplexer/demultiplexer for regional applications (Up to 32 channels). OMDX8100_S1.000 to 193.000 THz chx-chy: would stand for channels x to y THz _z: Filtering process : X: Expansion filtering • The available “OMDX” boards are: OMDX8100_L1_X. • a Long Band/Short Band multiplexer/demultiplexer (OMDX8100_L1_X only): multiplexes/demultiplexes the aggregated Long band signal from/to OMX/ODX and the aggregated Short band signal from/to Expansion input/output connected to a ODMX8100_S1 or S2 combined output/input.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 43 . dashed lines correspond to components specific to OMDX8100_L1_X. OMDX8100_L2.13. In the picture above. OMDX4100_Ch25-28. OMDX8100 (respectively OMDX4100) is composed of : • a 100 GHz 9:1 ( 5:1) multiplexer/demultiplexer: multiplexes/demultiplexes eight (four) optical channels + extra long or short band signal (extra channels) into/from a combined output/input. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. For OMDXw100_y_z naming. special rules must be considered : w: Number of channels to be multiplexed / demultiplexed x: Grid (in GHz) _y: Band L1: stands for channels 193.13 OMDX8100_x 2.2 OMDX8100_x functional description Extra input Exp input SB O 9:1 M (5:1) X LB/ SB Output monitor Input 1 1λ Input 8 (4) 1λ Photo detector 9(5) Photo detector 10 Photo detector Combined output Photo detector 1 Extra output Photo Detector8(4) Output 1 1λ SB O 9:1 D (5:1) X Management Management Input monitor Combined input Photo detector Output 8 (4) 1λ LB/ SB DC Power Supply APSD signal 1 — 3 — 43 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. OMDX4100_Ch35-38.000 THz S2: would stand for channels 194. OMDX8100_L1.200 to 196. OMDX4100_Ch47-50. OMDX4100_Ch42-45. OMDX4100_Ch52-55.000 to 192.200 to 195.2. This latter is either connected to Long Band/Short Band multiplexer/demultiplexer or to an other OMDX extra input/output or to a LOFA input/output.800 THz S1: stands for channels 195. OMDX4100_Ch20-23.800 THz L2: stands for channels 192. OMDX8100_S2.

14.2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Name Access points description (from top to bottom) Meaning All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots MUX OUT MON DEMUX IN MON 4th CH_IN 4th CH_OUT 3rd CH_IN 3rd CH_OUT 2nd CH_IN 2nd CH_OUT 1st CH_IN 1st CH_OUT EXTRA IN EXTRA OUT MUX_OUT DEMUX_IN OMDX4100_ch20-23 OMDX4100_ch25-28 OMDX4100_ch30-33 OMDX4100_ch35-38 OMDX4100_ch42-45 OMDX4100_ch47-50 OMDX4100_ch52-55 OMDX4100_ch57-60 3 to 18 1 — 3 — 44 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 44 .14 OMDX4100_chx-chy 2.

3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description 1 — 3 — 45 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 45 .

1.1 OADC1102 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OADC1102 23 to 38 LED TX INPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC COUPLER INPUT (30%) FROM WMAN TX INPUT : ADDED CHANNELS OADC COUPLER INPUT (70%) FROM MUX RX OUTPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC SPLITTER OUTPUT (30%) TO WMAN RX OUTPUT : DROPED CHANNELS OADC SPLITTER OUTPUT (70%) TO DEMUX TX OUTPUT : OADC COUPLER OUTPUT TO BOOSTER RX INPUT : OADC SPLITTER INPUT FROM BOOSTER 1 — 3 — 46 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 46 .1 OADC1102 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

The coupler/splitter is broadband (whole extended C-band). Regarding the signal coming from one pre-amplifier : 30% are sent to express path (input of Wavelength Manager) 70% are sent to drop path (input of first demultiplexing stage) Regarding the signal outgoing to one booster : 30% come from express path (output of Wavelength Manager) 70% come from drop path (output of last multiplexing stage) For Automatic Level Control purposes.1 OADC1102 3. The OADC1102 may be used also for TR-OADM Multi degree 2 application but it is mainly dedicated to ROADM application.1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1102 board covers Long Haul R-OADM specific needs.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 47 . on the add path the coupler shall achieve output power level measurement (express path + add path) and provide electrical feedback for ALCT Laser board if this one works in “dynamic” mode.2 OADC1102 functional description (WMAN IN) (Demux) Rx OUT Express Rx OUT Drop 30% 70% Splitter Photo detector (PreAmp) Rx IN (WMAN Out) (Mux) Feedback for dynamic ALC control Express TX IN Add TX IN Photo detector 30% 70% Tx OUT (Booster) Photo detector Coupler Photo detector DC Management Power Supply 1 — 3 — 47 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This small height unit consists of one asymmetric coupler and one asymmetric splitter achieving passive add&drop for opposite directions as illustrated above.

14) + (32.13. at unit start-up) or when power supply fails Managed by the Shelf Controller Abnormal signal input alarm Signal level below the input signal LOS threshold or some wavelengths abnormally absent from the input spectrum Managed by the Shelf Controller Abnormal operation of the Wavelength Blocker (some wavelength improperly configured blocked/pass-through or some attenuations not applied properly) Managed by the Shelf Controller Abnormal monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation of the embedded OCM. GREEN when power supply operational RED when the internal power supply is switched off (e. [(12.4.g.2 WMAN1100 3.33.2.17.38)] (3 slots wide and tall height) Example for «Master shelf» Example for «Secondary shelf» EXT IN 1 EXT IN 2 WDM IN MONITOR WDM OUT MONITOR WDM INPUT WDM OUTPUT All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 3 — 48 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ABI Yellow ABB Yellow ABM Yellow ∆ Green/Red All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. configured and no failure RED when hardware failure.0A — Operation and Maintenance LED Name PWR LED Color LED color Green/Red Meaning Meaning Managed by HW. the board shall not be unplugged.37. power supply failure or communication (on the board) failure YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding.37.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 48 .1 WMAN1100 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots 3 to 18 POWER ON LED ABNORMAL INPUT LED ABNORMAL OPERATION LED ABNORMAL MON LED HW FAILURE LED Upper part WMAN1100 The WMAN1100 can be inserted in both «Master» and «Secondary» shelves (preferred to reduce intershelf cabling).17.24.18) + (36.5) + (23.18) + (36.38)] [(3.34)] [(16. communication failure with the OCM or monitoring switch failure) Managed by the Shelf Controller OFF when board is plugged but not declared GREEN when board is plugged.3.25)] [(16.

Whenever channel states are modified. on a per channel basis) set up (in a certain range) either by an operator or an algorithm/software process. The dark VOA has two purposes : First it shall be used to insert an additional loss (offset) experienced by all channels in order to decrease the WB attenuation range employed. The present release can manage 96 channels with 50GHz spacing in C+ band. Blocked channels shall be blocked by the Wavelength Blocker i. The OCM can be also used to monitor signals from other boards through EXT_IN&1 and EXT_IN2 ports (not available in current release). the Optical Channel Monitor shall scan the output and input spectra in order to check that proper attenuations have been set up and proper wavelengths have been blocked.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Wavelength Blocker can be considered as an array of optical gates (such as Variable Optical Attenuators or Liquid Crystal shutters) and optical (on/off) switches placed between a Demultiplexer and a Multiplexer as schematically presented in figure above. Each channel processed by the Wavelength Manager shall be in one of two possible states : Express channels shall go through the Wavelength Blocker with a slight attenuation that shall be individually (i. thus reducing the PDL and ripple of the latter.3. In addition. Note that device implementation of this optoelectronic function varies depending on providers.e. ALC frequencies shall be Blocked in the WMAN board(s). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. completely switched off. It is thus able to selectively attenuate the single channels of an incoming multiplex and even completely switch off selected channels. this normally turned off VOA shall shut down all traffic in case of a power failure (whereas most WBs are normally turned on / transparent without power supply) or board unplugging.2 WMAN1100 3. This verification shall also been carried out on a regular basis in order to keep up with any Wavelength Blocker drift.e.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 49 .2.2 WMAN1100 functional description Wavelength Blocker From OADC#1 Input Output monitor D e m u x Photo detector VOA On/Off Switch M u x Dark VOA Photo detector monitor To OADC#2 Photo detector EXT_IN1 Photo detecto r EXT_IN2 Management Optical Channel Monitoring DC Power Supply 1 — 3 — 49 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 OCNC1220 3.3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCNC1220 23 to 38 LED Rx Output-70 Rx Output-30 Rx Input Rx Mon.3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 1 — 3 — 50 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 50 .

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 51 . Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%). The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.2 OCNC1220 functional description 1/99 RX-in 1% 99% 30% RX_OUT_30 RX-Mon 70% RX_OUT_70 5/95 Optical INPUT power detection ILOS RX LOS Detection function External Power Supplies +3. 5% of the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler. An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 2 parts for OCNC1220: the drop one and the transmit one. 1x 70/30 splitter in C+-band) unit includes the following parts : OADC control board 1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 70/30 1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 1/99 1 tap detector MU adaptors for input/output optical ports. There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.3 OCNC1220 3. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3V +5V Alarm Interface Card presence Remote Inventory SPI Interface EEPROM Control board EEPROM ECID Data SPI Bus 1 — 3 — 51 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1220 (1 Photodiode .3. Optical power is sent towards a photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement.

4. 1 — 3 — 52 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 52 .4 OCNC1230 3.1 OCNC1230 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCNC1230 23 to 38 LED Rx Output-70 Rx Output-15 Rx Output-15 Rx Input Rx Mon.3.

70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 2 x 15% are dedicated to the . raised. application. . express channels (towards 2 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 3 application at the maximum).OADC1102 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 2 application but OCNC1230 is recommended for such . (extract): LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s OADC0104 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s WMAN 3174 1 ALCT VOA 2 OSC D M All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. . Relevant alarm can be .There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 .4.3V +5V Card presenc e Alarm Interface EEPROM Control board EEPROM Remote Inventory SPI Interface SPI Bus ECID Data 1 — 3 — 53 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 53 To TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) .One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access.It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express channels).3.4 OCNC1230 3. Being partially used at the installation phase. it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TROADM Multi-degree 3 application in the future. 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x 50/50 splitter in C+-band) is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1230 board in a “Multi-degree 2” application The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1230 (1 Photodiode .2 OCNC1230 functional description RX-in 1/99 1% 99% 30% 70% RX_OUT_15 RX_OUT_15 RX_OUT_70 5/95 RX-Mon 50/50 Optical INPUT power detection ILOS RX LOS Detection function External Power Supplies +3.

5.3.5 OCNC1240 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 1 — 3 — 54 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 OCNC1240 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCNC1240 23 to 38 LED Rx_Output-70 Rx_Output-10 Rx_Output-10 Rx_Output-10 Rx_Input Rx_Mon.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 54 .

. 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x3 splitter in C+-band) is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring . The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1240 board in a “Multi-degree 3” application (extract): LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 OSC WMAN 3174 VOA 2 OCNC1240 LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OADC0104 WMAN 3174 1 ALCT VOA 2 OSC D Up to 96λ M OCNC1240 OCNC1240 M Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s D WMAN 3174 D Up to 96λ All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3.70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 3 x 10% are dedicated to the express channels (towards 3 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 4 application at the maximum). . Relevant alarm can be raised.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1240 (1 Photodiode.5 OCNC1240 3.5.3V +5V Card presenc e Alarm Interface EEPROM Control board EEPROM Remote Inventory SPI Interface SPI Bus ECID Data 1 — 3 — 55 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access. .0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 55 M .There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port. .It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express channels). it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TR-OADM Multi-degree 4 application in the future. Being partially used at the installation phase. OCNC1230 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 3 application but OCNC1240 is recommended for such application.2 OCNC1240 functional description RX_OUT_10 1/99 1% 99% 70/30 30% 70% RX-in RX_OUT_10 RX_OUT_10 RX_OUT_70 ILOS RX RX-Mon 1x3 splitter 5/95 Optical INPUT power detection LOS Detection function External Power Supplies +3.

6 OCNC1280 3.6.1 OCNC1280 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OCNC1280 2 to 19 Rx_Output1 Rx_Output2 Rx_Output3 Rx_Output4 Rx_Output5 Rx_Output6 Rx_Output7 Rx_Output8 Rx_Input Rx_Mon.3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 56 . 1 — 3 — 56 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 57 . There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port. An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 8 parts. It is a connectivity unit used for the TR-OADM function.2 OCNC1280 functional description RX-in 1/99 1% 99% LOS on RX sent on BKP Power detection 05/95 Port 8 Splitter 1:8 RX-Mon Port 7 Port 6 Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 External Power Supplies Card presence +3.3. Optical power is sent towards a photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement. 5% of the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1280 is a board designed for 1626 LM. It generated a Loss Of Signal (LOS) detection on low optical powers on the input. The OCNC1280 unit is placed before the WMAN3 board.6 OCNC1280 3. Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6.3V +5V LOS from Power detection Remote Inventory ECID Data Alarm Interface SPI Interface EEPROM Control board EEPROM SPI Bus 1 — 3 — 57 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 OADC1100 3.7.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 58 .1 OADC1100 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OADC1100 23 to 38 LED 1 — 3 — 58 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 59 .2 OADC1100 functional description 1 — 3 — 59 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming access.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1100 is a bidirectional coupler / splitter unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .7. . .7 OADC1100 3. - The above figure shows the traffic part only.The coupler and the splitter are “50/50” type. The OADC1100 board can be partially used in a “demultiplexing branch” of a “TR-OADM multi-degree application”.3. Relevant alarms can be raised.The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction: OCNC1240 1:2 Up to 96λ ½ OADC1100 Up to 96λ Up to 96λ ½ OADC1300 TDMX1180 Up to 96λ 1:8 Up to 96λ All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. .

power supply failure or communication failure. RO8 (Rx Output 8) [9] : TO (Tx Output ) . TI2 (Tx Input 2) [2] : TI3 (Tx Input 3) . • LED is green : the board is plugged. located on the front panel: [1] : TI1 (Tx Input 1) . TI8 (Tx Input 8) [5] : RO1 (Rx Output 1) . • LED is red: HW failure. configured and without any failure.8.1 OADC1300 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OADC1300 3 to 18 TI1 TI2 TI3 TI4 TI5 TI6 TI7 TI8 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 RO7 RO8 Tx Output Rx Input 1 — 3 — 60 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TI6 (Tx Input 6) [4] : TI7(Tx Input 7) . TI4 (Tx Input 4) [3] : TI5 (Tx Input 5) . The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters . RO4 (Rx Output 4) [7] : RO5 (Rx Output 5) . • LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Name Led color Meaning MAB DAB Yellow Yellow • Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputs • Indicates one abnormal condition at the splitter input Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged.3. but not configured.8 OADC1300 3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 60 . RO2 (Rx Output 2) [6] : RO3 (Rx Output 3) . RO6 (Rx Output 6) [8] : RO7 (Rx Output 7) . RI (Rx Input) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Do not extract the board during this period.

It is used for the TR-OADM function.8.The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction: OCNC1240 1:2 Up to 96λ Up to 96λ ½ OADC1100 Up to 96λ TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1:8 Up to 96λ ½ OADC1300 1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3.2 OADC1300 functional description 8:1 1:8 1 — 3 — 61 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1300 is an Optical Add Drop Coupler.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 61 LOFA 1110 LOFA 1110 x8 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) . . .8 OADC1300 3. The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board. The OADC1300 board can be used in a “demultiplexing and multiplexing branches” of a “TR-OADM multidegree application” when more than sixteen wavelengths are locally managed for a given branch.The OADC1300 is a master unit performing both the Coupling and Splitting of/in eight inputs/outputs with wavelengths belonging to the C+-band.

[2] : IN (board input).1 TDMX1180 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots 3 to 18 (4 slots wide) Mon. power supply failure or communication (on the board) failure YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding. [3] : [4] : OUT1 / OUT2 / OUT3 / OUT4 (board outputs 1 to 4).0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 62 . Managed by the Shelf Controller OFF when board is plugged but not declared GREEN when board is plugged. In. GREEN when power supply operational RED when the internal power supply is switched off (e. Indicates that the Wavelength Selective Switch is not ready for operation during board start. INI Yellow ∆ Green/Red on the front panel : The optical interface is based on 3 double MU/MU connectors and 3 quadruple MU/MU connectors. This shelf will include the related transponders and OADC1750 boards Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation.2 Output .6 Output .1 Input . at unit start-up) or when power supply fails Managed by HW. Output . . the board shall not be unplugged.3. The LED shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board start.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED Name PWR LED Color LED color Green/Red Meaning Meaning Managed by HW.5 Output .g.1 TDMX1180 It is recommended to insert TDMX1180 in a dedicated “Secondary shelf” for each OTS line on a given “Multi degree” application. configured and no failure RED when hardware failure.9 TMDX1180 3.8 1 — 3 — 62 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Output . located [1] : MON_IN (board input monitoring).1 Output .9. [6] : All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. [5] : OUT5 / OUT6 / OUT7 /OUT8 (board outputs 5 to 8).4 Output .7 Output .

The TDMX function is a part of both Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (T/ROADM) and Multi-degree nodes. The Tunable Demultiplexer (TDMX) is a board able to separate an input optical multiplex into 8 different channels.9. the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler.2 TDMX1180 functional description 1 — 3 — 63 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. On the pass-through (or express) path. On the drop path.The Tunable Demultiplexer board is based on only one major component : a Wavelength Selective Switch.e.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . a Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 63 LOFA 1110 LOFA 1110 x8 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) . It can also attenuate the selected channels. The figure below describes the Up to 96λ environment of the board: 1:2 Up to 96λ ½ OADC1100 OCNC1240 1:8 Up to 96λ Up to 96λ TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) ½ OADC1300 1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 TDMX1180 3. whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation.e. Following pre-amplification. completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i. connected to receivers) in the previous step. a demultiplexing architecture (based on TDMX) separates them into single channels which are then selectively connected to their respective Receiver.

10 WMAN3174 3. • LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC). This shelf will include the related OADC1300 and LOFA110 among other boards Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation. or when some wavelengths are abnormally absent from the input Spectrum. • YELLOW when signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold. and Add1 & Add2 ports). configured and without any failure. • YELLOW when ABnormal Monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation of the OCM [either embedded or not]. but not configured. [6] : EXT1_IN / EXT2_IN / EXT3_IN / EXT4_IN (monitoring inputs of External port 1 & External port 2 & All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 External port 3 & External port 4). • LED is green : the board is plugged. [5] : ADD3 / ADD4 / not used / not used (WMAN3x74 Add3 & Add4 ports). communication failure with the OCM or monitoring switch failure).3. [2] : IN1 / OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output). In case of WMAN3x74 units (3 express ports + 4 add ports) Add5 & Add6 inputs are NOT USED.1 WMAN3174 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots 3 to 18 (4 slots wide) MON_IN1 MON_OUT IN1 OUT MON_IN2 MON_IN3 IN2 IN3 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 WMAN3174 It is recommended to insert WMAN3174 in the “Master or Generic shelf” for each OTS line on a given “Multi degree” application. Do not extract the board during this period. [1] : MON_IN1 / MON_OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output monitoring).10. • The LED ‘INI’ shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board start. GREEN when power supply operational RED when the internal power supply is switched off (e.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 64 .g. EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 •The optical interface is based on 3 double MU/MU connectors and 3 quadruple MU/MU connectors. 1 — 3 — 64 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. at unit start-up) or when power supply fails • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC). ∆ 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. • ABnormal Input signal alarm. Meaning ABI ABS/INI Yellow Yellow ABM Yellow Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged. [4] : IN2 / IN3 / ADD1 / ADD2 (WMAN3x74 input2 & input3. • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED Name PWR LED color Led Color Meaning Green/Red • Managed by HW. [3] : MON_IN2 / MON_IN3 (WMAN3x74 input2 and input3 monitoring). • LED is red: HW failure. • YELLOW when ABnormal operation of the wavelength Switch (some wavelengths improperly configured : blocked/pass-through or attenuations not applied properly). power supply failure or communication failure.

e.3.The Wavelength Manager board consists of three major components : one Wavelength Selective Switch. On the drop path.Only 4 of them are used by WMAN3174 3 « Express ports» and their monitoring accesses WMAN output and its monitoring access 1 — 3 — 65 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. a Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i. Following pre-amplification. completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i. a demultiplexing architecture separates them into single channels which are then selectively connected to their respective Receiver.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 65 M . connected to receivers) in the previous step. On the pass-through (or express) path.2 WMAN3174 functional description 6 «Add ports» . . The Wavelength Manager function is the core of both Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (T/R-OADM) and Multi-degree nodes. the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler.e.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 4 external monitoring inputs accesses The Wavelength Manager 3 (WMAN3) is a board able to build an output optical multiplex by selectively combining. whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation.10 WMAN3174 3. normally turned off) and one Optical Channel Monitor.10. The figure below describes the environment of the board in a “Multi-degree 3” application (extract): Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OCNC1240 1 OSC VOA 2 OADC0104 WMAN 3174 1 VOA 2 OSC D WMAN 3174 OCNC1240 M ALCT OCNC1240 M D Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s WMA N 3174 D All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. one dark VOA (i. attenuating or even blocking the single channels forming several input multiplexes.e.

• LED is red: HW failure.11 OADC1750 3. located on the front panel: [1] : TIA1 (Tx Input A1) . power supply failure or communication failure.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 66 .3. TIA4 (Tx Input A4) [3] : TIB1 (Tx Input B1) . Do not extract the board during this period. configured and without any failure. TIB4 (Tx Input B4) [9] : TOA (Tx Output A) . TIB2 (Tx Input B2) [4] : TIB3 (Tx Input B3) . • LED is green : the board is plugged. TIA2 (Tx Input A2) [2] : TIA3 (Tx Input A3) . • LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. but not configured.11. The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Name Led color Meaning MAB Yellow Meaning • Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputs Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged.1 OADC1750 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots 2 Tx_A1 Tx_A2 Tx_A3 Tx_A4 OADC1750 Tx_B1 Tx_B2 Tx_B3 Tx_B4 Tx OUTPUT A Tx OUTPUT B 1 — 3 — 66 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TOB (Tx Output B) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1750 is a Coupler used in Optical Add Drop part for the TR-OADM function.The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “add” direction: WMAN 3174 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 4:1 2 VOA 2 VOA LOFA 1110 LOFA 1110 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) Up to 32λ 1 8:1 x8 4:1 Up to 32λ 1 OADC1300 Up to 4λ 8:1 Up to 4λ OADC1300 x8 4:1 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ OADC1750 4:1 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 67 . .11. One OADC1750 board is able to add eight local wavelengths in a given “multiplexing branch” of a “TROADM multi-degree application”.2 OADC1750 functional description 4:1 4:1 1 — 3 — 67 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3.The OADC1750 is a master unit performing twice the Coupling of four inputs . The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board. .11 OADC1750 3.

Refer to the next page for more details.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED LED Color Name Led color Meaning Meaning Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged. configured and without any failure. • LED is green : the board is plugged. 1 — 3 — 68 Tx_OUT Unused Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. but not configured. power supply failure or communication failure.3. • LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and OADC0104 boards are inserted and declared according to the following table: ALCT slot # OADC0104 slot # 3 23 4 5 25 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 27 29 31 33 35 37 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.12 OADC0104 3. In such a case. Do not extract the board during this period.12. the ALCT and OADC0104 boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.1 OADC0104 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots OADC0104 23 to 38 * LED Tx_10 Tx_90 * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the OADC0104 board (i.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 68 . the input power of the related amplifier) .e. • LED is red: HW failure.

12 OADC0104 3.Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming / outgoing access.2 OADC0104 functional description External Power Supplies Alarm Interface EEPROM EEPROM SPI interface 1 — 3 — 69 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The output power (TX-out) includes 10 % of incoming TX-in Channel 1 and 90% of incoming TX-in Channel 2 Relevant alarms can be raised.The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given outgoing direction: LOFA11y0 OADC0104 WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC Local wavelengths to be inserted in a given Y line Incoming spectrums of the other Y lines ALCT Outgoing spectrum of a given Y line All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3. . The OADC0104 board is used to insert the ALCT power in the outgoing spectrum sent to the LOFA11y0 board in case of “TR-OADM Degree 2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 69 .12. . 3 and 4” applications. .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC0104 is a unidirectional coupler Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 70 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 70 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 71 .4 Line amplifier and related boards description 1 — 3 — 71 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

the input power of the related amplifier) . the input power of the related amplifier) . Refer to the next page for more details.4.e. 1 — 3 — 72 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In such a case.1 ALCT1010 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots ALCT1010 3 to 18 * * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the BMDX board (i. In such a case.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Upper part The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the [ALCT and BMDX] or [ALCT and OADC0104] boards are inserted and declared according to the following table: ALCT slot # BMDX slot # OADC0104 sl. # 3 6 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 29 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 31 33 35 37 5 4 3 10 9 25 27 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.1 ALCT1010 4. * The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic mode” to regulate the output power of the OADC0104 board (i.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 72 .e.1. the ALCT and OADC0104 boards must be inserted & declared according to the table shown below.

1. In Dynamic mode. manual) or Dynamic In Disable ( manual) mode.1. There are 11 versions of the ALCT1010 unit available for each of the bands 2 to 12. with BMDX board. 1626 LM loading plan in Long Haul application ALCT1010 unit must be in band 5 and removed from the 88th channel.1 ALCT1010 4. In Dynamic mode. This loop control uses backplane links. 2. the ALCT output power is controlled with a hardware loop from the BMDX output. amplifier input) power target. Channel loading order: 7. the ALCT output power is set manually by the operator at the commissioning phase. 11. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted and declared according to the table shown on the previous page. Therefore in such a case. the tuning is done with OP_WDM_D that is the BMDX output (i. to facilitate the loading of the system with a few number of modulated channels or to compensate for the loss of some modulated channels.0A — Operation and Maintenance ALCT1010 (Automatic Laser ConTrol) is used to maintain a constant optical power over the whole extended C-Band. are used. 8. Typically one board per Line Terminal. 5.48V 1 — 3 — 73 Output power from BMDX or OADC0104 for ALC dynamic mode All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The ALCT1010 board & ALC can be used in 2 different configurations : Disable ( mode. with OADC0104 board. 2 boards per OADM/Back-to-Back and one per OTS Line in Multi degree n.2 ALCT1010 functional description ALC Loading Mode Photodiode VOA Loop control Colored Laser VOA Management POWER Supply Switch for ALC mode Hardware information +/.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 73 . 10.4. In that case.4. 12. amplifier input) power target and that does not correspond to the ALCT output power. 9. 6.e. 3. the ALCT output power is controlled in order to regulate the OADC0104 output (i.e.

2 LOFA11yz 4.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots LOFA1110 LOFA1111 LOFA1120 LOFA1121 3 to 18 LOFA1110 LOFA1111 LOFA1120 LOFA1121 Compact shelf Board Slots 2 to 5 (2 and 5 are recommended) Upper part Lower part 1 — 3 — 74 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 74 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 75 . the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 28dB Naming rules for LOFAwxyz : w: big functional or structural differences 1: corresponds to a unit that houses both the gain block and the pumps 2: corresponds to a highly reliable amplifier.2 LOFA11yz 4. used for Long Haul terrestrial and submarine applications. It provides up to +20dBm output power without External MultiPump Module (up to +23dBm in C-band with EMPM in further release). which only includes a gain block but no pumps x: amplification band 1: corresponds to extended C-Band 2: corresponds to L-Band y: gain of the amplifier 0: corresponds to a nominal gain of 11dB on the LOFA2 1: corresponds to 22/9 in the case of LOFA1 and to 14dB gain on the LOFA2 2: corresponds to 28/9 in the case of LOFA2 and to 18dB gain on the LOFA2 z: minor modifications 0: tunable output power 1: tunable output power with metro Gain block and floating VOA 2: fixed output power All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. LOFA11y0 unit is able to tune automatically its VOA and its 1st stage output power. the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 22dB. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses.4. erbium doped fibre amplifier. LOFA11y0 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.2 LOFA11y0 functional description 1510nm Demux 1 2 1510nm Demux 1 — 3 — 75 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses. LOFA11y0 supports 2 functional variants : LOFA1110 is a 22/9 amplifier. LOFA1120 is a 28/9 amplifier.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0 is an extend C-Band. dual stage.2.

1510nm Demux Optical input 1 2 Optical output 1 — 3 — 76 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. depending on the system configuration. Photo. 1510nm Demux VOA Photo. It provides up to +17dBm output power and is used for regional application (32 channels max). This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses. dual stage. Photo.2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Photo.4.2 LOFA11yz 4. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion losses. the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 22dB. LOFA1121 is a 28/9 amplifier. This VOA is floating meaning that it can be used or not via a front panel access. Photo.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y1 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF. not by the unit itself. LOFA11y1 is a C-Band.3 LOFA11y1 functional description OSC out 1st stage input monitor 1st stage VOA output monitor Connection 1st stage 2nd stage output input 2nd stage output monitor OSC in 2nd stage Input monitor Photo. the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 28dB. erbium doped fibre amplifier. LOFA11y1 unit is capable to tune automatically its 1st stage and 2nd stage output powers by keeping the gain of each stage constant. LOFA11y1 supports 2 functional variants : LOFA1111 is a 22/9 amplifier. The floating VOA is tuned by SW. this tuning mode is supported when the amplifier operates in unidirectional configuration as well as in Bidirectional configuration.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 76 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 77 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 77 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Should this occur.3. unit not configured) Yellow Yellow When switched ON it means abnormal input signal alarm on gain block 1. The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED. the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow color. the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair. configured and without failure – RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 78 . This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off (e. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. The signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold ON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down* Green / Red Led managed by Shelf Controller. ** When a board is on firmware download state.g.3 BOFA1000 4. at unit start–up. It is: – OFF when the board is plugged but not declared – GREEN when the board is plugged. power supply failure or failure in communication on the board – YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmware download is being performed. the board must not be extracted** * The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction (logical OR). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 BOFA1000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots BOFA1000 BOFA1000 2 to 20 Lower part Upper part 1 — 3 — 78 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED Name LED Color Meaning Led color PWR AB1 SD Meaning Green / Red This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied.4.

5dB Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm Wavelength range 1530. it provides up to +15dBm output power in a sub-band.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 BOFA1000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.3. Characteristics : BOFA1000 is a board containing 1 band amplifier that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the extended C-band.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 79 . minimum output power +6dBm Tuning Step 0. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 BOFA1000 functional description Input & Output Monitoring Points Photo Detector Photo Detector BOFA1 input BOFA BOFA1 Output Pump Laser Control 1st amplification stage Management 1 — 3 — 79 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.33 to 1568.57nm Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time.4.3 BOFA1000 4. The gain block is a single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifier.

configured and without failure – RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off (e. The signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold ON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down* Green / Red Led managed by Shelf Controller. The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED.4.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 80 . Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. the board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED Name LED Color Meaning Led color PWR AB1 AB2 SD Meaning Green / Red This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied. at unit start–up.4. power supply failure or failure in communication on the board – YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmware download is being performed. the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow color.4 BOFA2000 4. The signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold When switched ON it means abnormal input signal alarm on gain block 2. unit not configured) Yellow Yellow Yellow When switched ON it means abnormal input signal alarm on gain block 1.g.1 BOFA2000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots BOFA2000 2 to 20 Lower part Upper part 1 — 3 — 80 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. It is: – OFF when the board is plugged but not declared – GREEN when the board is plugged. Should this occur. the board must not be extracted** * The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction (logical OR). ** When a board is on firmware download state.

33 to 1568.2 BOFA2000 functional description Input & output Monitoring Points Photo Detector Photo Detector BOFA2 input BOFA Pump Laser Control BOFA2 output 2nd amplification stage Input/output Measurements Input & Output Monitoring Points Photo Detector Photo Detector BOFA1 input BOFA Pump Laser Control BOFA1 Output 1st amplification stage Management 1 — 3 — 81 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. they provide up to +15dBm output power in a sub-band and can be used to amplify optical signal transmitted indifferently in the same direction or the two opposite directions (one direction per BOFA gain block).4 BOFA2000 4.4.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 81 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 BOFA2000 is a board containing 2 band amplifiers that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the extended C-band. Characteristics : minimum output power +6dBm Tuning Step 0.5dB Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm Wavelength range 1530.4. The 2 gain blocks are single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifiers. BOFA2000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.57nm Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 EMPM1000 LED All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 EMPM1000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots Extractor Handle EMPM1000 3 to 18 Compact shelf Board Slots EMPM1000 2 to 5 (3 and 4 are recommended) Monitor OUT Monitor IN Cover OUT Extractor Handle 1 — 3 — 82 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4.5 EMPM1000 4.5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 82 .

5 EMPM1000 4. The pump output power is managed by the LOFA11y0 board via backplane links. A Software shutdown command is also available. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the 1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions). It polls the signal on backplane (GEN_APSD. The EMPM1000 unit includes one pump laser plugged via a small daughter boards to the control board and includes a photodiode monitoring. This temporary inhibition can be performed through the SW (CT) and lasts a few minutes in order to allow the removal of the cover from the LOFA.2 EMPM1000 functional description Pump Laser Module ECID LEDs DC/DC converter Shutdown Restart Logic SPIDER 1 — 3 — 83 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the connection of the EMPM1000 to the LOFA and the installation of the LOFA cover back in place without having the shut-down of the amplifier.5.4. The EMPM1000 shall house the pump laser and its associated temperature control circuitry. The control board includes logical control of laser shutdown command.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 83 . This board has the same size of the LOFA and has an optical input and an optical output. The optical output provides the additional pump power to the LOFA through an optical connection requiring a specific jumper with angled connector on EMPM1000 side (see installation handbook for details). BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration (enabling signals) generates the shutdown commands.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 EMPM1000 is an external pump module providing additional power at a wavelength of approximately 1480nm to the LOFA11y0 in order that it can increase its output power up to +23dBm. The EMPM1000 can be installed in 1626LM NE already in service without affecting the traffic through a temporary inhibition of the LOFA shutdown that is triggered by the removal of the LOFA cover. LOS_2MBPS. the APSD functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 84 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 84 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 85 .5 NE management and related boards description 1 — 3 — 85 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

EC led is green except if this ESCT which is in a slave shelf has not been connected yet to the master shelf (SW has not been downloaded). EC Green / Red / Orange led SC Green / Red / Orange led All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.OFF when the corresponding URG/NUR alarm disappear Indicates the state of the EC processor.1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Lower part Name Name URG Red led NUR Red led ATD Yellow led Meaning Meaning It is ON if an Urgent Alarm is raised (major or critical) It is ON if a Not Urgent Alarm is raised (minor) Attended Alarm indication. active.red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance) . configured and no failure . N.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 86 . Led states: .B.green led: board present. EC LED is yellow Indicates the state of the SC processor. configured and no failure . active.red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance) . It is .orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or the board is present but not SW configured. Led states: .5.1 ESCT2000 5.ON when the operator has acknowledged then alarms by pushing the ACO button (URG/NUR leds are lit OFF) . Even if ESCT supports SC functionality.1 ESCT2000 faceplate Generic and compact shelves ESCT2000 Board Slot 1 Upper part 1 — 3 — 86 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.green led: board present.orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or starting or the board is present but not SW configured.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 87 . ESCT2000 located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications and NE data base. As a consequence. When the board is located in Slave shelves. The EC supports the Q3/TL1 Network Management agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine). URG/NURG/ATTD LEDs are active on the master ESCT2000 only (managed by the EC). The Flash memory can be extracted from ESCT in order to plug it in another unit and to provide the new unit with the data base. the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to SC processor. …). the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to EC processor (EC to local SC are carried over ISSB bus).g : alarms collection. In a shelf all the boards are connected to the SC via the SPI bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e. only the SC functionality is provided. It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for the communication between NE and Management system (OS. In each slave shelf. only one ESCT2000 in the NE supports a mass Memory.2 ESCT2000 functional description Mass Memory EC IS-Link-EC CT NMS LED's Remote Inventory IS_Link ISSB IS-Link-SC SPI_A SC Card Presence Power Supply 1 — 3 — 87 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 ESCT2000 5. remote inventory and data EEPROM reading).1. In master shelf.5. Craft Terminal. both functionalities are active.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) function and the Shelf Controller (SC) function. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. When the board is located in the Master shelf. The SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 88 .green led: board present. active.5.orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or the board is present but not SW configured. ESCT2000_SC (ESCT2000 light version with only SC Controller) is supported only in secondary shelves.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Lower part Name Name SC Green / Red / Orange led Meaning Meaning Indicates the state of the SC processor.1 ESCT2000 5.red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance) . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. configured and no failure . Led states: .3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate Generic secondary shelf ESCT2000_SC Board Slot 1 Upper part 1 — 3 — 88 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 89 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 89 .

5. This led is RED when one of the internal +/.48V power supplies is failed or switchedoff (e.GREEN when the board is plugged.g. power supply failure or failure in communication on the board .2.OFF when the board is plugged but not configured . unit not configured) Line Busy led: it is ON when the phone line (speech channel) is busy Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference call is occurring. configured and without failure .1 OSCU1010 faceplate Board Generic shelf Slots OSCU1010 OSCU1011 3 to 18 Upper part Board Compact shelf Slots OSCU1010 OSCU1011 2 to 6 Lower part 1 — 3 — 90 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.YELLOW when a firmware download is performed. This LED is blinking when the phone is ringing Vacant Line led: it is ON when the line is vacant The led is: . at unit start-up.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LED Name PWR Green/Red led LB Yellow led CC Yellow led VL Green led ∆ Green / Yellow / Red led Meaning Meaning This led is GREEN when the board is power supplied.2 OSCU10yz 5.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 90 1 1 2 2 J1 RST J CODING WHEELS Speech channel number coding wheels to set the NE phone number . The board must not be extracted * Optical Supervisory Channel 1 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX Optical Supervisory Channel 1 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX Optical Supervisory Channel 2 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX Optical Supervisory Channel 2 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX Speech channel handset connector Board reset push button Line pick up push button: push the button to get the line All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.RED to indicate failure due to hardware failure.

F1.In case of Mullti Degree 3 or 4 applications.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OSCU board is used for the management of the supervisory channel composed of : a 2Mbit/s SuperVision Frame (SPV) a 2Mb/s User Data Channel (UDC) The Optical Supervisory Channel Unit carries supervision information from/to NEs by means of an additional 1510nm (OSCU101z) wavelength. It contains the LAPD communication protocol with the ESCT in the 12 Data Communication Channel bytes (D1-D3 for OTS / D4-D12 for OMS). This function is used to remote the Shutdown of the Amplifiers. E1. OSCU must be used in conjunction with USIB1000 to provide external access of UDC. OADM. B1.2 OSCU10yz 5. The SPV is similar to the SDH section overhead (FAW. E2.2.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 91 . B-t-B Terminal). .2 OSCU1010 functional description 2048 kb/s 4864 kb/s S_Nossa METRO I/E AUXA1 RXD1 TXD1 MRX1 BE RXA1 RXB1 AUXB1 AUXA2 E/I X RXA RXD2 AUXB2 2048 kb/s 4864 kb/s I/E RX2 TXD2 MRX2 RXA2 RXB2 TXA2 RXB2 BE METRO2 B1 E/I TX2 Board alarms Spider EEPROM RI EEPROM DATA METRO1 B1 TXA1 TXB1 Wavelengths stabilization MTX1 MTX2 RXB SPI interface RXA RXB 64 kb/s Supervision frames and service channels management 64 kb/s 2048 kb/s O_NOSSA_2 DC/DC converter 1 — 3 — 91 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5. OSCU10y1 provides 1 optical transmitter and 1 optical receiver enabling to supervise 1 direction (suitable to Line Terminal). NU. D-bytes). 2 OSCU10y0 boards are required All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. furthermore the E2 byte carries a 64kbps voice channel dropped in a telephone handset through a jack connector (front panel) where as E1 byte carries a 64kbit/s auxiliary channel (coming from USIB1000 board). OSCU is able to manage a Shutdown bus (SD bus) to communicate with the Amplifier boards (LOFA/BOFA). OSCU10y0 provides 2 optical transmitters and 2 optical receivers enabling to supervise 2 directions (suitable to Line Repeater.

The corresponding alarm shall be raised. If clock is set to "LOCAL". E2 byte of the OSC frame shall be put in "pass-through" between both ports on the board if clock is set to "REMOTE". OTS-TTI signals shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about channel mismatches. while the first bit of slot 17 is used as parity bit for the multiplexing section subframe. the first bit of slot 1 is used as parity bit for the whole frame. while in the second part of the frame are inserted the service channels related to the optical multiplex section.2 OSCU10yz 5. LOSCF alarms or OMS_FDI. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI or OMS-BDI signals. E2 byte of the OSC frame from port SPV1 shall be dropped in front panel phone jack.3 2Mb/s supervision frame structure 1 — 3 — 92 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All unused bits are set to “1” value.5. OMS_BDI alarms (to manage OMSP protection). Slot 0 is used for frame alignment word. OT1 byte shall transport OTS-TTI signal. Cross-connection for E1 is automatically set in “Add/drop” if CLOCK is configured in “LOCAL” or “Pass-trough” if CLOCK is configured in “REMOTE”. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) frame is made of 32 bytes.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 92 .2. The 2MB/s supervision frame is divided in 32 slots. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA board. in the first part of the frame (slots 0 to 15) are inserted the service channels related to the optical transport section. A voice channel shall be transported by E2 byte of the supervision frame so that an operator located in front of an NE could call another operator situated in front of any other NE on the same network (specific call or conference call). Default state is “add/drop”. numbered from 0 to 31. OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) and OMS_BDI (Background Defect Indication) maintenance signals shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about failures. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS detected by OSCU board. An 64 kb/s User Data Channel (UDC) shall be possibly dropped or passed-through. K1/K2 bytes are used for alarm detection such as LOSC.

0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 93 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 3 — 93 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 USIB1000 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5.1 USIB1000 faceplate Generic shelf Board Slots USIB1000 23 to 38 4-pin RJ11 (audio interface for connecting an external telephone desk set or for phone extension towards other equipment) 8-pin RJ45 (2x64kbps codirectional channels G703 compliant) 8-pin RJ45 (2x2048 or 1544 kbps channels G703 compliant) 1 — 3 — 94 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 94 .

2 USIB1000 functional description User 1 2Mbit/s access 2Mbit/s / 1. T1 signals can be accepted on front panel but require in that case to be adapted in USIB in order to provide 2Mbit/s signals on the back panel.5. On back panel “dashed arrows” correspond to spare OSCU connections (not available in this release).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 USIB1000 provides external access to : Two 2Mbit/s (E1) or 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 95 . The bit-rate selection is configured via a switch on USIB board (to position before installing the board). OSCU being only able to manage 2Mbit/s bit-rate for the UDC.5Mbit/s Adaptation 2 x 2Mbit/s or 2 x 1.5Mbit/s (T1) User Data Channels (RJ45 connector) Two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels (RJ45 connector) An analogue audio interface (RJ11) to connect an external telephone desk set or phone extension towards other equipment. These signals are adapted through embedded interfaces between OSCU board and external access.5Mbit/s interface 4 4 User 2 RJ45 8 pins LED 4 4 4 64kbit/s interface 64kbit/s interface Audio interface RJ45 8 pins RJ11 4 pins Front panel Audio in Audio out Back panel 1 — 3 — 95 3 3 Power Supply Management Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. An UDC pass-through in one NE must be done via external loop on USIB1000. USIB is installed just under the OSCU board.3.3 USIB1000 5. There are three 3 Audio in and out lines on back panel : First one for the main OSCU Second one for the spare OSCU (not available in this release) Third one for potential second USIB (not available in this release) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. it can be used also in the “Generic shelf” .4.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 5.5. For both shelves (“Generic” and “Compact”) more than one HSKU board can be used if the capacity of one board is not large enough. This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000 spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set. Nevertheless.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates Board HSKU1000 HSKU1100 Generic shelf 22 or 39 (22 recommended) 23 to 38 Slots 25 pins SUB-D female connector for housekeeping alarms (8 functional inputs + 8 functional outputs plus additional signals for reference voltages Board HSKU1100 Compact shelf 7 to 10 (10 recommended) Slots 1 — 3 — 96 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 HSKU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 96 .

5.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions Back Panel connectors Front panel connector DB25 Output block 8 OUT Relays 8 IN Opto_couplers SPIDER Input block Example : OUT relays state in function of the SW command Open relay x Relay x OUT x State : Low Close relay y Relay y OUT y state : High Common out 1 — 3 — 97 Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4. The user is informed about the current status of the opto-couplers inputs.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 97 . Moreover the user can remotely change the state of the output relays.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 HSKU1000 & HSKU11OO provide 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 5. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100 can be installed in Master shelf. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100 unit per NE can be provided. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100

5.5.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates
Board
RAIU1000 RAIU1100

Generic shelf

22 to 39 (39 recommended) 23 to 38

Slots

9 pins SUB-D female and RJ11 connectors to be used for rack alarms management

Board
RAIU1100

Compact shelf

7 to 10 (9 recommended)

Slots

1 — 3 — 98

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

RAIU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”. Nevertheless, it can be used also in the “Generic shelf” . This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000 spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 98

5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100

5.5.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions
URG NURG ATTD

Or Management Management
Relays

DB9

Logic

To the TRU or to the above shelf RAIU board

Logic Functions
URG/NURG/FAN/PSUP...

RJ11 4 From the below shelf RAIU board

Front Panel
1 — 3 — 99
Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 monitor the rack alarms to light ON or OFF the lamps of the TRU (URG/NURG/ATTD). It is equipped in each shelf to collect information on the alarms raised in the same shelf. The slave shelf RAIU only takes into account :

the alarms raised by the fan modules or by the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM, the information sent by the RAIU board of the below shelf when present.

The master shelf RAIU board collects signals : from the ESCT via the SPI bus, from the EC via the URG, NURG and UP signals, from the RAIU board of the below shelf.

directly from the fan modules and from the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM,

2 front panel connectors are available on the RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 boards. These 2 interfaces are : A 9 pins SUB-D female connector. In Master shelf it provides the interface with the TRU.

A RJ11 connector which allows intra-shelf connection. It has to be connected with the 9-pin SUB-D connector of the RAIU1000 / RAIU1100 located in the shelf below.

In Slave shelf it can be connected either with the TRU or with the RJ11 connector of another RAIU1000 board, located in the above shelf.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 99

5.6 PSUP1000

5.6.1 PSUP1000 faceplate
Generic shelf Board Slots Compact shelf

PSUP1000

21 and 40

PSUP1000

Board

11 and 12

Slots

1 — 3 — 100

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

LED

LED Color

Meaning

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 100

5.6 PSUP1000

5.6.2 PSUP1000 functional description

SPIder OR

3.7V input

48/60V to 3.7V & 5.5V DC/DC
48/60V battery input

3.7 Output 5.4v output

48/60 V Filter & surge suppression

OR

48/60V output filtered

48/60V input filtered

1 — 3 — 101

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

PSUP1000 boards work in 1+1 protection and they are both active at the same time, supplying the units in the subrack with nominal 48V or 60V, 3V and 5V. Each card is able to provide from the main powering, by means an internal DC/DC converter, the required power supply. The main purposes of PSUP1000 are :

Supply and distribute –48V/-60V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in each shelf. Supply and distribute +3.7V and 5.4V protected voltages to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards. Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 101

5.7 FANS1000

5.7.1 FANS1000 faceplate
Generic shelf Board Slot
41

FANS1000

1 — 3 — 102

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 102

5.7 FANS1000

5.7.2 FANS1000 functioning

HSKU

RAIU

Back panel wires

Back panel wires

FANS alarms

1 — 3 — 103

FANS alarms

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

FANS1000 is equipped with 3 fans, the unit is located at the bottom of each 1626 LM shelf, allowing to dissipate the heat and to regulate the board temperature. A Fan Unit Protection (anti-dust filter) has to be put just below the fans. The FANS are monitored via the SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the HSKU and the RAIU boards to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system. The maximum power consumption of the FAN 1000 block is 55 watts when all the three FAN modules are at high rotation speed. The maximum power dissipation per shelf is 640W.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 103

5.8 FANS2000

5.8.1 FANS2000 faceplate
Compact shelf Board Slot
13

FANS2000

Front view

LED

Anti-dust filter

Backplane connectors
1 — 3 — 104
Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

Top view
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Name ∆

LED Color
Green / Red

Manage by

Meaning

The Shelf Controller OFF when board is plugged but not declared GREEN when board is plugged and no failure RED : when board indicates failure due to hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in communication on the board

M7 connector is used for:
- Power supply interface - Card presence interface

M9 connector is used for:
- SPI bus - Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 104

5.8 FANS2000

5.8.2 FANS2000 functioning

Slot ID

1 — 3 — 105

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This FANS2000 unit used in the system 162xLM compact shelf is equipped with 6 fans. M7 connector is used for: 1) Power supply interface
-

2) Card presence interface M9 connector is used for: 1) SPI bus

Power supplies available on the board are +13.2V and +3V3. Two +13.2V power supplies are generated by DC/DC converters from 2 external batteries (+36V to 72V).

2) Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) is used for:

1) to adjust the right speed of 6 Fans

2) detect alarm signal to put all fans to the maximum speed (100%) FAN Specifications : - Dimension : 40x40x28 mm - Rated Voltage : 12 VDC - Rated Current : 0,8 A - Voltage Control Speed : 0V --> 16000 (RPM), 1,65 --> 8100 and 3,3V --> 0 - Speed max : 16 000 RPM - The maximum power consumption of the FAN 2000 block is 24 watts.
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 105

Answer the Questions
True
TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI.

False

CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412 Line access (network side) of 2xGE_FC board is always B&W The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frame

OCPU2100 is dedicated to OSNCP and is completely passive. OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial applications BMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic and based on a BMDX output power target. LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications

Time allowed: 10 minutes

1 — 3 — 106

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Notes :
TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI. CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412 Line access (network side) of 2xGBE_FC board is always B&W The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frame

True

False

OCPU2100 is dedicated to O-SNCP and is completely passive. OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial applications BMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic and based on a BMDX output power target. LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 106

Answer the Questions [cont.]
True
LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gain URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in Master shelf only OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm supervisory channel Supervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/s UDC external access is located on OSCU USIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from PSUP and FANS

False

Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT

PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of the shelf

Time allowed: 10 minutes

1 — 3 — 107

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Notes :
LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gain URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in Master shelf only OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm supervisory channel Supervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/s UDC external access is located on OSCU USIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from PSUP and FANS

True

False

Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT

PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of the shelf

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 107

Discover
According to trainer instructions, discover the boards in one or more shelves belonging to the training model:
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NE:

21 22

R. #

13

Sr. #
14

____ minutes
40

15 16

17

18 39

1

2

19

20

23 24 41
1 — 3 — 108

25

26

27 28

29

30

31 32

33

34

35 36

37

38

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

NE:

R. #

Sr. #

21 22 3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40

1 2

19 20

41

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 108

Discover [cont.]

NE:

21 22

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 12

R. #

13

Sr. #
14

15 16

17

18 39

40

1

2

19

20

23 24 41
1 — 3 — 109

25

26

27 28

29

30

31 32

33

34

35 36

37

38

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

NE:

R. #

Sr. #

21 22 3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40

1 2

19 20

41

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 109

Module Summary The available boards for the 1626 LM R 5.0A are
Transponders : TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12 Protection : OCPU2104, OCPU2100 and PSCU3000 Ethernet tributaries : 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000

Multiplexers/Demultiplexers : CMDX10yz, OMDX8100_x, OMDX4100_chx-chy and BMDX1x00

R/TR-OADM and related : OADC1102, WMAN1100, OCNC12y0, OADC1100, OADC1300, TMDX1180, WMAN3174, OADC1750, OADC0104 Management and Alarms : ESCT2000, RAIU1000, RAIU1100, OSCU10yz, HSKU1000 and HSKU11001100 Environment and User services : PSUP1000, FANS1000, FANS2000 and USIB1000
1 — 3 — 110
Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Amplifiers and related : LOFA11yz, BOFAw000, EMPM1000 and ALCT1010

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 110

Self-assessment on the Objectives
Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 — 3 — 111

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 111

End of Module Boards Description

1 — 3 — 112

Product Overview — Boards Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 3 — Page 112

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 Product Overview
Module 4 Cabling Description
3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 1

Blank Page

1—4—2

Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 2

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 3 .0A boards 1—4—3 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. you should be able to: Perform optical and electrical cabling related to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 4 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives [cont.] 1—4—4 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

13 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 Example 1.9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf .5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application .Example 1.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf .0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 5 .15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.1 TRU layout and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.) 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Optical cabling description 1.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example 1.21 ETHC1000 optical connections 1.18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 . .Example 1.) 1.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections 1.19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir.0A — Operation 2.Example 1.Example 1.4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application .4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectors Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 32 33 34 35 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 LC-type optical connector 1. Add/Drop shelf config.3 Links between RAIU and TRU 2.12 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 Example 1.7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf .1 Unit optical connections 1.Example 1.2 MU-type optical connector 1.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM .11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example 1.2 Links between PSUP and TRU 2.Example 1.Example 1.22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 2 Electrical cabling description All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1—4—5 Product Overview — Cabling Description 2.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 .14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf .Example 1.Example 1.Example 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Table of Contents [cont.] Switch to notes view! 1—4—6 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 6 .

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 7 .1 Optical cabling description 1—4—7 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 Optical cabling description 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 8 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Unit optical connections Not used Mux output monitoring Ch #1 Ch #2 Ch #3 Ch #4 Ch #5 Ch #6 Ch #7 Ch #8 Not used Mux output monitoring Band #1 Band #2 Band #3 Band #4 Band #5 Band #6 Band #7 Band #8 Band #9 Band #10 Band #11 Band #12 Output Input WDM BMDX unit WDM Rx monitoring B&W Rx B&W Tx WDM Rx WDM Tx TRBD unit Mux OUT Demux IN CMDX unit 1—4—8 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

on WDM interface. TRBD1131 either on Client or WDM interface.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 9 . • OCPU boards. • ALCT boards. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 MU-type optical connector 1—4—9 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. • LOFA boards. TRBD1191 on WDM interface. The optical connections are made with simple MU/SPC connectors on: • OSCU boards. TRBD1121.1 Optical cabling description 1. • CMDX boards. • TRBD1111.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The optical connections are made with double MU/SPC connectors : • TRBC boards. • OMDX boards. Warning: MU Short Boot is mandatory for CMDX1052.

All the XFP modules plugged on : ETHC1000 on WDM side.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 10 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. TRBD1191 on client side.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The optical connections are made with LC/PC connectors on: All the SFP modules plugged on : TBRC1111 on client side.1 Optical cabling description 1. 2xGBE_FC both on client and WDM sides.3 LC-type optical connector 1 — 4 — 10 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ETHC1000 on client side.

4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application .0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 11 PSUP RAIU .0A — Operation and Maintenance All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 HSKU PSUP LINE OSCU1010 ALCT1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 To CMDX To CMDX BMDX1000 ESCT2000 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 CMDX1010 19 20 38 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 11 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Transponder TRBD4312 TRBD4412.1 Optical cabling description 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 12 CMDX1010 RAIU .Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 ESCT2000 CMDX1010 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 To BMDX PSUP To BMDX 20 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 12 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TRBC4612 TRBD1191 & 1191 MLSE Associated CMDX CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 CMDX1052* CMDX1012 CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz 4ch – 100GHz 8ch – 50GHz 8ch – 50GHz All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application . TRBC4412 TRBD4612.0A — Operation and Maintenance All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 13 CMDX1010 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All connectors used for optical cabling are MU. Protected and Protecting transponders must be located in adjacent slots. Transponder TRBD4312 TRBD4412.1 Optical cabling description 1. TRBC4612 TRBD1191 & 1191 MLSE Associated CMDX CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 CMDX1052* CMDX1012 CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz 4ch – 100GHz 8ch – 50GHz 8ch – 50GHz All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP RAIU User side User side BMDX side PSUP BMDX side 20 OCPU2104 OCPU2104 OCPU2104 ESCT2000 CMDX1010 TRBC1111 TRBC1111 TRBC1111 TRBC1111 OCPU2104 TRBD1110 TRBD1110 TRBD1110 TRBD1110 OCPU2104 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 13 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TRBC4412 TRBD4612.

7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf . TRBC4412 TRBD4612.Example 21 22 3 3 4 4 55 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 39 40 PSUP OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 LOFA11y0 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 BOFA BOFA BOFA BOFA 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 14 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance The 1626 LM subracks and software give flexibility in the unit declaration. TRBC4612 TRBD1191 & 1191 MLSE Associated CMDX CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 CMDX1052* CMDX1012 CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz 4ch – 100GHz 8ch – 50GHz 8ch – 50GHz All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 14 RAIU PSUP .1 Optical cabling description 1. Transponder TRBD4312 TRBD4412.

1 Optical cabling description 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 15 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 RAIU PSUP 21 22 3 3 4 4 55 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 39 40 .Example PSUP OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 TRBD4312 LOFA11y0 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 TRBD4312 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 TRBD11y1 19 CMDX1010 20 ESCT2000 TRBD11y1 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 15 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance The 1626 LM subracks and software give flexibility in the unit declaration.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf .

0A — Operation and Maintenance PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir WMAN1 OADC0104 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN1 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 16 PSUP RAIU .9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf .Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LINE 2 LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LINE 1 OSCU1010 ALCT1010 ALCT1010 WMAN1100 ESCT2000 USIB OADC 0104 OADC 0104 1 2 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 WMAN1100 38 19 20 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 16 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 17 PSUP RAIU .Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LINE 2 LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) OSCU1010 LOFA11y0 (booster) LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LINE 1 WMAN3174 ALCT1010 ESCT2000 OADC 0104 OADC 0104 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 WMAN3174 ALCT1010 35 36 37 38 19 20 41 Fan All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 17 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf .0A — Operation and Maintenance AGE: Automatic Gain Equalizer LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir WMAN3 OADC0104 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 18 PSUP LINE .1 Optical cabling description 1.) WMAN3174 OTS 1 OADC1300 OSCU1010 ESCT2000 WMAN OTS 2 WMAN OTS 3 USIB USIB 25 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 OSCU1010 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 18 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y0 OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M ALCT 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 LOFA11y0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance OCNC1230 1:2 OADC1100 OADC1300 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LOFA1110 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1:8 x8 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Optical cabling description 1.12 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 2 Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.) WMAN3174 OTS 2 OADC1300 ESCT2000 WMAN OTS 1 WMAN OTS 3 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 19 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 19 PSUP LINE D 1 1 VOA LOFA1110 VOA 2 2 .

13 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 3 Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.1 Optical cabling description 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance WMAN3174 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 PSUP LINE M LOFA1110 2 VOA 4:1 LOFA1110 2 VOA To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ 8:1 OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ 1 OADC1300 x8 x8 4:1 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 20 . WMAN3174 OTS 3 OADC1300 ESCT2000 WMAN OTS 1 WMAN OTS 2 25 1 2 25 23 23 24 25 24 OADC 0104 OADC 1100 25 25 25 25 24 25 26 25 28 OCNC 1230 25 27 25 24 25 29 25 24 30 31 32 33 34 OADC1300 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 35 36 37 38 19 RAIU 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 20 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance WMAN3174 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ RAIU PSUP OADC1750 4:1 M 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) OCNC1230 1:2 OADC1100 D TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 21 .1 Optical cabling description 1.) 21 22 33 3 25 23 23 44 24 25 24 55 25 25 25 24 66 26 77 7 25 27 25 24 8 8 28 9 9 25 29 25 24 10 10 30 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) (Booster) OADC1100 TDMX1180 OADC ALCT1010 TRBD11y1 0104 OADC TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 1100 OADC1750 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 OCNC TRBD11y1 1230 ESCT2000 25 1 2 2 25 25 25 WMAN OTS 1 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 21 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.

0A — Operation and Maintenance OADC1100 D OADC1300 WMAN3174 Up to 32λ Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ RAIU PSUP 21 22 33 4 55 66 77 8 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 M LOFA1110 2 VOA 1:8 1 1 LOFA1110 VOA Up to 32λ x8 OADC1300 8:1 x8 4:1 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 TDMX1180 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 22 .15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.) PSUP OADC TRBD11y1 LOFA11y0 1100 LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) TRBD11y1 (Booster) OADC ALCT1010 TRBD11y1 0104 TDMX1180 OADC1750 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 TRBD11y1 OCNC TRBD11y1 1230 ESCT2000 25 1 2 2 25 25 25 OADC1300 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 LOFA1110 20 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 22 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM .0A — Operation and Maintenance All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.1 Optical cabling description 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 23 PSUP RAIU .Example 21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 HSKU PSUP LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) LOFA11y0 (pre-amp) LOFA11y0 (booster) ESCT1000 BMDX1000 BMDX1000 OSCU1010 ALCT1010 ALCT1010 WMAN OADC OADC USIB 1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 WMAN 38 19 20 41 LINE West side LINE East side All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Fan 1 — 4 — 23 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 1 OSCU1010 ESCT2000 BMDX1000 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 25 1 2 25 23 23 OADC 0104 25 25 24 25 25 24 25 24 25 26 25 25 27 25 24 28 OCNC 1230 WMAN OTS 2 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20 25 29 25 24 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 24 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 .0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 24 RAIU Express PSUP LINE 1 BMDX1000 CMDX 12 LOFA1110 1 VOA 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC CMDX 1 Express VOA 2 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) OTS 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) ALCT ADD 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Optical cabling description 1.

1 Optical cabling description 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 25 RAIU PSUP LINE 2 LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 BMDX1000 CMDX 12 .18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 .Example 21 22 33 4 55 6 7 7 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 17 18 39 40 PSUP LOFA11y0 (Booster) LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier) WMAN3174 OTS 2 ESCT2000 BMDX1000 ALCT1010 LOFA1110 25 1 2 25 23 23 OADC 0104 25 25 24 25 25 24 25 24 25 26 25 25 27 25 24 28 OCNC 1230 WMAN OTS 1 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20 25 29 25 24 41 FANS1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 25 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance Express ADD Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT CMDX 1 WMAN3174 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) OTS 2 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 26 .19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CAUTION: LOFA slot 15 and OADC1300 slot 16 are needed only for channels 33 to 64.1 Optical cabling description 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. . Add/Drop shelf config.Example 1 — 4 — 26 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections W-P Not used W Not used LC connectors MU connectors U1 Client U2 Mux OUT Demux IN U1 TRBC unit All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Ch #1 Ch #2 Ch #3 Ch #4 Ch #5 Ch #6 Ch #7 Ch #8 CMDX unit 1 — 4 — 27 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 27 .1 Optical cabling description 1.

21 ETHC1000 optical connections U6 U7 U8 U9 MU connectors Not used LC connectors TRBD unit Mux OUT Demux IN Ch #1 Ch #2 Ch #3 Ch #4 Ch #5 Ch #6 Ch #7 Ch #8 Client U W L1 Not used CMDX unit All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1 — 4 — 28 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 28 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 10 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FC Depending on the number and the type of traffic boards. In that case.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 29 .22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 4 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FC Additional cable duct required (on the top) and change of subrack cover No need of additional cable duct and to change subrack cover Maximum allowed: 64 fibers 1 — 4 — 29 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Optical cabling description 1. For each ETHC unit : user ports P1 to P6 should be routed towards Top optical duct (12 fibers) user ports P7 to P9 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (6 fibers) For 2xGBE_FC unit: concentrated bit rate fibers on L1 port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers) user ports U1 and U2 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (4 fibers) colored signal fibers on W port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the subrack cover must be changed. The table below gives some shelf configurations and the relevant restrictions. an additional optical cable duct on the top of the shelf may be necessary to route all the fibers.

Time allowed : _ 1 — 4 — 30 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Discover Looking at the training equipment.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 30 . Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate the optical cabling he discovered.0A — Operation and Maintenance _minutes All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. identify the optical cabling between one transponder and the line (both directions). This schema must contain : • • • The boards acronyms involved in the optical path and their hardware position (Rack / Subrack / Slot /Sub-board / Connector) The direction of each fibre.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 31 .2 Electrical cabling description 1 — 4 — 31 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Racks TRU installed in previous release are still compatible with R5. CAUTION: Racks with MA-NGTRU are recommended since R5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRU : Top Rack Unit.0 restriction released).2 Electrical cabling description 2.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 32 .Attended Alarm (red) TRU fuse breakers Shelf 1 fuse breaker Side A Shelf 1 fuse breaker Side B = II II = Rack power feed presence indicator = II = 1 — 4 — 32 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Non Urgent Alarm (yellow) .0A. They are mandatory to host transponders shelves with 16 TRBD1191 (R5.1 TRU layout Rack Alarms Indicators . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Urgent Alarm (red) .0A for all new installations.

2 Electrical cabling description 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRU (Top Rack Unit) provides power feed voltage to shelves.2 Links between PSUP and TRU TRU P P W W R R P P W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan 1 — 4 — 33 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TRU provides Alarm and status indications on its front panel.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 33 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. also used to power up or down shelves. Power distribution is secured by circuit breakers.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Electrical cabling description 2.3 Links between RAIU and TRU Top Rack Unit Fiber storage P P W W R R P P W W R R 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 13 12 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R 9 pins SUB-D female connector 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 13 12 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan Air deflector P P W W R R P P W W R R RJ11 connector 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11 10 11 12 13 12 13 14 14 15 16 15 16 17 17 18 19 18 19 20 20 FANS Fan Fan 1 — 4 — 34 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 34 . use the cable 8 (P/N. or can be directly connected to the TRU (Top Rack Unit) which has four DB25 connectors. To interconnect with a TRU. 3AL 94742 AA).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The RAIU boards can be chained as previously described.

The connections are performed by means of RJ45 connectors. T o e x te rn a l LAN P1 P2 P3 P4 In te rn a l LAN P1 P2 P3 P4 In te rn a l LAN P1 P2 P3 P4 MASTER SH ELF SLAVE 1 SH ELF SLAVE 2 SH ELF All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Inter-shelf link (IS-LINK) allows the communication between the EC and all the SCs of the NE.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 35 .2 Electrical cabling description 2. located on the ESCT2000 front panel. It’s a 10Mbps Ethernet bus.4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectors RJ 45 connector for inter shelf links RJ 45 connector for 1353NM Twisted pair ESCT2000 Lower part 1 — 4 — 35 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 36 .Discover Identify the type of electrical cabling corresponding to network element(s) used for the training Time allowed : 5 minutes 1 — 4 — 36 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 37 .Module Summary Connectors used in 1626 LM R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A for intra or inter shelves Cabling is : Optical MU/SPC (most used) LC/SPC (SFP units) RJ45 BNC DB9 RJ11 Electrical Cabling of RAIU and ESCT can be a : “Bus” configuration “Star” configuration (point to multipoint) 1 — 4 — 37 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 38 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 1 — 4 — 38 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 39 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 1 — 4 — 39 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11707AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module Cabling Description 1 — 4 — 40 Product Overview — Cabling Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 1 — Module 4 — Page 40 .

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Module 1 Subrack and Board Declaration
3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0

Section 2 NE Operation

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 1

Blank Page

2—1—2

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the software associations

2—1—3

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

2—1—4

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 24 25 27 28 29 31 33 35 36 37 38 41 42

1 Applications and procedure overview 1.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal” 1.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal” 1.3 Steps overview 2 Boards and drawers declaration 2.1 Manual declaration for boards 2.2 Transponder boards declaration 2.3 Manual declaration for drawers 2.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawers 3 Connectors and cabling configuration 3.1 Connectors state management 3.2 Optical cabling declaration 3.3 Update management 4 Specific configuration 4.1 Modifying the LOFA board configuration 4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration 4.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration 4.4 Modifying the OSCU board configuration 4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters 4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration 4.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port Profile 5 Protection provisioning 5.1 OSNCP Protection management process 5.2 OSNCP Protection provisioning rules All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2—1—5 5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance 5.4 OMSP Protection management process 5.5 OMSP Protection provisioning example

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]
Switch to notes view!

2—1—6

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 6

1 Applications and procedure overview

2—1—7

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 7

1 Applications and procedure overview

1.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal”
Dedicated boards and related cabling
OSCU1010

Common boards
ESCT2000 RAIU1000

LOFA11yz_R

LOFA11yz_T
Contradirectional with LOFA11yz_R

PSUP1000 HSKU1000

BMDX1x00

ALCT1010 (X boards)
<channel #>

CMDX1010
(X boards) <Band #>

USIB1000

TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111
(X boards) <channel #>

2xGBE_FC
(CMDX or TRBC)
2—1—8
NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

ETHC1000
(TRBD)

OCPU210x
(optional)

PSCU3000
(optional)

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)

LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 8

1 Applications and procedure overview

1.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal”
Dedicated boards and related cabling
OSCU1010

Common boards
ESCT2000 RAIU1000

LOFA11yz_R

LOFA11yz_T
Contradirectional with LOFA11yz_R

PSUP1000 HSKU1000

OMDXw100_y_z

OMDXw100_y_z
(X optional boards) <Band #>

USIB1000

TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111
(X boards) <channel #>

2xGBE_FC
(CMDX or TRBC)
2—1—9

ETHC1000
(TRBD)

OCPU210x
(optional)
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

PSCU3000
(optional)

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)

LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 9

1 Applications and procedure overview

1.3 Steps overview

1) Boards and drawers declaration Automatic declaration Manual declaration 2) Connectors and cabling configuration Connectors state management Optical cabling declaration Transmission update 3) Specific configuration

2 — 1 — 10

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

When a board or a drawer is plugged in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration can be done automatically.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 10

2 Boards and drawers declaration

2 — 1 — 11

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 11

2 Boards and drawers declaration

2.1 Manual declaration for boards
To declare a board : 1. Display the subrack view, where you want to set the board 2. Select the empty slot 3. Choose Equipment Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog box is displayed 4. Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning 5. In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the type of the board. Define the parameters if required. Click OK 6. In the confirmation dialog box click OK : the board representation appears on the shelf view. A padlock symbol appears over the board Reminder : “To remove a board….”
1. 2.

2 — 1 — 12

Make sure first that there is no related loopback, cross-connection, declared drawer and / or cabling Select the board and the following menu options: Equipment Set out of Service and then Equipment Remove
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

Example:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 12

2 Boards and drawers declaration

2.2 Transponder boards declaration
Declaring a transponder board, the operator is able to set the « Line State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF »

This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board

Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only):

2 — 1 — 13

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board:

Port #1
O G P I O C H O D U 2

Port #101
O T U O C H O G P I

Client

Line

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 13

2 Boards and drawers declaration

2.2 Transponder boards declaration [cont.]
“Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below).
The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are described step by step in the “Optical channel management” module of this documentation

As an overview, the two states can be described as follow:
When “Line State” = ON, the channel is “in service”:
Line laser (WDM side) is ON. User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not require a shutdown « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated » Line laser (WDM side) is OFF User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP configuration and states « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated »
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

When “Line State” = OFF, the channel is “out of service”:

2 — 1 — 14

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TROADM is not used. Operating this way, the channel will be directly operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs. It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TROADM is used. Operating this way, the transponder line will be activated or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM configuration type and step.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 14

2 Board and drawer configuration

2.3 Manual declaration for drawers
To declare a drawer :
1. 2. 3.

Display the view of the board in which you want to set the drawer Select the empty slot, where you want to set it Choose Equipment box is displayed Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog

4. 5.

Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning In the Allowed Equipment Types area select the type of the Click OK drawer

6. 7.

In the confirmation dialog box click OK

2 — 1 — 15

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 15

2 Boards and drawers declaration

2.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawers
New shelf or existing shelf with available slots no Slot(s) pre-configuration Drawer(s) pre-configuration Connectors configuration Update transmission no New board(s) to be declared ? yes no

New board(s) inserted ?

yes Slot(s) automatic configuration New drawer(s) inserted ? yes Slot(s) automatic configuration

New board(s) and/or drawer(s) correctly declared
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

2 — 1 — 16

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

When one of the following boards is inserted in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration is done automatically:
- ESCT2000 - LOFA11yz

- BMDX1x00 - ALCT1010

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 16

3 Connectors and cabling configuration

2 — 1 — 17

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 17

Choose Configuration a connector : Connectors/Cabling… menu option 2. Select the connectors related to the board and/or drawer in the dialog box 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Click Set In Service or Set Out Of The connectors are the physical ports on every traffic board. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 18 . The padlock symbol appears or disappears in a specific column A given port is able to raise an alarm only if its connector is set « in service » 2 — 1 — 18 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. service.1 Connectors state management To set “in service” or “out of service” 1. It is possible to set in service or out of service all the connectors by a multiple selection.3 Connectors cabling configuration 3.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above example shows the cabling declaration between a LOFA1120 in slot #6 and a BMDX1100 in slot #3. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Optical cabling declaration 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 19 . To display the current declaration state : choose the Configuration Connectors/Cabling… menu option 2 — 1 — 19 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Connectors cabling configuration 3.

] To delete a cable declaration between connectors. the arrows disappear in the "cable“ cells of the connectors which were connected.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 20 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 After clicking on button “Delete Cable”.2 Optical cabling declaration [cont. operate as follow: Select one “cable” cell in the table Click on Delete Cable 2 — 1 — 20 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Connectors cabling configuration 3.

the TM icon (at the bottom right of the equipment view) becomes blue.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This operation must be performed at the end of declaration of all boards and drawers.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 21 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. -> Latest modifications are not yet taken into account: To take into account any declaration modification. operate as follow: choose Configuration Transmission Update menu option or from Connectors Configuration window. and at the end of all cross-connection operations.3 Connectors cabling configuration 3.3 Update management As soon as a declaration or a deletion is made. select Trans Update -> Latest modifications are taken into account when TM icon is green: 2 — 1 — 21 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 22 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 1 — 22 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 23 .4 Specific configuration 2 — 1 — 23 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

4 Specific configurations

4.1 Modifying the LOFA board configuration
As an example, for LOFA1120_T : 1. Display the board view 2. Choose Board Modify equipment configuration ... menu option. 3. Enter the location of the LOFA1120_R 4. Click OK
5.

Launch Configuration Transmission Update menu option to take into account this modification

2 — 1 — 24

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

By default, the LOFA board is declared as a bidirectional amplifier :
• •

Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port

An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA for which the first stage output has been cabled with the second stage input. To use 2 LOFA boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, the contradirectionality between the 2 boards must be set. Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a link between 2 unidirectional ampifiers to build a bidirectional set. CAUTION : Before configuring bidirectionality from 2 unidirectional LOFA, the connectors have been set in service and the cabling has been activated. For the LOFA 11yz_T, the contradirectional board is the LOFA11yz_R.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 24

4 Specific configurations

4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration
As an example, for TRBD1191 :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option.

Modify specific equipment configuration...

3.

Select the required values and then click OK

2 — 1 — 25

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

TRBDx specific configuration parameters Parameters Description Possible values Not used - The configuration plans that no link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection

UDC_CONFIG - Configuration of User Data Channel. - A 2.048 kbit/s link may be plugged into the User data Channel faceplate connection.

RPO_MODE

SBS_SUPPR

Receiver Parameter Optimization Mode Automatic - It enables to clearly determines if the - The optimization is based on the FEC optical signal corresponds to digital value 0 Factory or 1. - The optimization is based on a manufacturer mechanism Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled Scattering. - A mechanism to compensate for vibrations Disabled inside the fiber.

Add/drop to front panel - The configuration plans that a link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection

Force_LOSS

-A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send Activated a LOSS indication to the remote Network Element. Un-activated -When Force_LOSS is Activated, the receiver interface is disabled

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 25

4 Specific configurations

4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration [cont.]
As an example, for TRBD4612 :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option.

Modify specific equipment configuration...

3.

Select the required values and then click OK

2 — 1 — 26

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

TRBDx specific configuration parameters Parameters Force_LOSS Description Possible values

TDCM_mode Tunable Dispersion Compensator Module Mode

-A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send Activated a LOSS indication to the remote Network Element. Un-activated -When Force_LOSS is Activated, the receiver interface is disabled

Manual - Chromatic dispersion tuning must be done manually via Board -> Optical Power level Configuration menu

Automatic - Chromatic dispersion tuning is performed automatically

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 26

4 Specific configurations

4.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration
For a 2xGBE_FC board :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option.
3.

Modify specific equipment configuration...

Select the type of client (1GBE LAN or FIBRE CHANNEL) Click OK

2 — 1 — 27

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 27

4 Specific configurations

4.4 Modifying the OSCU board configuration
For an OSCU board :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option.

Modify specific equipment configuration...

3.

Select the required value and then click OK

2 — 1 — 28

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Parameter Description Possible values • Local Clock This value defines the reference OSCU board for synchronization. • Receive Signal Clock This value defines the OSCU board which synchronizes with the reference board.

OSC Clock OSCU board supports channel supervision. Synchroniza When several nodes have OSCU boards, you tion need to decide which OSCU board will be the reference and which OSCU board will have to synchronize with the reference one.

Clock_Synchro shall be automatically set in LOCAL as a default configuration if LINE_TYPE=OTHERS. Clock_Synchro parameter of a supervision board shall be automatically set in RECIEVE if LINE_TYPE is REPEATER. If Line_type is REPEATER, clock_synchro is forced in "receive", D4-D12 and K2 bytes received on one port are forwarded to the other; If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "local", no byte received on one port can be forwarded to the other port; If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "receive", if D4-D12 are not dropped to ESCT, these bytes received on one port are forwarded to the other, but K2 is not forwarded. In a supervision board holding two ports, LINE_TYPE parameter shall be automatically set to "REPEATER" when the board is installed in a REPEATER, by operator at board provisioning. Else it is set to "OTHERS". LINE_TYPE parameter is set to "OTHERS" in a supervision board with only one port.
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 28

4 Specific configurations

4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters
For a WMAN1100 board : 1. Display the board view 2. Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration... menu option. 3. Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the list 4. Click OK.

2 — 1 — 29

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters Parameters Description

Background Control Background control process of the output power. When • Enabled Process enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines • Disabled if the output power is kept. Correction Process Board Output WDM Line Stability Control Period Input Channel Threshold Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts • Enabled the attenuation when discrepancies exist between • Disabled requested and measured attenuation values. According to the selected value, determines if the board provides optical output or not

Possible values

Determines the acceptable power variations of the optical line

• No optical output • Optical output

Periodicity of background control process execution The minimum power value to consider that there is a channel at the input port

+0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB step Default : 0.5 dB +30 to +600 sec., 10 sec. Step, Default : 60 sec. -26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step Default : -22 dBm

Blocking Threshold

The value which determines when a channel is blocked +30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB step Default : +40 dBm

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 29

4 Specific configurations

4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters [cont.]
WMAN1100 boards in a given shelf are configured in “Contradir” mode :

0 1 0 N 1 # 0 3 A W Mo ard b

0 1 0 N 1 # 1 6 A W Mo ard b

2 — 1 — 30

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 30

4 Specific configurations

4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration
For a WMAN3x74 board :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option. list

Modify specific equipment configuration...

3.

Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the Click OK.

4.

2 — 1 — 31

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 31

4 Specific configurations

4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration [cont.]

2 — 1 — 32

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

WMAN3x74 Provisioning Parameters Parameters Description

Background Control Background control process of the output power. When • Enabled Process enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines • Disabled if the output power is kept. Correction Process Board Output WDM Line Stability Control Period Input Channel Threshold Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts • Enabled the attenuation when discrepancies exist between • Disabled requested and measured attenuation values. According to the selected value, determines if the board provides optical output or not

Possible values

No optical output +0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB step Default : 0.5 dB +30 to +600 sec., 10 sec. Step, Default : 60 sec. -22 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step Default : -22 dBm

Determines the acceptable power variations of the optical line

Periodicity of background control process execution The minimum power value to consider that there is a channel at the input port The maximum power value which determines a channel blocking

Blocking Level

Control / Correction The flag which determines : Type • if the channel power is kept at the output of the Wavelength Selective Switch • if the channel attenuation is kept in the WSS Power Maintain Threshold

-30 to –50 dBm, 1 dB step Default : -30 dBm • Power • Attenuation Default : Attenuation

Define the maximum channel output power variation +1 to +10 dB, 1 dB step to be compensated by the background control process Default : +3 dB
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 32

4 Specific configurations

4.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port Profile
For a TDMX1180 board :
1. 2.

Display the board view Choose Board

menu option.

Modify specific equipment configuration...

3.

relevant value Click OK.

For WDM line stability and Blocking level parameters, select the

4.

2 — 1 — 33

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

TDMX1180 Port Profile Parameters Parameters WDM Line Stability Blocking Level Description Possible values

Determines the acceptable power variations 0.1 to 1 dB of the optical line. The maximum power value which determines a channel blocking -50 to -30 dBm

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 33

Notes Page
Switch to notes view!

2 — 1 — 34

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 34

5 Protection provisioning

2 — 1 — 35

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 35

5 Protection provisioning

5.1 OSNCP Protection management process
To activate the protection, operate as follow :
1.

Install transponders and OCPU board according to the recommended locations Declare the OCPU2104 and TRBx boards transponders

2. 3.

Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare Set in service the connectors

4. 5. 6.

Declare the cabling configuration Update the Transmission view

2 — 1 — 36

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

- The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure.
-

More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training documentation.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 36

5 Protection provisioning

5.2 OSNCP Protection provisioning rules
Main and Spare 10G transponders must be inserted in adjacent slots In a shelf, three possible configurations allowed :
Main in odd slot, Spare in even slot See following slides for examples

6 1+1 protection schemes for TRBD using 3 OCPU2104 4 1+1 protection schemes for TRBC using 8 OCPU2104 2 1+1 protection for TRBC and TRBD using 5 OCPU2104 (mixing) Max 2 protected 40G TRBD or TRBC per shelf. See following slides for example

Main and Spare 40G transponders must be inserted in fixed slots

2 — 1 — 37

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 37

5 Protection provisioning

5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples

Single transponder type in the master shelf 2 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD

Single transponder type in a secondary shelf 4 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD

2 — 1 — 38

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

For OSNCP configuration, the relative positions of TRBD/TRBC and OCPU2104 are fixed:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 38

5 Protection provisioning

5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]

Single transponder type in the secondary shelf 4 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBC

2 1+1 protection schemes for 10G TRBD & TRBC
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Mixed transponder type in a secondary shelf

2 — 1 — 39

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

For OSNCP configuration, the relative positions of TRBD/TRBC and OCPU2104 are fixed:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 39

5 Protection provisioning

5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]

Single transponder type in the secondary shelf 4 1+1 protection schemes for 40G TRBD/TRBC

2 — 1 — 40

NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

For OSNCP configuration, the relative positions of TRBD/TRBC and OCPU2104 are fixed:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 40

5. PSCU3000 board must be placed in slot 39.5 Protection provisioning 5. Declare the cabling configuration Update the Transmission view 2 — 1 — 41 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure. operate as follow : 1. Declare the OCPU2100 boards amplifiers 2.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 41 .4 OMSP Protection management process To activate the protection.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . 3. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 6. - More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training documentation. Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare Set in service the connectors 4. Install LOFA11yz and OCPU2100 boards anywhere (from slot 3 to 18) in the shelf where the OSCU1010 board is present.

5 OMSP Protection provisioning example 21 22 39 40 Long Haul Line Terminal MASTER shelf 2 — 1 — 42 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance OMSP Protection for LH Line Terminal (functional architecture): All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Protection provisioning 5.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 42 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 43 .Exercise 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 – – – – – – – – Make a backup of your NE database Clear the ESCT2000 database Align the MIB according to the hardware configuration Set in service the connectors Declare the internal optical cabling Update the Transmission view Configure the specific board parameters Restore and activate your backup Time allowed : _____ minutes 2 — 1 — 43 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 1 — 44 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 44 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 45 .Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 2 — 1 — 45 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11708AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 1 — Page 46 .End of Module Subrack and Board Declaration 2 — 1 — 46 NE Operation — Subrack and Board Declaration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 NE Operation 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Module 2 Optical Channel Configuration 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 1 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 2—2—2 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 3 . you should be able to: Configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons 2—2—3 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 2—2—4 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 4 .

4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration 8.1 Line State overview_ Reminder 6.1 Introduction 5.1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder 4.3 Line State management diagram 7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition” 9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder 4.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side 8.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview Page 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 35 36 37 39 40 42 44 47 48 49 51 54 55 57 58 59 60 62 63 64 65 66 67 69 70 71 74 75 76 77 78 83 84 85 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2—2—5 NE Operation — OpticalState management 6 Line Channel Configuration Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 OSNCP protection management 1.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 4.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel 9.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections 2.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder 7.1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview 9.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel 9.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 7.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel 9.8 Output power level management on transponder 8.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 7.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder 10.2 Modifying the protected channels 1.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface 3.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection 5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 5 .3 Sending a protection command 2 OMSP protection management 2.5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 4.1 Introduction 8.1 Displaying the protected channels 1.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration 8.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel 9.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) 4.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface 4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4.2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder 8.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration mode 4.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface 3.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 8.2 Line State Graphical User Interface 6.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder 8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.1 Introduction 7.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection 4.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ Reminder 8.2 Sending a protection command 3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 3.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface 3.0A — Operation and 6.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel 9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel 10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.

6 RS TTI management concept 11.0A — Operation and Maintenance Page 86 90 91 93 94 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 107 109 110 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Creating a remote loopback 13.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration 13 Loopbacks management 13.] Switch to notes view! 10.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept 11.2 OTS TTI trace configuration 11.7 Case study 11 Trail Trace Identifier management 11.Table of Contents [cont.3 Graphical User Interface description 10.1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD 13.4 Creating a local loopback 13.2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD 13.6 Displaying the existing loopbacks 13.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards 13.1 OTS TTI trace management concept 11.5 OTU TTI trace configuration 11.6 Global settings management 10.5 Selected settings management 10.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 6 .8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC 12 OCH configuration 12.4 Single channel configuration 10.4 ODU TTI trace configuration 11.7 Deleting a loopback All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2—2—6 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC 11.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 7 .1 OSNCP protection management 2—2—7 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Auto P: Protecting path active. Dir. Input column gives the signal source (Main Transponder).1 Displaying the protected channels 1. no alarm. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The possible values are: Normal I: Main path active. bi: bidirectional Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path. alarm on Main path that caused the switch. Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path. Auto I : Main path active. Normal P: Protecting path active. Choose the Configuration option Click on Search Cross Connection Management menu Existing protected channels appear 2—2—8 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. column gives the Direction-related connection type: uni: unidirectional. empty: not activated.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 8 . Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare Transponder). the protection is disabled. no alarm. State column gives the cross connection state: A: activated. State column gives the protection state.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OSNCP: Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection The meaning of each column is: Prot. no alarm.1 OSNCP protection management 1. Output column gives the port destination (OCPU2104). alarm on Protecting path.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 9 . Tick or untick before “Revertive” to get a revetive or non revertve protection 2—2—9 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. i. 0 to 10000ms): A delay that prevents an autonomous switch of a protected channel to the protecting path for the configured time following identification that an autonomous protection switch is required. 3. where the transport and selection of the normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests are terminated. 0 to 60000s): A period of time that must elapse before a transport entity that has recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or Signal Degrade (SD) condition can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from.. when the working transport entity has recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared. Hold Off Time (HOT.1 OSNCP protection management 1.2 Modifying the protected channels 1.e. A revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the normal traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport entity if the switch requests are terminated. Choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management menu Select a protected crossconnection Click on Modify 2. Wait to Restore Time (WTR.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Protection characteristic: A non revertive protection refers to a mechanism.

Before sending another command on a given channel. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. if pluggable module of working transponder is withdrawn.3 Sending a protection command 1. 2. protection works but the protection status indicated is Normal P instead of Auto P.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following commands are available: Force Switch Lock Out Release Force Switch Release Lock Out When one of two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I" state: the automatic switching mechanism is inhibited.. Choose a Protection command by clicking on the appropriate toggle button Remark: toggle button greyed when command impossible Click OK to send command to NE 2 — 2 — 10 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. When two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) are declared in "protection configuration"..0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 10 . the current command must be “released”. Check the protect path alarms before doing a “Force switch” command.1 OSNCP protection management 1. Choose the Configuration option Cross Connection Management menu Select the connection to send the command to and click on Protect.

Exercise Create an OSNCP configuration Search for the related cross-connection Set a revertive protection (WTR=60s) Practice the “Protection Actions” Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure Observe again the current status with and without OTS line failure Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 11 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 11 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 12 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 12 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 13 .2 OMSP protection management 2 — 2 — 13 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Output column gives the port destination (BMDX1x00). empty: not activated. Choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management… Existing protected multiplex menu option Click on Search sections appear 2 — 2 — 14 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections 1. bi: bidirectional Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path. Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare LOFA11yz_R). Auto P: Protecting path active. no alarm.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 14 . no alarm. State column gives the cross connection state: A: activated. the protection is disabled.2 OMSP protection management 2. column gives the Direction-related connection type: uni: unidirectional. alarm on Main path that caused the switch. no alarm. Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path. Normal P: Protecting path active. The possible values are: Normal I: Main path active. Dir. Input column gives the signal source (Main LOFA11yz_R). State column gives the protection state. Auto I : Main path active.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OMSP: Optical Multiplex Section Protection The meaning of each column is: Prot. alarm on Protecting path.

.. OMSP protection is non revertive in current release.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 15 . 2. Choose a Protection command by clicking on the appropriate toggle button Remark: toggle button greyed when command impossible Click OK to send command to NE 2 — 2 — 15 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following commands are available: Force Switch Lock Out Release Force Switch Release Lock Out When one of two LOFA11yz boards in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I" state: the automatic switching mechanism is inhibited.2 OMSP protection management 2. the current command must be “released”. Choose the Configuration option Cross Connection Management… menu Select the connection to send the command and click on Protect. Check the protecting multiplex section alarms before doing a “Force switch” command. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Before sending another command on a given multiplex section.2 Sending a protection command 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 16 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise Create an OMSP configuration Search for the related cross-connection Practice the “Protection Actions” Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 16 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 2 — 2 — 17 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 17 .

3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 3.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface In case of “front side user access”: To create the cross-connection select Configuration Cross Connection Management… Click Create Choose as: User side XFP Back plane access TRBD1191 Internal structure Line side (Cross Connection Management window appears) Input: relevant port#1-#1-OCHgdc and as Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related transmission view Line module Confirm with OK 2 — 2 — 18 To delete the cross-connection: Select it in the list Click Delete Confirm with OK NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 18 . the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 After the creation step.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 19 .3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 3.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface In case of “front side user access”: To create the cross-connection select Configuration Cross Connection Management… Click Create Choose as: User side XFP Back plane access TRBD1191 Internal structure Line side (Cross Connection Management window appears) Input: relevant port#1-OTUodu2 and as Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2 The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related transmission view Line module Confirm with OK 2 — 2 — 19 To delete the cross-connection: Select it in the list Click Delete Confirm with OK NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NNI interface : Network to Network Interface All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

4].3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 3.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface In case of “back plane access”: To create the cross-connection select Configuration Cross Connection Management… Click Create Choose as: User side TRBD1191 Internal structure Line side (Cross Connection Management window appears) Input: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc and as Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related transmission view Line module Back plane access Back plane access Confirm with OK Line module No XFP module 2 — 2 — 20 To delete the cross-connection: Select it in the list Click Delete Confirm with OK 2 adjacent TRBD1191 [3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 UNI interface : User to Network Interface All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. [17. [7.6].8]. …. [5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 20 .18] NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

[5. [7.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface In case of “back plane access”: To create the cross-connection select Configuration Cross Connection Management… Click Create Choose as: User side TRBD1191 Internal structure Line side (Cross Connection Management window appears) Input: relevant port#101-OTUodu2 and as Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2 The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related transmission view Line module Back plane access Back plane access Confirm with OK Line module No XFP module 2 — 2 — 21 To delete the cross-connection: Select it in the list Click Delete Confirm with OK 2 adjacent TRBD1191 [3. ….0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 21 .6]. the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.8].0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 After the creation step.4]. [17.3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 3.18] NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. signal regeneration Create a cross-connection for 2 adjacent TRBD1191 in order to make Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 22 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Exercise Create a cross-connection for a given TRBD1191 in order to make available the “front side user access”.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 22 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 23 .4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 2 — 2 — 23 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder The board includes two matrix areas: L2 matrix When the board is configured in Concentrator_Auto mode. the related cross-connections are automatically created #1 GE #51 ETHC1000 board User side * #9 GE #59 VLAN tagging L1 matrix The operator can configure the “L1 matrix” in order to: . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. CAUTION : VLAN_ID=51 to 59 are used in Concentrator_Auto mode.use the Front side access with optical cabling related to a relevant transponder.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CAUTION : Only the 10GbE Line port#13 is available in Concentrator_Auto mode.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4. .use the “Back plane” access to connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 without related optical cabling. CAUTION : Up to 9xGbE ports can be used in Concentrator_Auto mode.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 24 . 10GE WAN Line P#13 10GE WAN XFP P#13 Line #1 Front side Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration Matrix 10GE WAN Line P#14 10GE WAN XFP P#14 Line #2 Front side Back plane access 2 — 2 — 24 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

the related cross-connections are manually created #1 GE #xx ETHC1000 board User side * #12 GE #yy VLAN tagging L1 matrix The operator can configure the “L1 matrix” in order to: .use the “Back plane” access to connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 without related optical cabling. . CAUTION : Up to 12xGbE ports can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode. CAUTION : Both 10GbE Line port#13 and port#14 are available in AddDrop_Manual mode.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 25 .2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder The board includes two matrix areas: L2 matrix When the board is configured in AddDrop_Manual mode. 10GE WAN Line P#13 10GE WAN XFP P#13 Line #1 Front side Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration Matrix 10GE WAN Line P#14 10GE WAN XFP P#14 Line #2 Front side Back plane access 2 — 2 — 25 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CAUTION : VLAN_ID=100 to 999 can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode.use the Front side access with optical cabling related to a relevant transponder.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 26 .. Modify the Value of CONF_MODE if needed and click OK Two modes are available (Concentrator_Auto and AddDrop_Manual) 2 — 2 — 26 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Display the board view Choose Board option.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration mode To display or modify the current configuration mode: 1. 2..4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4. Modify specific equipment configuration. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. AddDrop_Manual : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are manually created (up to twelve user ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service. menu 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Concentrator_auto : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are automatically created (up to nine user ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service.

4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4. Open the board view 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The cross-connections are only created for the declared XFP modules on the user side All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 27 . operate as follow: 1.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) To display the existing cross-connections related to a given ETHC1000 board in Concentrator_Auto mode. Choose Board Manage ETHC Cross Connections menu option A Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window 2 — 2 — 27 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4. only L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13) are available. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connections are shown as follow in the Transmission view: 2 — 2 — 28 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection Management” window: In Concentrator_Auto mode.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) [cont.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 28 .

operate as follow: 1) Open the board view 2) Choose Board Manage ETHC Cross Connections menu option A Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window 2 — 2 — 29 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 29 .5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) To display the existing cross-connections related to a given ETHC1000 board in AddDrop_Manual mode.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In AddDrop_Manual mode.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) From the VLAN Cross Connections Management window of a given ETHC1000 board in AddDrop_Manual mode.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 30 . L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13 or User & L14 Ports) and L2 pass-through cross connections (between L13 & L14 Ports) are available. The ETHC1000 L2 pass-through cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection Management” window: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. operate as follow: 1) Set the same VLAN_ID for 2 ports (either User & L13 or User & L14 or L13 & L14) 2) Draw a line between both ports 3) Confirm the cross connection creation by clicking OK VLAN_ID=100 to 999 in AddDrop manual mode 2 — 2 — 30 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4.

From the ETHC1000 board view.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection In case of “front side line access”: To create the L1 cross-connection Cross choose Configuration Connection Management menu option. The Input field is already filled with the name of the port#13-RsTTP selected at the previous step (e. r01sr1sl03/port#13-RsTTP) 4. open the Mother board port 2. Choose Port (Transmission) -> Cross Connection -> Create Cross Connection menu option or click right and choose Cross Connection -> create Cross Connection menu: The Main Cross Connection dialog box appears.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 31 . Continue as described above The ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection is shown as follow in the Transmission view: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 It is also possible to start the creation as follow: 1. Choose as: and as Input: relevant port#x-RsTTP (x=13 or 14) 2. Confirm with OK Output: relevant port#x-OCHrs (x=13 or 14) The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related port view Only port#13-RsTTP and port#13-OCHrs are available in Concentrator_Auto mode 2 — 2 — 31 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Select the port#13-RsTTP block 3.g. then click Create button 1.

5.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 32 . Select in the list the cross connections to remove.4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 4. Choose the Configuration option either in the port view or in the transmission view: The Cross Connection Management dialog box appears Cross Connection Management menu 2. In the confirmation dialog box click OK terminate Back to the Cross Connection Management dialog box. 6. You can select one or more cross connections Click Delete 4. Click Search The existing cross connections appear in the list 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. click Close to 2 — 2 — 32 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 33 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Even if there is no board in the shelf.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for a given ETHC 1000 board in order to make the “front side line access” available.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 33 .Exercise Observe the relation between the existing modules and the related Layer 2 cross-connections for a given ETHC 1000 board. the declarations can be done.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 34 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 34 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 2 — 2 — 35 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 35 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 36 . > The 16 available slots for both boards are divided in 4 groups > Interconnected ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 boards must be adjacent > In this case.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 .5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 5. both cards can be inserted in one of the 8 following possibilities: Group # Slot # ETHC1000 TRBD1191 #1 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X 7 X 8 X #2 #3 #4 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 X X X X X X X X X X All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Introduction ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 can be interconnected via the back plane ETHC1000 board #1 GE #51 User side * #9 GE #59 TRBD1191 Internal structure VLAN tagging •The boards must be inserted in the shelf according to the rule described below 10GE WAN Line P#13 10GE WAN XFP P#13 Line #1 Front side Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration Matrix 10GE WAN Line P#14 10GE WAN XFP P#14 Line #2 Front side Back plane access User side XFP Line side Line module Back plane access 2 — 2 — 36 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.To be able to do this. the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to the following rule: Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front side.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 37 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Cross-connection: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 5. then click Create button 1. Choose as: and as Input: ETHC1000 port#x-RsTTP (x=13 or 14) 2. Confirm with OK Output: TRBD1191 port#101-#1ODU2gdc The cross-connection will be shown in the list and in the related transmission view Only ETHC1000 port#13-RsTTP is available in Concentrator_Auto mode 2 — 2 — 37 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation In case of “interconnection via the back plane”: To create the L1 cross-connection Cross choose Configuration Connection Management menu option.

Time allowed: ____ minutes 2 — 2 — 38 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 38 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for given ETHC 1000 and TRBD1191 boards in order to make the “interconnection via the back plane”.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 At the transponder declaration: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 39 .6 Line State management 2 — 2 — 39 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Operating this way.1 Line State overview_ Reminder “Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below). As an overview. the “Line State” can be described as follow: When “Line State” = ON. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the channel will be directly operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs.6 Line State management 6.0A — Operation and Maintenance At the transponder declaration: It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TROADM is not used. It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TROADM is used. the channel is “in service”: Line laser (WDM side) is ON User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not require a shutdown « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated » Line laser (WDM side) is OFF User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP configuration and states « Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated » All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 When “Line State” = OFF. Operating this way. the channel is “out of service”: 2 — 2 — 40 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are described in the next part of this module.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 40 . the transponder line will be activated or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM configuration type and step.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 41 .] Declaring a transponder board.1 Line State overview _ Reminder [cont. the operator is able to set the « Line State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF » This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only): 2 — 2 — 41 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board: Port #1 O G P I O C H O D U 2 Port #101 O T U O C H O G P I Client Line All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Line State management 6.

The configuration plans that a link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection Force_LOSS -A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send Activated a LOSS indication to the remote Network Element. Un-activated -When Force_LOSS is Activated. Add/drop to front panel .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRBDx specific configuration parameters Parameters Description Possible values Not used . for TRBD1191 : 1.6 Line State management 6.A 2..Configuration of User Data Channel.The optimization is based on the FEC optical signal corresponds to digital value 0 Factory or 1. menu option 3. . RPO_MODE SBS_SUPPR Receiver Parameter Optimization Mode Automatic . .048 kbit/s link may be plugged into the User data Channel faceplate connection. Set Force_LOSS parameter to the required value: Activated or Un-activated 4.2 Line State Graphical User Interface Force_LOSS parameter management: As an example.Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled Scattering.. Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 42 .A mechanism to compensate for vibrations Disabled inside the fiber.The configuration plans that no link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection UDC_CONFIG . Click OK to confirm 2 — 2 — 42 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. .It enables to clearly determines if the . the receiver interface is disabled All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.The optimization is based on a manufacturer mechanism . Display the board view 2.

2.6 Line State management 6. To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side : Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board Select the OGPI block on WDM line side Select Transmission APSD configuration… Set the APSD control parameter at the required value: Disable or Laser Forced Off Click OK to confirm 2 — 2 — 43 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 43 . 3. is obtained when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4. 5.2 Line State Graphical User Interface [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The APSD state below.] 1.

Note 3: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be made through B only in one of the following cases: OR -> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the operator must set first “ APSD control = Disable”. In such a case the transition from C (Off) to A (On) through B is possible.e_ L ( N a c ti OS ot v a S t e te o 2 ) d » Force_LOSS to «Activated» Force LOSS un-activated RX APSD to «Disable» Force LOSS un-activated Force_LOSS to «Un-activated» (Note 3) RX APSD Disabled Laser is On User side Force_LOSS to «Un-activated» Force_LOSS to «Activated» User side D TX Laser current state = Off Force LOSS activated 2 — 2 — 44 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In such a case C state is “ APSD control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1) -> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”.6 Line State management 6. -> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. In such a case. In such a case C state is “ APSD control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1). the following state is equivalent: “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off” and “LASER “ APSD control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” Line side Line side Force LOSS activated All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 RX Line State: Off «out of service» current state = Laser Off” Note 2: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be directly made only in one of the following cases: OR -> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. the APSD configuration is : .3 Line State management diagram Line State: ON User side «in service» APSD Disabled Laser is On User side A TX APSD to «Laser Forced Off» Laser forced Off B TX Line side Line side F « U or c n.0A — Operation and Maintenance RX APSD to «Laser Forced Off» (Note 1) C TX The above OGPI #101 block is the extremity of a given transponder on WDM side (refer to the previous page to see its environment). Note 1: when the transponder has been declared with “Line State = OFF”.After modifications. Then the direct transition from C (Off) to A (On) becomes possible.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 44 . In such a case. Then the transition from C (Off) to A (On) through B becomes possible. the operator must set first “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”.

or made through B. In this case the transponder does not generate any power toward WMAN board to avoid any disturbance of an “Express” configuration Temporary states description: Line States B and D are temporary states which are used during transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) or from C (Off) to A (ON) Direct transition from A (ON) to C (Off) is not possible Transition from C (Off) to A (ON) can be directly made.6 Line State management 6.] Permanent states description: Line States A (ON) and C (Off) can be required for a given TR-OADM configuration: Line State = ON is used when the Transponder is used for « AddDrop » Line State = Off is used when the transponder is not used for « AddDrop ».3 Line State management diagram [cont. depending on the way the TX laser has been set to “Off” on C state (see previous page through B) 2 — 2 — 45 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 45 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 46 . explore the ways to make the transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) and from C (Off) to A (ON).Exercise According to the trainer instructions.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 46 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 2 — 2 — 47 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 47 .

7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.1 Introduction The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices: full tunable transponders and filters (colorless ports) capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on: Each channel may be in any of the following states for the TR-OADM Node : AddDrop Express Blocked WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This architecture provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 48 . but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management. 2 — 2 — 48 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices. On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750 and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the passthrough traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability The WSS. the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes. The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler (OADC0104). The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers (TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels. then several drop paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102. is an N port device with the following functionalities: Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing WDM channels spectrum equalization Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and is reported in the following slide: On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder TR-OADM Rx side OADC1100 1:2 Up to 80λ Up to 80λ Up to 80λ Up to 80λ Up to 80λ OCNC1220 2 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC1300 1:8 Up to 80λ 1 1 LOFA1110 LOFA1110 VOA VOA TDMX1180 x8 2 2 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) TDMX1180 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 — 2 — 49 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7. OADC1100 and OADC1300).0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 49 . which implements the power equalization. Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier. Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 50 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.] LOFA11y0_Unidir ALCT WMAN3174 OADC0104 OSC 2 2 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ ADD Up to 32λ Express TR-OADM Up to 32λ 2 VOA 1 Tx side OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ LOFA1110 LOFA1110 4:1 4:1 4:1 VOA 1 VOA 1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) OADC1300 8:1 Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8 4:1 OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 — 2 — 50 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

WMAN3 provides the following functions: WDM channels Multiplexing Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC ALCT VOA 2 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC WMAN3174 D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) TR-OADM OTS 1 ALCT M D OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 — 2 — 51 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 51 .7 R/TR-OADM (WSS) configuration overview 7. then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC splitter card. WDM channels spectrum equalization This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received by any transponder locally installed. removing the need for sites interventions unless new add/drop transponders are required All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices.

] OCNC1230 1:2 OADC1100 TR-OADM D OADC1300 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) LOFA1110 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 — 2 — 52 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Blocked : the channel is blocked. it can be used also for Degree 2 and 3 applications.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1:8 De-multiplexing part 1 1 VOA LOFA1110 VOA x8 2 2 TDMX1180 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part OCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler . Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states : Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths to/from the aggregate signal for both directions. before TR-OADM Degree 2. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s. it can be kept instead of OCNC1230. it is already know that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 52 .7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7. AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason: . OCNC1240 or OADC1102.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application. it provides the opportunity to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life. AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2. Nevertheless. Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice: OCNC1230. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions. OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM. . In particular when at Degree 3 application installation.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) M : Multiplexing part All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] WMAN3174 TR-OADM Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ M Multiplexing part LOFA1110 2 4:1 LOFA1110 2 VOA VOA To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 1 1 OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1300 8:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 OADC1750 4:1 x8 4:1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) 2 — 2 — 53 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 53 .7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.

Express from OTS23 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2. OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions. AddDrop_3 : the channel from OTS 3 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 3. A Y Node configuration may be used as a connection point in a meshed network. AddDrop_1 and Express from OTS23 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 direction and transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder LOFA11y0 1 OSC OCNC 1230 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OADC 0104 WMAN3174 1 LOFA11y0 VOA 2 OSC VOA 2 D OTS 1 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) ALCT 2 VOA OSC M D ALCT To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) OTS 3 M WMAN3174 1 OADC 0104 2 VOA OCNC 1230 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 1 OSC LOFA11y0 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0 WMAN3174 D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M OCNC 1230 2 LOFA11y0 VOA OSC OADC 0104 ALCT 1 VOA 2 OSC TR-OADM LOFA11y0 1 OTS 2 2 — 2 — 54 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 and OTS 3 directions. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1. AddDrop_3 and Express from OTS12 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 3 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 54 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. AddDrop_2 : the channel from OTS 2 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 2. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80 channels. Express from OTS13 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1. AddDrop_2 and Express from OTS13 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 2 direction and transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 1. Each channel of the TR-OADM Degree 3 (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following states : Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1. Blocked : the channel is blocked. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 3 directions. AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 2 directions.7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7.

Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 55 . The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&ROADM node.7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 7. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node. any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions. such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management. the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir Multi-degree R-OADM : Degree-1 to Degree-4 The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on: WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM. In particular. The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC CMDX 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) Express Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 R-OADM To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) BMDX1000 CMDX 1 BMDX1000 CMDX 12 1 VOA 2 LOFA1110 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 OTS 1 ALCT ADD OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 — 2 — 55 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 56 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 56 .

8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 2 — 2 — 57 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 57 .

Express or Blocked”configurations “TDMX configuration of port” for “Drop” configuration (only for TR-OADM) “APSD Configuration” to manage the WDM line side of the transponders “Specific parameter configuration” to manage “Force_LOSS” parameter of the transponders “Current Instantaneous Measurements” may be useful to manage the WDM line side of the transponders and check WMAN board inputs “ALC & Output power level configuration” for the transponders “Spectrum Acquisition” around WMAN board is strongly suggested The global configuration of R/TR-OADM application is based on “Transitions” between two “wavelength routing” states. Each “Transition type” is spread in “Elementary transitions” and related actions to be performed from the windows mentioned above. The next following pages describe first and briefly these windows and then in details the way to perform each transition type. 2 — 2 — 58 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. available from the « Equipment view »: “Cross Connection Management” for creation and display purpose “Channel Configuration” for WMAN “Add.1 Introduction The Graphical User Interface of the R/TR-OADM is mainly based on the eight following windows.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 58 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

The “Main Cross Connection” window shown below is used for creation purpose.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . an « Express ch. . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.In the « Cross Connection Management » window above.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8. between two OTS lines. is highlighted. choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option Set « Search Criteria » (optional) and the click on Search to display (see below) Click on Create to open « Main Cross Connection » 2 — 2 — 59 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 34» cross-connection.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 59 .2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder To open “Cross Connection Management”.

3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration To open “Channel Configuration” open the related WMAN board view Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option Set the configuration and click on Apply. for a given wavelength and a given Express input port. AND • Background Control Process is Enabled.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8. • The second register (middle) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 2. During operations. For a given wavelength : • The first register (left) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 1. 2 — 2 — 60 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. a memorized attenuation can be restored if required Possible values Power Maintain This parameter makes part of a process which • Enabled guarantees the channel output power if : • Disabled • Power Maintain is Enabled. • The third register (right) stores the attenuation value assigned to Express input port number 3.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 60 . AND • Correction Process is Enabled.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Stored Attenuation Profiles Parameters WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Description Consist in 3 registers which store the current attenuation value assigned to a given Express input port. AND • Control / Correction Type is set to Power All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 It could be useful to duplicate a given configuration. 2 — 2 — 61 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.xml file location on the PC. the operator can “Export” and “Import” a given configuration choosing the following menu options: Export Save as CSV Save as XML Import Load XML File Load CSV File In that case. The . the operator can choose the .] From “Channel Configuration” of WMAN board.xls file below comes from an exported .8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration [cont.csv or .0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 61 . This .csv file.csv file can be open and modified « off line » using « Excel » (see the example below). It has been customized adding the tiles at the top of each column. on several NEs even if they may have to be customized in a second step. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. as a first step.

Transmission All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Each time a new TDMX port is configured. The possible values are from –30 to –50dBm (1dB step). CAUTION : All used connectors must be In Service and the Transmission view must be updated. The possible values are Blocked (the signal is not transmitted to the output of the TDMX1180 board) or One of the 96 possible channels.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8. this port is shown in the board view and the operator can open the related transmission view and get back the configured frequency choosing : Display Channel Frequency menu option.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 62 .4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration To open “TDMX configuration of port” window (only for TR-OADM): Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option 2 — 2 — 62 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The Output Power parameter indicates the output power to be assigned to the selected port.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Channel parameter indicates the signal transmission status to output.

8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 63 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF After the first state modification.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side : Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board Select the “port#101-OGPI” block on WDM line side Select Transmission APSD configuration… 2 — 2 — 63 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the two following states are available: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Un-activated -When Force_LOSS is Activated. . Add/drop to front panel .A mechanism to compensate for vibrations Disabled inside the fiber.The configuration plans that no link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection UDC_CONFIG ..Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled Scattering.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 64 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TRBDx specific configuration parameters Parameters Description Possible values Not used .8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8. Force_LOSS must be modified accordingly.The optimization is based on the FEC optical signal corresponds to digital value 0 Factory or 1. RPO_MODE SBS_SUPPR Receiver Parameter Optimization Mode Automatic . . Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration.Configuration of User Data Channel. Display the board view 2. for TRBD1191 : 1.. menu option. Select the required values and then click OK Performing some transitions.The configuration plans that a link is plugged into the UDC faceplate connection Force_LOSS -A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send Activated a LOSS indication to the remote Network Element.The optimization is based on a manufacturer mechanism . . the receiver interface is disabled All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.It enables to clearly determines if the .A 2.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ Reminder As an example.048 kbit/s link may be plugged into the User data Channel faceplate connection. 2 — 2 — 64 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 3.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Choose Board Current instantaneous measurements menu option 2 — 2 — 65 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements” To display current measurement from a board (such as WMAN3174) : 1. Open the board view 2.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 65 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed. access to the Board view Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows.8 Output power level management on transponder To modify the Output power level of a given a transponder: From Equipment view. During this process the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled. 2 — 2 — 66 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Wait a few seconds for the effective setting of the board.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 66 . Click on Apply.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8. Click on Close to finish.

9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition” 1. only Input #1 is used. .0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 67 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application. From the equipment view operate as follow: Select a WMAN3174 board and open the board view Select the menu Board Spectrum Acquisition … .The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed: •Place the mouse on a given wavelength then the related information is displayed 2 — 2 — 67 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window. 2. LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 Input #1 Output LOFA11y0_Unidir WMA N 3174 OADC0104 1 OSC VOA 2 1 ALC T VOA 2 OSC D M To TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) For more details using Spectrum Acquisition facility. refer to the relevant part of this documentation in “Optical power tuning”.8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 8.In this particular case.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 68 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 68 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 2 — 2 — 69 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 69 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 70 .1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview From \ To Blocked channel Blocked channel T1 • Create AddDrop cross-connection AddDrop channel T2 • Create Express crossconnection Express channel T3 • Delete AddDrop AddDrop channel cross-connection T4 • Delete AddDrop crossconnection • Create Express crossconnection T5 • Delete Express Express channel cross-connection T6 • Delete express cross-connection • Create AddDrop cross-connection 2 — 2 — 70 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Each transition type is described with more details in the following pages.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CAUTION: Respect the configuration order. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Input: relevant port#1. then click Create button 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK. same channel frequency. OGPIoch TP present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS For ROADM.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 71 .2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel 1. channel frequency. OGPIoch TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS Create an AddDrop cross-connection 2 — 2 — 71 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. same channel frequency. OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the relevant OTS Output: For TR-OADM. relevant port#1 to 8. relevant port#101 to 108.

2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont. 3. 2 — 2 — 72 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 4. 2.] 1. To verify the channel is dropped only for TR-OADM (optional) Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option Verify if the channel frequency to drop is assigned to the relevant port number Click on Cancel to close the window.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 72 .9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Modify the TRBX frequency to the expected one 5.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont. 2. Perform “Configuration 4. 5. To verify the channel is added (optional) Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board Select the port#101-OGPI block on WDM line side Select Transmission APSD configuration … Verify if APSD is set to Disable and the laser is ON. Set the related TRBX ports to IS (In service) 7. 4. 2 — 2 — 73 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Choose Board Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option 8.] 1. Perform “Configuration Manual reconfiguration to tune the TRBX channel frequency: Transmission Update” 6. Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Un-activated”. Remove the existing cabling declaration between the TRBX and the TMDX boards 2.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 73 . 6. Declare the cabling between the TRBX and the TMDX boards Transmission Update” All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1. Set the related TRBX ports to OOS (Out Of service) 3. 3. Display the WMAN3x74 board view 7. Check the ADDj (j=1 to 4) or INi (i=1 to 3) position for the channel.

Click on Apply. 2 — 2 — 74 To verify the channel is unblocked (optional) On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards. channel frequency. 2. same channel frequency.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 74 . OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS Output: relevant port#1. 4. 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. then click Create button 2. Input: relevant port#1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. display the board view Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option Select the Express i (i=1 to 3) position for the channel. OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS Create an Express cross-connection 1. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK.

Delete the AddDrop cross-connection To verify the channel is blocked (optional) 6. then click Search button 2. 2 — 2 — 75 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board Select the OGPI block on WDM line side Select Transmission APSD configuration… Verify APSD is set to Disable and the laser is OFF Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Activated”. Display the WMAN3x74 board view 7. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete. Choose Board Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option 8. 4. 3. Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view only for TR-OADM 10.Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option 11. 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 5.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel 1. 1. then click Delete button.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9.Verify the relevant Port is Blocked. 9. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 75 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2) Create an Express cross-connection All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. Input: relevant port#1. OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS The channel could be checked is unblocked (see Transition #2) 2 — 2 — 76 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. same channel frequency. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. The channel could be checked is blocked (see Transition #3) 1) Delete the AddDrop cross-connection 1. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. channel frequency. OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS Output: relevant port#1. then click Delete button.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel 1. then click Search button 2. OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102. then click Create button 2. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 76 .

Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. display the board view 2. 1. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel 1. then click Delete button. then click Search button 2. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel. Select the Express cross-connection to delete.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 77 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Delete the Express cross-connection To verify the channel is blocked (optional) 2 — 2 — 77 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option 3.

Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option. then click Delete button.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel 1. display the board view 2. Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 78 .9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. 1. 1) Delete the Express cross-connection To verify the channel is blocked (optional) 2 — 2 — 78 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. then click Search button 2. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards. Select the Express cross-connection to delete.

OMSoch TP present in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS Output: For TR-OADM. same channel frequency.] 1. relevant port#101 to 108. OGPIoch TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS 2) Create an AddDrop cross-connection The channel could be checked is added and dropped (see Transition #1) 2 — 2 — 79 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 79 . OGPIoch TP present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS For ROADM. relevant port#1 to 8.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel [cont. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Input: relevant port#1. then click Create button 2. same channel frequency.9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 9. channel frequency.

following the instructions given by the trainer Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 80 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. following the instructions given by the trainer channel.Exercise 1 Prerequisite : a TR-OADM Degree 2 or 3 is needed for this exercise T1 Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an AddDrop channel. following the instructions given by the trainer channel.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 T3 Perform a manual transition from an AddDrop channel to a Blocked T2 Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an Express T5 Perform a manual transition from an Express channel to a Blocked All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 80 . following the instructions given by the trainer channel.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 81 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note : Ax : Analyser at the User Tx of the TRBx Px : Power meter at the WDM Tx of the TRBx Sx : Optical Spectrum Analyser at the WMAN3 output All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise 2 TR-OADM Degree 3 test configuration is presented here : 2 — 2 — 81 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Exercise 2 [cont.] Checks to be performed for a Blocked channel : Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line Px : no power Sx : no lambda Checks to be performed for an AddDrop channel : Ax : error free transmission Px : power Sx : no lambda Checks to be performed for an Express channel : Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line Px : no power Sx : lambda Time allowed: 2 — 2 — 82 _____ minutes NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 82 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 83 .10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 2 — 2 — 83 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

For each wavelength to be added in the ROADM .0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 84 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder ROADM WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 Band 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC OADC1102 BMDX1x00 OADC1102 BMDX1x00 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 CMDX 12 2 OSC VOA 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Band 12 WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 — 2 — 84 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is present). One part continues through WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths). In a given band. the other part being dropped to BMDX1000.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module.via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be blocked in WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct” wavelengths are coupled via OADC1102. The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10. some channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.

AddDrop1. For each channel set in « Express » the attenuation can be tuned. 2 — 2 — 85 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the traffic routing can be configured.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview There is one common Graphical User Interface for the WMAN1100 boards: For each channel. The transponder state (WDM side) is automatically managed. The relevant cross-connections are automatically created as soon as WMAN1100 board(s) configuration is done. AddDrop2 or AddDropp12. The routing configuration possibilities for each channel are the following: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Express.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 85 .10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Blocked.

the operator can use also : Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details. “Spectrum Acquisition” facility. All supported 96 channels (in 50Ghz grid) are spread over 4 columns and 24 rows in R-OADM Overview window.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 86 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This facility has been briefly described for TR-OADM application in the related previous part.3 Graphical User Interface description The ROADM Graphical User Interface is mainly spread over 2 windows: 1 « R-OADM overview » description: Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration option to open it: 1-1 Current channel configuration state overview It is spread in 3 parts: « R-OADM overview » and « Cross Connection management » ROadm menu 2 — 2 — 86 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In addition to R-OADM Overview and Cross Connection management. An application for R-OADM will be described briefly in the next following pages.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.

shelf and slot #.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 87 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In order to know which OTS line is considered as “1” and “2”. SEL BLOCKED. AddDrop1).g. SEL AddDrop1. Then a bullet will appear showing the corresponding board (LOFA) and related rack. ALL AddDrop1. the operator has to place the mouse on the State value (e.3 Graphical User interface description [cont.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10. Global Settings can be used to manage the attenuation values or so set the following configurations: ALL EXPRESS. ALL BLOCKED.] 1-2 Individual channel state: “R-OADM Configuration” To get this window click on a given channel # area (green cell) 1-3 Global and Selected Settings 2 — 2 — 87 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SEL AddDrop2 or SEL AddDrop1&2 Selected settings can be used to set in one shot several selected channels in the following state: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. ALL AddDrop2 or ALL AddDrop1&2 SEL EXPRESS.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10. click Search button to display: In the above screen shot.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 88 .3 Graphical User interface description [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance .The corresponding WMAN 1100 boards is shown below: The common features of window have been previously described.] 2 « Cross Connection Management » description: Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option to open it. Then. 5 cross connections are related to the ROADM 3 « Express » and 2 « AddDrop » cross-connections All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2 — 2 — 88 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following channels are present at the input: [26/24]. [30/26].5 As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page). [46/34] and 61/41. Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details. [32/27]. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 89 .] From the equipment view operate as follow to make a “Spectrum Acquisition”: From a WMAN 1100 board view. [45/33. [36/29].3 Graphical User interface description [cont. select Board WMAN 1100 Input Spectrum Acquisition WMAN 1100 Output 2 — 2 — 89 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. it is therefore the only one present at the output.5].

10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10. At the bottom of R-OADM Overview click Apply to validate the configuration 2 — 2 — 90 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. From Equipment view. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line 1 AND the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line2 toward client line. . Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line2 Blocked The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line1 toward client line. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. . 3.After step 4 the information in the cells related to the configured channel is shown in italic until Apply is launched. The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line1 toward client line. 4. operate as follow: Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration ROadm menu option From R-OADM Overview window click on the channel cell (green area) In R-OADM Configuration window choose the required State Click Ok to confirm this setting.Reminder: place the mouse on the State value to know the OTS line corresponding to “1” & or “2” .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Frequency State Values Description AddDrop1 AddDrop2 AddDrop12 Express The channel goes through the ROADM node.4 Single channel configuration 1. 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 90 . 2. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line1 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from WDM line2 toward client line. There is no transmission whatever the frequency state is.More than one channel can be modified before the validation is launched using Apply. Then the channel and a new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line2 The channel is blocked.

Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration ROadm menu option 2. operate as follow to set several channels in «Express»: 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. From the relevant pop down menu choose SEL Express option 3.5 Selected settings management This facility allows the common configuration of several pre-selected channels in one shot. As an example. Eventually modify the attenuation (see next page for more information) 5. Validate the setting with Apply 2 — 2 — 91 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Select the channels to be configured (green cells become white and information in italic) 4.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 91 .from Equipment view.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.

It can be done step by step from the current value Confirm the setting with this button Case A Chosse the new attenuation Modify the setting step by step with this button Case B Chosse the step size 2 — 2 — 92 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The attenuation must be set separately for each direction.It can be done from the current value directly to another one.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 92 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Selected settings management [cont.] There are 2 ways to modify the attenuation in case of «Express» setting: A . quite different B .

As an example. Validate the setting with Apply 2 — 2 — 93 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.6 Global settings management This facility allows the common configuration of several or all channels in one shot. Modify the attenuation as previously described 5. From the relevant pop down menu choose ALL Express option 3. All the “Express” channels are automatically selected (green cells become white and information in italic) 4. operate as follow to modify the attenuation of all channels which are already in «Express» configuration: 1. Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration ROadm menu option 2.from Equipment view.10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 93 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The attenuation cannot be modified when setting all channels in « Blocked » state.

10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 10.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Here after the R-OADM Overview window configuration and the related cross-connections: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 Case study This ROADM application is spread over two subracks: Subrack #1 Subrack #2 CMDX #2 2 — 2 — 94 OADC1102 #31 OADC1102 #35 CMDX #19 WMAN1100 #3 WMAN1100 #16 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 94 .

explore the ways to manage the ROADM with WB configurations. compare the “R-OADM Overview” and the corresponding cross-connections.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. For each configuration. Verify that the lambda routing is properly made (according to trainer instructions) using “Spectrum Acquisition” facility. Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 95 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Exercise According to the trainer instructions.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 95 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 96 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 96 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 97 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.11 Trail Trace Identifier management 2 — 2 — 97 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 OTS TTI trace management concept The OTS TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the 2Mb/s supervision frame.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 98 . the received OTS TTI is compared with the expected one.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OTS TTI is supported by the OT1 byte in 2Mb/s supervision frame. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised. At the sink of the OTS physical connection. The OTS TTI includes the following parts: SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes) DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes) A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use (no check on this part) 2 — 2 — 98 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. It is inserted at the source of an OTS physical connection for transmission.

Select the port#1-OTS block in the Transmission view 2. Set the Expected and/or Sent configurations 4. Choose Transmission Trail trace management on TP menu option 3.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 99 .2 OTS TTI trace configuration To configure the OTS TTI trace: 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Confirm with related OK buttons 2 — 2 — 99 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept The ODU or OTU TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the G. It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission. TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2 — 2 — 100 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.709 frames. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. TRBC1111.709 frame. the received ODU or OTU TTI is compared with the expected one. The ODU or OTU TTI includes the following parts: SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes) DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes) A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use (no check on this part) ODU TTI is supported by the following boards: TRBD11y1 and TRBC1111 OTU TTI is supported by the following boards: TRBD11y1. At the sink of a trail.0A — Operation and Maintenance The OTU TTI is supported by one byte in a multi-frame concept over 64 G.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 100 .

4 ODU TTI trace configuration To configure the ODU TTI trace: 1. Choose Transmission Trail trace management on TP menu option 3. Confirm with related OK buttons 2 — 2 — 101 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. Select the port#101-ODU2 block in the Transmission view 2. Set the Expected and/or Sent configurations 4.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 101 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 102 . Select the port#101-OTU block in the Transmission view 2. Choose Transmission Trail trace management on TP menu option 3.5 OTU TTI trace configuration To configure the OTU TTI trace: 1. Set the Expected and/or Sent configurations 4.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Confirm with related OK buttons 2 — 2 — 102 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

ETHC1000. In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. TRBD11y1. TRBC1111. the received RS TTI is compared with the expected one.6 RS TTI management concept The RS TTI is a connectivity control entity carried by J0 byte in RSOH of an SDH frame. 2 cases have to be considered: An SDH equipment creates the trace: in this case. 1626 LM monitors the trace 1626 LM boards create and monitor the trace 2xGBE_FC.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 103 . TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12 RS-TTI is supported by the following boards: 2 — 2 — 103 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 RS TTI : Regenerator Section Trail Trace Identifier TIM : Trace Identifier Mismatch “Mode 1” is based on a multi-frame concept (one byte per frame). There are 2 working modes: “Mode 1” : J0 transports a given string (15 characters) “One Repeat Byte” When 1626 LM is inserted in a network. It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission. At the sink of a trail.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2 — 2 — 104 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. operate as follow: Open the board view then open the port#6 Transmission view Select the Port#6-RsTTP block then choose Transmission Path Trace Configuration menu option 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The JO configuration for ETHC1000 is not shown in this manual (same way to configure). The JO configuration window will appear.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC To configure the RS TTI trace management on 2xGBE_FC board.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 104 . 2.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11.

11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. Select the required mode Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte Calculate the CRC7 Confirm the configuration with OK 2 — 2 — 105 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 3. 4.] TX side configuration : 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 105 .7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont. 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CRC7: Cyclic Redundancy Check 7 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Disabled / Enabled Select the required mode Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte Calculate the CRC7 Confirm the configuration with OK All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2 — 2 — 106 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] “Expected” configuration on RX side: 1.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont. 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance When the configuration is done on both sides. 2. 3.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 106 . 4. Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. check the received J0 trace and related TIM alarm if any.11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11.

11 Trace Trail Identifier management 11. 5. 2 — 2 — 107 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 You can create a TM on transmission blocks on … to monitor JO trace on … layer Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1) Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12) Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU1 (TRBC1111) Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBC4x12) SDH-RS SDH-RS SDH-RS SDH-RS All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. select the relevant TP (see below) Choose Transmission Trail Monitor Create menu option Select the TM block then Transmission Path Trace Configuration menu option Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. Disabled / Enabled Set the expected trace Confirm with OK 1.8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC From the Transmission view of the TRBD or TRBC board. 2. 4. 3.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 107 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 108 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 108 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

12 OCH configuration 2 — 2 — 109 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 109 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 110 .The FEC must be “Enabled” to get any LTCER alarm. From the Low Threshold Set list box. untick or tick before Fec Enabled BER threshold configuration A « F » disappears or appears 1. select the required value 4. select the port#101-OCH block 2. Click OK 2 — 2 — 110 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The operator can configure the following threshold values : from 10-3 to 10-8 (UNI) or from 10-4 to 10-8 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. From the Transmission view of TRBD or TRBC.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration FEC configuration 1. select the port#101-OCH block 2. . From the Transmission view of TRBD or TRBC.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error Rate (NNI). From the Transmission menu.12 OCH configuration 12. Choose Transmission BER threshold configuration… menu option 3. .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 111 .Exercise Set and observe the OTS trace configuration for a given an OTS physical connection Set and observe the J0 trace configuration for a given transponder Set and observe the OTU2 trace configuration for a given transponder For a given transponder: De-activate and activate the FEC Modify and restore the LCTER configuration Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 111 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 2 — 112 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 112 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

13 Loopbacks management 2 — 2 — 113 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 113 .

The result of the loopback is shown on the external test device. The “Local loopback” is also called “B&W line loop & continue”. Local loopback is not supported by TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the transmission path with the help of an external test device. The received client signal on the B&W interface is copied and sent back through the B&W emitter. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. .1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD TRBC TRBD 2 — 2 — 114 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The external test device is used to compare the outgoing and returning signals. This signal is also transmitted to the WDM emitter.13 Loopbacks management 13.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 114 .

It is also transmitted to the User emitter.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 115 .2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD TRBD 2 — 2 — 115 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Remote loopback configuration cannot be applied on two TRBD/TRBC boards with the same channel. This problem can be encountered in an OADM configuration.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The “Remote loopback” is also called “WDM line loop & continue”.13 Loopbacks management 13. It is not possible to configure a local and a Remote loopback in the same time on the same transponder. The behavior is exactly the same for TRBC. The received signal on the WDM interface is copied and sent back through the WDM emitter. Moreover.

0A — Operation and Maintenance Remote (Line) Loopback All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards n Local (User) Loopback n 2 — 2 — 116 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.13 Loopbacks management 13.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 116 .

select the board (TRBD11y1. 5. Click on OK twice to create the Loopback All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2 — 2 — 117 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. x=1 to 4 for TRBC1111. In Equipment view. 2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000) Access to the Transmission view Select the Port#x-OGPI block (User side) x=1 for TRBD11y1.0A — Operation and Maintenance It’s possible to create Line Loopback with either the choice Loop and Continue or Loop and Cut depending on the selected Termination Point. 3.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 117 .13 Loopbacks management 13. x=1 to 12 for ETHC1000 Choose the Transmission Configuration… menu option The OGPI Termination Point is already defined Port Loopback 2. x=1 to 2 for 2XGBE_FC. 4.4 Creating a local loopback 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. TRBC1111.

4. Port Loopback Configuration 5. TRBD4x12. In Equipment view. 3. 2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000) Access to the Transmission view Select the Port#x-OGPI block (WDM side) x=101 for TRBD/TRBC.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 118 . 6. x=6 for 2xGBE_FC and x=13 for ETHC1000 Choose the Transmission menu option Click on OK Click on OK to create the Loopback All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 2.13 Loopbacks management 13.5 Creating a remote loopback 1. 2 — 2 — 118 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. TRBC4x12. select the board (TRBD11y1.TRBC1111.

6 Displaying the existing loopbacks 1. choose Configuration Loopback Management menu option The Signal Loopback Management window appears Click on Close to close the dialog box 2.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 119 . 2 — 2 — 119 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.13 Loopbacks management 13. In Equipment view.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

13 Loopbacks management 13.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 120 .7 Deleting a loopback Select the loopback(s) you want to delete Click on Delete Click on Close 2 — 2 — 120 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise Connect a SDH tester on one Transponder Check on tester that traffic is good Loop the Line interface with an appropriate attenuation Configure a local Loopback on the Transponder Open the physical loop on Line interface Check there is no error on the tester Delete the Loopback and check traffic is disrupted Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 2 — 121 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 121 .

The traces can be managed as follow: FEC and BER threshold can be managed on the OCH block 2 — 2 — 122 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Summary In addition to board. it is possible to manage it separately. related cross-connections and transponders states are automatically managed. Lockout or Release the protection state OTS-TTI. Nevertheless. modules and optical cables declaration.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 122 . both WMAN1 boards. ODU-TTI. OTU-TTI and RS-TTI are supported Loopbacks can be set on user side (Local) or on Line side (Remote) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. a set of boards must be configured accordingly and related cross-connections may have to be created or removed. Setting the ROADM (WB based) configuration. The R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration is based on “Transitions”. some cross-connections must be created: Optical channel protection (OSNCP and OMSP): In TRBD1191 and in ETHC1000 boards Warning : do not forget Configuration Transmission Update Line state management is included in TR-OADM transitions. To perform a transition.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The related cross-connections are automatically created The operator can : Force Switch.

Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 2 — 2 — 123 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 123 .

0 Section 2 — Module 2 — Page 124 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11709AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module Optical Channel Configuration 2 — 2 — 124 NE Operation — Optical Channel Configuration 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 2 NE Operation Module 3 Optical Power Tuning 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 1 .0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.Blank Page 2—3—2 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 2 .

you should be able to: Monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for maintenance reasons 2—3—3 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 3 .

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 4 .Module Objectives [cont.] 2—3—4 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box 3.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application Page 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode 3.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode 2.1 Setting the WMAN output power 5.3 Measurement from Equipment menu 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Current instantaneous measurements 1.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode 3.0A — Operation 5 WMAN output power setting 5.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder) 6.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode 2.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 5 .3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode 3.1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction 3.3 Getting started 6.4 Measurement from Board Menu 2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.9 Setting the VOA attenuation 3.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 4 Transponder output power settingRights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All 2—3—5 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 4.10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 3.2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation 5.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints 3.1 Monitoring points for transmission path 1.2 Monitoring points for reception path 1.1 Setting the and Maintenance transponder output power 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints 3.5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board 3 LOFA board setting 3.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Introduction 6.3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power 6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT 3.

Table of Contents [cont.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! 2—3—6 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 7 .1 Current instantaneous measurements 2—3—7 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 8 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above figures represent all the external and internal monitoring points for input and/or output optical powers in transmission path for a “terminal application”.1 Current instantaneous measurements 1. Signal provided at these external monitoring points comes from a tap coupler. These “instantaneous measurements” do not concern only optical powers but also other parameters such as current unit temperature. The internal monitoring points provide from a tap coupler and after an analogue to digital conversion.1 Monitoring points for transmission path Transponder Channel Mux (CMDX) 8:1 Band Mux (BMDX) Line Amplifier (LOFA) WDM LINE Inter-stage (for DCF use) OSC 12:1 Loading channel (ALCT) External optical monitoring point Internal optical monitoring point Supervision (OSCU) 2—3—8 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. laser bias current or laser temperature. an optical power measurement accessible from specific menus in CT or OS “Equipment View”. We can notice that there is no such test point on ALCT and OSCU boards. corresponding to a small percentage of the “traffic” signal flow. The external monitoring points are accessible on the front panel of boards. They are suitable to connect an optical spectrum analyzer or an optical photometer for example.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 9 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Current instantaneous measurements 1.2 Monitoring points for reception path Channel Mux (CMDX) 8:1 Transponder Line Amplifier (LOFA) WDM LINE OSC Band Mux (BMDX) 12:1 Inter-stage (for DCF use) Supervision (OSCU) External optical monitoring point All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Internal optical monitoring point 2—3—9 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

For all the boards.3 Measurement from Equipment menu Select a board Select the right option BMDX board The result is displayed 2 — 3 — 10 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Current instantaneous measurements 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current instantaneous measurements are available on boards such as: TRBD11y1 TRBD4x12 TRBC4x12 TRBC1111 CMDX1010 BMDX1x00 OMDXw100_y_z WMAN3174 TMDX1180 ALCT1010 LOFA11yz OADC0104 PSUP1000 (Current Unit temperature only) … HKSU1000 (Current Unit temperature only) Click on Refresh to update the measurement values.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 10 . the measurements values have an error margin of 1dB.

Choose Board Current instantaneous measurements menu option 2 — 3 — 11 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Measurement from Board Menu To display current measurement from a board: 1.1 Current instantaneous measurements 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 11 . Open the board view (such as ETHC1000) 2.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 12 .] Example: Current Instantaneous Measurements for TDMX1180 board 2 — 3 — 12 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Current instantaneous measurements 1.4 Measurement from Board Menu [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

2 ALCT1010 board setting 2 — 3 — 13 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 13 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after: 2 — 3 — 14 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2. 3 – “Loading” This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5. BMDX and LOFA boards in case of “Terminal” mode application. In the latter case. The Loading ALC session manages the emitted power of the ALCT only or of the ALCT and tributaries.“Disable” In this case. the “Booster input” reference value must be set operating as described on the next relevant page. the input power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010 board. IP1. the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power at the the LOFA_T input . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 14 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow: 1 . the interconnections between ALCT.1 Introduction 1 IP1 Pre-VOA OP Post-VOA OP IP2 OP2 LOFA_T ALCT1010 1 VOA DCU 2 12 2 LOFA_R BMDX1000 OP2 IP2 DCU VOA 1 Post-VOA OP Pre-VOA OP IP1 The above figure shows.e. the output power of the BMDX (i. 2 – “Dynamic” When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode. Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.0A The Loading ALC is an algorithm which principle is to keep constant the BMDX mux output power (which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at the provisioned level. if there is no ALCT connected to the BMDX the Loading ALC session manages only the tributaries emitted power.

The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after: 2 — 3 — 15 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power at the the LOFA_T input . OADC0104.e. IP1. ALCT and LOFA boards in case of “Multi degree” mode application.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.1 Introduction [cont. Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 15 . the output power of the OADC0104 (i. 3 – “Loading” This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5. the input power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010 board. the “Booster input” reference value must be set operating as described on the next relevant page. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2 – “Dynamic” When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode.] LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 From other OTS lines of the TR-OADM WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC TR-OADM Multiplexing structure of incoming local traffic ALCT To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) The above figure shows the interconnections between WMAN3174.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow: 1 .“Disable” In this case.0A. When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode.

Preliminary condition : ALCT slot # ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode In Equipment view.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2. Consequently. ILA AGE.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1. Preliminary condition : ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode. 2 — 3 — 16 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. ALCT1010 and OADC0104 must be located in the shelf according to the following table: 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 29 31 33 35 37 OADC0104 slot # 23 25 27 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 16 .Select the port#1-OMS block 3. Consequently.Terminal.Access 1.The Automatic Laser Control Management dialog box is displayed. BMDX and ALCT1010 must be located in the shelf according to the following table: ALCT slot # BMDX slot # 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 10 9 8 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15 2 – ILA PGE. ROADM and TR-OADM (WSS based) applications: The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain the incoming power level of the related LOFA board in TX direction at a provisioned level.Choose the menu Transmission Alc Management 4. BOADM and ROADM (WB based) applications: The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain BMDX-mux output power (which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at a provisioned level. select the LOFA11yz_R board to the Transmission view 2.

2 ALCT1010 board setting 2. Click "Dynamic" in the “Mode Configuration" area. ALCT unit that must operate in Dynamic mode and click on Set.] 1. 2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode [cont. Refer to the example given at the beginning of this module “Measurement from Equipment menu” _ BMDX board All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 3.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 17 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the BMDX output power and/or amplifier input power level. 5. In the Dynamic Alc Configuration area. 2 — 3 — 17 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. enter the location of the In the "Power Configuration" set the Booster Input Power by using Click on Set. 4. the up and down arrows. Click on Close to finish.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 18 . 4.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode Get the relevant Automatic Laser Control Management dialog box 1.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the OADC0104 output power and/or amplifier input power level. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Configure the ALCT output power level as shown on the next page until the the amplifier input. 3. Click on Close to finish. Click "Disable" in the area. 2. target power is reached at 2 — 3 — 18 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. “Mode Configuration" Click on Set.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 5. select the ALCT board Access to the Board view Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows. Click on Apply. Wait a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. 4. The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board 1. Click on Close to finish.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 19 . 6. 2. During this process the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled. 2 — 3 — 19 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In Equipment view. 3.

5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 From other OTS lines of the TR-OADM WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC TR-OADM Multiplexing structure of incoming local traffic ALCT To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) 2 — 3 — 20 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 ALCT1010 board setting 2.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 20 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 21 .3 LOFA board setting 2 — 3 — 21 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

MANUAL: the 1st and 2nd stage output power is set at the value manually provisioned. to the measured VOA attenuation and parameters depending of the optical design of the link.When LOFA11yz is Unidirectional. The 1st stage output power is automatically tuned according to the provisioned 2nd stage output power. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. VOA is placed at the first stage output. This algorithm doesn't apply to 2nd stage whose output power remains manually tuned. When LOFA11y1 is Bidirectional. . . The VOA attenuation is tuned so as to maintain the input power level constant on the 1st stage of the LOFA (receive side). VOA is automatically tuned according to the LOFA input and output powers in order to control and optimize its spectral flatness. VOA is placed at the first stage input. Amplifier is controlled to keep its gain constant on the two stages.LOFA11y0 can work only in unidirectional configuration. GAIN: Automatic Gain control on first and second stage.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 22 MSV: Mid Stage VOA tuning (only for amplifier Unidirectional configuration).1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction Two main parameters may be configured for LOFA11yz : APT (Automatic Power Tuning) modes Manual POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in power (only for unidirectional amplifier) GAIN: Automatic Gain Control on 1rst and 2nd stages VOA (Variable Automatic Attenuator) modes Manual MSV: Middle Stage VOA tuning (only for unidirectional amplifier) SAC: Span Attenuation Control 2 — 3 — 22 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SAC: The VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier. Refer to next relevant pages for more details.3 LOFA board setting 3. .LOFA11y1 has two possible configurations : unidirectional or bidirectional.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . APT (Amplifier Power Tuning) modes : POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in Power (only for amplifier Unidirectional configuration). It is therefore required that a link can be upgraded without ALCT unit but with an automatic tuning of the line amplifiers. VOA modes : MANUAL: VOA is set at the value manually provisioned.

is compatible with all VOA modes. . other parameters are inactivated. In the Gain APT mode.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints .is possible for all types of LOFA board. . Gain The 2 following parameters are configured manually: • 2nd stage output power (OP2) • Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff) The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage output power (OP1).is compatible with Manual VOA mode only for bidirectional LOFA board. In the Manual APT mode.is possible for unidirectional LOFA The Gain APT mode: The “Power” APT mode: board only. other APT parameters are inactivated. • EOL span The Effective End Of Life span attenuation. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.is compatible with all VOA modes for unidirectional LOFA board. The 2 following parameters are configured manually: • IT The Effective Inter-stage attenuation.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 23 . .is possible for all types of LOFA The “Manual” APT mode: boards. .3 LOFA board setting 3. 2 — 3 — 23 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. This parameter represents the attenuation between the location where the channels are added and the 2nd stage input. This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream node where the channels are added and the 1rst stage input. .is compatible with Manual VOA mode only. .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 APT Modes Description Manual Power 1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are entered manually.

3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode 1 IP1 Pre-VOA OP Post-VOA OP OP-Diff IP2 OP2 LOFA_11y0 ALCT1010 1 VOA DCU 2 12 2 LOFA_11y0 BMDX1000 IP2 DCU VOA Pre-VOA OP Post-VOA OP 1 IP1 OP2 OP-Diff 2 — 3 — 24 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. but typical values can be generally applied. OP1 (PreVOA OP) is tuned according to the provisioned OP_Diff and OP2 and the current VOA attenuation value. The (constant) difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power is set by setting the difference between 2nd stage output and VOA output: OP_Diff = OP2 – PostVOA OP. i. but typically not possible to maintain such large power values at the output of the first stage) “Power” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier.3 LOFA board setting 3. The OP_Diff must be chosen in order to have the good trade-off between: higher power at the 2nd-stage input ⇒ better amplifier noise-figure (NF) limited power at the DCM input ⇒ nonlinear effects accumulation in the DCMs must be below a certain threshold An optimum OP_Diff could be identified link-by-link.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 24 . Since the VOA decreases with ageing.e. Amplifier output power (OP2) and OP_Diff are constant. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. only depending on the fiber type: G652 SMF: typical OP_Diff = 8 dB G655 TeraLight: typical OP_Diff = 6 dB G655 E-Leaf and TrueWave-RS: typical OP_Diff = 5 dB (even lower would be possible. The difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power changes only if the VOA losses change. the 1-st stage output power also decreases with ageing to maintain PostVOA OP constant.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In “Power” mode. to compensate for fiber ageing. OP_Diff maintains a fixed difference between power at the input of transmission fiber and power at the input of DCM.

This allows controlling at the same time the impact of the nonlinear effects inside the transmission fiber and the DCM. This algorithm is applied separately by 1st and 2nd stage of every amplifier. OP2 – PreVOA OP = 5 (for LOFA11y0 and LOFA11y1) -> OP1 = PreVOA OP = OP2 – 5 or OP2 = 5 + PreVOA OP OP2 is tuned according to the provisioned IT parameter and the current input power measurement IP2 : -> IT = IP2 – OP2 + 5 -> OP2 = IP2 + 5 – IT IT = IP2 – PreVOA OP OP1 is tuned according to the provisioned EOL Span parameter and the current input power measurement IP12 : -> EOL Span = 5 + PreVOA OP – IP1 EOL Span = OP2 – IP1 -> OP1 = PreVOA OP = IP1 + EOL Span . every amplifier stage keeps its gain constant (output power – input power = constant) The input power is monitored. In “Gain” mode.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode IP1 OP2 Pre-VOA OP IP2 EOL Span IP1 1 IT LOFA_11yz 1 VOA DCU 2 LOFA_11yz 1 12 2 LOFA_11yz BMDX1000 OP2 IP2 DCU VOA 1 2 LOFA_11yz IT Pre-VOA OP IP1 EOL Span OP2 2 — 3 — 25 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. If the input power varies.5 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 25 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In “Gain” mode. the output power is changed accordingly.3 LOFA board setting 3. the amplifier automatically adapts OP1 (PreVOA OP) and OP2 to the number of input channels. Both amplifier stages are controlled in gain (constant gain).

K_Diff is entered manually: K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant (given by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant. other VOA parameters are inactivated. When the line is back to an operational state. • When a repair is made after a fiber cut. The “Manual” VOA mode: The “MSV” VOA mode: The “SAC” mode can be used : 2 — 3 — 26 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The Span Attenuation Control is used when the VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier.is possible for all types of LOFA board. the span attenuation may be increased.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints . the operator is able to launch the SAC function to reduce automatically the VOA attenuation in order to keep the input power level on the 1st stage of the LOFA (receive side) as it was before the failure. In the Manual VOA mode.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 VOA Modes Description Manual MSV SAC In the Mid Stage VOA tuning.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 26 .is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. .is compatible with Manual and Power APT modes.if the VOA is placed before the LOFA operating as pre-amplifier. In the MSV VOA mode. other VOA parameters are inactivated.is compatible with all APT modes . .3 LOFA board setting 3. Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually. .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The MSV adjusts automatically (in real time) the mid-stage VOA to adapt the mid-stage losses to the present amplifier gain. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. where the accumulation of gain flatness imperfections can bring severe transmission degradation. it is possible to adjust the K_Diff parameter (default = 0) by CT or OS. In this case: K_flat = K_theoric + K_diff In very long links. The “MSV” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier. In a true amplifier board. according to the following rules: LOFA111z: “31-dB rule” Note: 22+9=31dB The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 31 dB LOFA112z: “37-dB rule” Note: 28+9=37dB The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 37 dB The constants 31 dB and 37 dB are indicated as “K_theoric” since they are theoretical (average) value.3 LOFA board setting 3.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode IP1 Gain Pre-VOA OP Inter-Stage Loss IP2 OP2 1 LOFA_T ALCT1010 1 VOA DCU 2 12 2 LOFA_R BMDX1000 OP2 IP2 DCU VOA 1 Inter-Stage Loss Pre-VOA OP IP1 Gain 2 — 3 — 27 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 27 . the optimum constant (K_flat) can differ from K_theoric. This optimization procedure is called Specific MSV (SMSV). in order to optimize it in field (or in the factory) for each specific amplifier.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 28 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2. select the LOFA11yz_R board Access to the Board view Select the menu Board APT/VOA The APT/VOA Configuration dialog box is displayed 2 — 3 — 28 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box 1.3 LOFA board setting 3. In Equipment view. 3.

IT : Amplifier Inter Stage Losses EOL Span : End of Life attenuation of the span.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 29 . OP1 : Output Power of 1st stage OP_Diff : is the difference between the line fibre input power (OP2) and the Mid-Stage payload input power (post VOA first stage output power). Wait for a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. some fields are provisionable using the up and down arrows. During this process. Default value is 9 dB. 3. Click on Close to terminate. Provision the APT mode in the APT area. and the others are greyed (not provisionable). OP2 : Output Power of 2nd stage All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2 — 3 — 29 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. This value is estimated. Power.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT 1. the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled. Click on Apply after each modifications.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode. OP1 and OP2 fields power OP2 fields If Manual mode selected: provision the 1st and 2nd stages Output If Power mode selected : provision OP_Diff and the 2nd stage output If Gain mode selected : provision EOLspan and IT fields 2. This represents the attenuation between the upstream node where channels are added and the first stage input.3 LOFA board setting 3.

Unidirectional LOFA11y1 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage. Provision the VOA mode in the VOA area. This VOA is fixed and located at the interstage. During this process. just before the 1st stage output front panel connector. Click on Close to terminate. some fields are provisionable using the up and down arrows. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2. 3.3 LOFA board setting 3. and the others are greyed (not provisionable). If Manual mode selected: provision the VOA attenuation If MSV mode selected : provision K_Diff If SAC mode is selected: tune the VOA attenuation on operator request Wait for a few seconds for the effective setting of the board.9 Setting the VOA attenuation 1. Click on Apply after each modifications. the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled. In Bidirectional configuration. the floating VOA of LOFA11y1 is before the first stage for maintain the loss variation of the span fiber during the life of the system (ageing or repairing).0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 30 . 2 — 3 — 30 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode. Compatible APT modes are : Manual or Power for Mid-Stage VOA mode LOFA11y0 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 LOFA board setting 3.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 31 .10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements” IP1 Pre-VOA OP LOFA_T Post-VOA OP Gain OP-Diff IP2 OP2 Inter-Stage Loss 1 VOA DCU 2 2 — 3 — 31 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current Instantaneous Measurements for OADC1102: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the OADC1102 board interconnects the following boards: the amplifier (LOFA). CMDX 1 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC OADC1102 BMDX1x00 OADC1102 BMDX1x00 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 CMDX 12 2 OSC VOA 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Band 12 WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 — 3 — 32 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 32 . the BMDX and the WMAN1100 boards.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements” « Current Instantaneous Measurements » of OADC1102 are shown below: WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir Band 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 In R-ADM application.3 LOFA board setting 3.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 33 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Transponder output power setting 2 — 3 — 33 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Click on Close to finish. select a Transponder Access to the Board view Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration 6.1 Setting the transponder output power 1.4. 2. In Equipment view. 5. 2 — 3 — 34 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Wait a few seconds for the effective setting of the board.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 34 . Set the output power by using the up and down arrows. 4. During this process the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled. 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Click on Apply. The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 35 .5 WMAN output power setting 2 — 3 — 35 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Channel Offset attenuation applied to any channel going through the given Express port.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 36 .Channel WMAN3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Parameters Description Attenuation – Wavelength Selective Switch input Attenuation . 3. select a WMAN Board Access to the Board view Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration 4. Set the relevant attenuation value for each selected element Click Apply. In Equipment view. Attenuation applied to the selected channel All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.5 WMAN output power setting 5. 2 — 3 — 36 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WMAN1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Parameters Description Attenuation – Line Output Offset attenuation applied at the board output.1 Setting the WMAN output power 1. 5. Attenuation applied to the selected channel Attenuation . The assigned value includes the offset attenuation defined in the previous parameter.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN1100: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 WMAN output power setting 5.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 37 .2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation 2 — 3 — 37 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power 2 — 3 — 38 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 WMAN output power setting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN3174: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 38 .

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 39 .6 Spectrum acquisition operation 2 — 3 — 39 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

2.5 Ch11.33 nm BAND1 … BAND4 BAND5 BAND6 … BAND10 Submarine Terrestrial 194.6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6. 1.11.0 Ch19. 8.900 THz NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 40 . The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band” channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm.950 THz 2 — 3 — 40 195.33nm up to 1568. This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH application (96 channels).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing plan (from 1530.57 nm BAND11 BAND12 8 Ch ALC 1510 nm 1530. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 12 and 5 (ALCT removed). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7. 6. 3.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder) On G652 fiber in extended C-band OSC Ch59. 9. 4.150 THz 1568.000 THz 191.5 191.57nm).10.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 41 . It provides the inventory of the wavelengths and their power level for a given WMAN board access (input and output). 2 — 3 — 41 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Introduction From 1626 LM R5.0 a new graphical facility « Spectrum acquisition » has been designed to facilitate the checks of Operation and Maintenance activities.6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It is available for WMAN boards.

6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6. 2.The Input 1 monitoring could be enabled as well.The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed: •Place the mouse on a given wavelength then the related information 2 — 3 — 42 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 Up to 80λ Up to 80λ Output OADC0104 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 ALCT WMAN Input1 3174 VOA 2 OSC D M To TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Getting started 1.In this particular case. From the equipment view operate as follow: Select a board (WMAN1100 or WMAN3174) and open the board view Select the menu Board Spectrum Acquisition . .0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 42 . Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window. only Output monitoring is enabled. .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 43 .6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application ROADM (WB based) overview (reminder) WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 Band 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir CMDX 1 ROADM 1 OSC VOA 2 1 VOA 2 OSC OADC1102 BMDX1x00 OADC1102 BMDX1x00 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 CMDX 12 2 OSC VOA 1 2 VOA 1 OSC Band 12 WMAN1100 LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 — 3 — 43 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

5]. [45/33. [32/27]. [46/34] and 61/41. [36/29].5 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6.] 2 — 3 — 44 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The following channels are present at the input: [26/24].0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 44 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Here above the ROADM configuration. [30/26].

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The following channels are present at the input: [26/24]. [30/26].4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.5].5 As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page). [32/27].] 2 — 3 — 45 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. [36/29]. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 45 . it is therefore the only one present at the output. [46/34] and 61/41. [45/33.6 Spectrum acquisition operation 6.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 46 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 3 — 46 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 47 . Calculate optical attenuation of the corresponding monitoring point : internal measurement and note it (P2) Att (dB) = P2 – P1 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Connect a photometer to the external monitoring point 2. Measure the power and note it (P1) 3.How to Do it Determine the way to approximate the optical attenuation introduced by an external monitoring point on a board Time allowed: _____ minutes 2 — 3 — 47 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Use the “current instantaneous measurement” menu option to get the 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 48 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise 1 Determine the optical attenuation introduced by external monitoring points on the following boards (if present) : LOFA11yz TRBD11y1 CMDX1010 BMDX1x00 OMDXw100_y_z 2 — 3 — 48 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Decrease the output power of 2dB 4. Set the output power of TRBD to its initial value “current instantaneous measurements” menu corresponding TRBD and note the power “Optical power level configuration” menu 2 — 3 — 49 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Observe the power decrease on OPM and from the 5. Select a TRBD and note the output power from the 2. Connect an OPM to the “VOA” output point of 3. Increase the output power of 1dB 6.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Measurement from CT: (1) (dBm) Measurement from OPM : (2) (dBm) Delta (1) – (2) (dB) Initial output power = Pi Pi .0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 49 .Exercise 2 1.2dB Pi + 1dB All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Observe the power increase in the same way 7.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 50 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 2 — 3 — 50 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 51 .Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 2 — 3 — 51 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 2 — Module 3 — Page 52 .End of Module Optical Power Tuning 2 — 3 — 52 NE Operation — Optical Power Tuning 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11710AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE Maintenance Module 1 Performance Monitoring 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Issue 1.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 1 .0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.

0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.Blank Page 3—1—2 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 3 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module. you should be able to: Monitor the signal transmission quality in line 3—1—3 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 3—1—4 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 4 .Module Objectives [cont.

3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data 4.4 Displaying Q factor margin 3—1—5 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Supported performance monitoring points 1.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP 3.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 5 .2 Displaying history data 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Displaying current data 4.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP 3.2 Modifying a performance threshold table 3 Performance Monitoring configuration 3.3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards 1.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP 4 Performance data display 4. TRBD4x12.1 Displaying a performance threshold table 2.1 Performance Monitoring overview 1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters 2 Performance threshold tables management 2.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 1 Introduction 1. TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] Switch to notes view! 3—1—6 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Table of Contents [cont.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 6 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 7 .1 Introduction 3—1—7 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

FEC and Ethernet layer1 and 2).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 TCA: Threshold Crossed Alarm All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The Operator can analyze the « Current data » and the « Historical data ». These data are based on counters. When a given threshold is crossed. Two granularity periods are available: 15 minutes and 24 hours.1 Introduction 1. a TCA alarm is raised.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 8 . PM Threshold tables are assigned to the performance points. Selected PM points at the network boundary have to be started.1 Performance Monitoring overview Performance Monitoring provides the operator with the ability to monitor the quality of the signal flowing through the WDM network. 3—1—8 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. A set of counters is dedicated to a given layer (SDH.

Uncorrected Blocks).5G overhead and . Uncorrected Blocks).FEC at 40Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 9 . TRBD4x12. The monitored layers on TRBD11y1 board can be: specific ETSI processing.FEC at 40Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12 3—1—9 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. . Uncorrected Blocks). The monitored layers on TRBD4x12 board can be: specific ETSI processing.FEC at 10Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1.SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and . Uncorrected Blocks).SDH 2. . The monitored layers on TRBC4x12 board can be: specific ETSI processing.FEC at 10Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors.5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2.1 Introduction 1. .SDH 40G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 40G overhead and .SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. . The monitored layers on TRBC1111 board can be: specific ETSI processing.

3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards 2xGBE_FC 2xGBE_FC 3 — 1 — 10 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 10 .5G overhead and .Layer 2 PM All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.SDH 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 . based on 8B/10B coding (either on GbE or FC signals).SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and .5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2. based on 8B/10B coding. The monitored layers on 2xGBE_FC can be: specific ETSI processing. .1 Introduction 1. .Layer 1 GbE PM (client side).Layer 1 GbE PM (client side). The monitored layers on ETHC1000 board can be: specific ETSI processing.

Ingress if monitoring is performed on information received from B&W side (B&W -> WDM).0A — Operation and Maintenance . .5 Gbps (STM-16) Near end ingress layer 1 10 GbE PM NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Introduction 1. TRBC4x12 and ETHC1000 TRBD11y1. only if 10GbE LAN TRBD1191.Egress if monitoring is performed on information received from WDM side (WDM -> BW).0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 11 . Monitored “side” can be: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. TRBC4x12 TRBC1111 and 2xGBE_FC TRBC1111 TRBD1191.5 Gbps (STM-16) Near end egress layer 1 10 GbE PM Near end ingress Layer 1 GbE PM Near end ingress Layer 2 PM Near end egress Layer 2 PM 3 — 1 — 11 Near end ingress B1 PM at 2.4 Supported performance monitoring points Near end egress FEC PM at 10 Gbps PM points TRBC1111 and TRBD11y1 TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12 TRBD4x12 TRBD4x12 TRBD11y1. only if 10GbE LAN 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 ETHC1000 ETHC1000 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 1626 LM ETSI Near end egress FEC PM at 40 Gbps Near end egress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64) Near end egress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256) Near end ingress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64) Near end ingress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256) Near end egress B1 PM at 2.

or at least one RS defect.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 12 . SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time. one HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10Gb/s or with at least one Ethernet defect. BEC (Background Error Corrected): count of FEC corrected errors that occurred outside a SCS (result is divided by 512). SUS (Severely Uncorrected Seconds): count of seconds in which a FEC layer defect occurred or in which more than 33 538 048 FEC blocks were uncorrected (this corresponds to a rate of FEC corrected errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3). BBE (Background Block Error): Count of ICG that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 1Gb/s. count of HCV that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 10Gb/s. more than 255 HCV for Ethernet 10Gb/s or at least one Ethernet. SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 2400 (approximately > 30%) B1 code violation. ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet 1Gb/s. ES.25 Gbps (GbE) or 10. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time. SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time.5 Supported performance monitoring counters Layers \ Counters SDH-RS layer at 2. The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds. ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one B1 code violation or with at least one RS defect. SCS (Severely Corrected Seconds): count of seconds with a FEC layer defect or at least one FEC uncorrected block or more than 33 538 048 FEC corrected errors (this corresponds to a rate of FEC corrected errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3). The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds.1 Introduction 1. A reset is done at the end of each period. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time. SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 10000 ICG for Ethernet 1Gb/s. Ethernet Layer 1 UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES (or SUS) events have been detected.3125 Gbps (10GbE LAN) UAS X X ES X SES X BBE X BEC SCS BBU SUS X X X X X X X X 3 — 1 — 12 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 SDH-RS Layer FEC Layer UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES (or SUS) events have been detected.5 Gbps or 10 Gbps or 40 Gbps FEC layer at 10 Gbps or 40 Gbps Ethernet layer 1 at 1. ES. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. A reset is done at the end of each period. A SES is also counted as an ES. A SES is also counted as an ES. BBE (Background Block Error): Count of B1 code violations that do occur out of a SES. BBU (Background Block Uncorrected): count of FEC uncorrected blocks that occurred outside a SUS.

TRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port. TTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port. TRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.5 Supported performance monitoring counters [cont. multicast and broadcast frames. TTO: Total Transmitted Octets TDF: Total Dropped Frames TTF: Total Transmitted Frames TRSEF: Total Received Service Errored Frames TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Ethernet Layer 2 TRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port. multicast and broadcast frames. TRCO: Total Received Correct Octets TRCF: Total Received Correct Frames TRCF sums the number of received unicast. TDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Introduction 1. TTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.] Ethernet layer 2 counters Counter TRCF TRCO TRSEF TTF TTO TDF Meaning Total Received Correct Frames Total Received Correct Octets Total Received Service errored Frames Total Transmitted Frames Total Transmitted Octets Total Dropped Frames 3 — 1 — 13 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 13 .

Notes Page
Switch to notes view!

3 — 1 — 14

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 14

2 Performance threshold tables management

3 — 1 — 15

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 15

2 Performance threshold tables management

2.1 Displaying a performance threshold table
1.

In Equipment view, choose Configuration Performance Threshold

2.

In the PM Threshold Table Click on Display…

Tables… menu option

Select window, select one table

3.

Default tables

3 — 1 — 16

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 16

2 Performance threshold tables management

2.2 Modifying a performance threshold table

Define new value for alarm raising threshold Apply Define Severity for TCA

Define new value for alarm clearing threshold

3 — 1 — 17

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance counters can be compared to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager. The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current problem list. The user can display and modify such tables. Different thresholds can be assigned for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours. The TCA only reports the value of the counter which has crossed the threshold, it does not provide a complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance data after receiving the alarm. The user can retrieve this information from a dialog box. The system behavior concerning the clearance of 15 min. and 24 h TCAs differs:

15 min. (explicit clearance): A TCA is only indicated once in the alarm manager, even if the same threshold is crossed several times a day. TCAs are automatically cleared by the system after one 15 min. interval for which the counter was below the TCA low threshold. 24 h (implicit clearance): A TCA is indicated for each interval in which the related threshold has been crossed. The system implicitly clears TCAs, at the end of the 24 hours (midnight).

For all periods, stopping a PM causes related TCA clearance.
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 17

Notes Page
Switch to notes view!

3 — 1 — 18

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 18

3 Performance Monitoring configuration

3 — 1 — 19

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 19

3 Performance monitoring configuration

3.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP
In Equipment view, select one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12 or 2xGBE_FC)
1. 2. 3.

Access to the Transmission view Select the relevant TP (see below) Choose Transmission Trail Monitor Create or Delete menu option A Trail Monitor block appears or disappears beside the selected TP

3 — 1 — 20

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Reminder for Trail Monitor creation:

You can create a TM on transmission blocks on … to start PM on … layers Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1) Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12) Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU1 (TRBC1111) Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBC4x12) Port#x-OCH (X=1 to 2) (2xGBE_FC) SDH-RS SDH-RS SDH-RS SDH-RS Ethernet 1Gbits/sec

Deleting a TM stops automatically all PM running on corresponding block.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 20

3 Performance monitoring configuration

3.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP
In Equipment view, select one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000)
1.

Select a counting period Tick to start PM

relevant TP (see below) 2. Choose the Transmission Performance Configure Performance Monitoring menu option (PM Configuration window appears) and operate as shown : 6. Click Apply to confirm
3 — 1 — 21
NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Access to the Transmission view and select the

Keep or set the Threshold Table configuration

Reminder to start PM on a given monitoring point:

To start PM on …

in a … board TRBD11y1 TRBD4x12

Select … Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU2 Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU3 Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or Port#101-ODU1 Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or Port#101-ODU2 Port#6-RsTTP Port#13-RsTTP Port#101-OCH Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12) Port#x-OCH (X=1 to 2) Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12) or Port#13-RSTTP Port#1-OCH

SDH / RS

TRBC1111 TRBC4x12 2xGBE_FC ETHC1000

FEC Ethernet 1 Gb/s L1 Ethernet L2 Ethernet 10 Gb/s L1

TRBD11y1 or TRBD4x12 or TRBC1111 or TRBC4x12 ETHC1000 2xGBE_FC ETHC1000 TRBD1191

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 21

3 Performance monitoring configuration

3.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP
In Equipment view, select one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000).
1.

Select a counting period Untick to stop PM

relevant TP (see below) 2. Choose the Transmission Performance Configure Performance Monitoring menu option (PM Configuration window appears) and operate as shown : 6. Click Apply to confirm.
3 — 1 — 22
NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Access to the Transmission view and select the

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 22

4 Performance data display

3 — 1 — 23

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 23

4 Performance data display

4.1 Displaying current data
In Equipment view, select one transponder or concentrator (TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or ETHC1000)
1.

2.

relevant TP Choose the Transmission Performance Display Current Data menu option

Access to the Transmission view and select the

Example for SDH or Ethernet L1 PM
3 — 1 — 24
NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Administrative State : indicates whether the PM data collection is locked or unlocked. “Locked” means that historical PM still remains available when PM is stopped. Operational State : indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled. Suspect Data : indicates if during the current period, a data collection problem occurred (« Yes » or « No ») leading to an incomplete or invalid counting period. It can be due to a PM counters reset action, a NE reset… Threshold Table : indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity. Current Problem List : indicates if counter value thresholds have been crossed during the current period. Elapsed Time : indicates the time which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started. To set to zero all counters in current period, click on Reset. To update the counter values, click on Refresh. Refresh action is only available on operator request. Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 Refresh actions. As soon as Performance Monitoring is started, current PM data are collected.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 24

4 Performance data display

4.2 Displaying history data
From the Transmission view, select the relevant TP and choose the Transmission Performance Display History Data menu option

3 — 1 — 25

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

To update the counter values, click on Refresh. User can have access up to the 16 previous 15-minutes periods and the previous 24H period.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 25

4 Performance data display

4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data
To display the Ethernet L2 counters values in “PM Current Data” window , operate as previously described selecting « 15 min L2 » tab
Example for Ethernet L2 PM

3 — 1 — 26

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 26

4 Performance data display

4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data [cont.]
1. 2.

To display « Ethernet Maintenance data” operate as follow: Select the relevant TP then Transmission Performance Display Maintenance Counters Operate as follow:

Select the polling time

Launch the polling

Select the number of retries
3 — 1 — 27
NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This facility on 1320CT is available only when the Local Access is granted. The polling time possibilities are: 5, 10, 30 and 60 seconds. The displayed counter values are the difference between the current and the previous ones.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 27

4 Performance data display

4.4 Displaying Q factor margin
From the Equipment view, choose the Diagnosis option and operate as follow: Select OTS Tick counters you want to display Apply Counters menu

3 — 1 — 28

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Based on FEC decoding, Q factor is calculated from measured Bit Error Rate every 5s and 30s.

- In fact, user has access to the margin on Q factor (or “channel margin”). This relative value is given comparing the “received” Q factor with the minimum Q factor value resulting in a 10-13 BER after FEC correction.

Not Valid

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 28

Exercise
Display the threshold table #3

Modify ES counter settings in threshold table #3
Set the “value up” threshold at 10 (instead of 50) Change “Warning” severity to major

Connect an SDH analyzer on this Transponder and start measurement Configure a PM on one transponder Check alarms on TM block Display current PM data Stop PM and delete TM
3 — 1 — 29

Insert errors from SDH analyzer to crossover ES threshold

After two periods of 15 minutes, display historical PM data and check alarms clearing Set back the table#3 ES threshold to its initial value
NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

Optional Pad

B&W
SDH ANALYSER

WDM Line output

TRBD

VOA

Line input 1620LM

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 29

Module Summary
Performance Monitoring applies to
SDH Regeneration Section based on B1 OCH trail based on FEC Ethernet layer 1 and L2 (ETHC1000 only)

Counting periods are 15 minutes for Ethernet Layer 2, 15 minutes and 24H for SDH, FEC and Ethernet Layer 1 Alarms may be raised if threshold tables are attached to PM
“Value up” threshold to raise alarms “Value down” threshold to clear alarms

Threshold Tables to attach can be “by default” or user specific Performance reports
Current counters Historical counters Maintenance data for Ethernet L2 Channel margin

3 — 1 — 30

NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 30

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 31 .Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 3 — 1 — 31 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 3 — Module 1 — Page 32 .End of Module Performance Monitoring 3 — 1 — 32 NE Maintenance — Performance Monitoring 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11711AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 1 .0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE Maintenance 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Module 2 Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.Blank Page 3—2—2 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 2 .

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 3 . you should be able to: Handle the alarms raised by the NE 3—2—3 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 4 .] 3—2—4 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.

5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process 3.1 Introduction 1.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel 2.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view 2.4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder 2.13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view 2.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process 3.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel 2.9 APSD management for LOFA boards 3.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table 1. 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards 3.12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view 2.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder 2.2 Laser class 3.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 5 .6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance 3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view 2.12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration 3.1 Overview 3.5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel 2.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status 3.14 Network view situation – Example 1 2.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view 2.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table 1.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table 1.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view 2.3 Risks 3.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.16 Network view situation – Example 3 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Laser safety labels 3.11 APSD management for TRBx.3 Creating an alarm threshold table 1.5 Assigning an alarm threshold table 1.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view 2.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1 3.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management 2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.15 Network view situation – ExampleReserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights 2 3—2—5 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 2.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board 3.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel 2.14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2 Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 17 18 21 24 25 26 28 32 33 35 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] Switch to notes view! Page 3—2—6 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Table of Contents [cont.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 6 .

1 Alarms threshold configuration 3—2—7 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 7 .

OPL. CMDX. OCNC. IPD alarms. BMDX. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. TDMX and WMAN Each of the above boards are assigned with a default threshold table which holds the alarm threshold values at port level for IPL.1 Introduction An alarm threshold defines triggering points of for alarms such as: IPL (Input Power loss) LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) OPL (Output Power Loss) IPD (Input Power Degradation) Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards: Transponders.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The default threshold tables cannot be modified.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 8 . LOMS. OMDX and LOFA OADC. Customized tables can be created and then assigned to one or more board 3—2—8 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.

2. click on Close to finish. . LOFA11yz) Choose the Board Alarm threshold configuration menu option In the Threshold table list. 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA BMDX CMDX OMDX All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4.Some examples are shown below: 3—2—9 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.g.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table From a Board view (e. 3. select one table and click on View Click on Cancel to close the dialog box Back to the Alarm Threshold Configuration dialog box.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 9 .

3 — 2 — 10 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. select one existing table In the Table name field.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1. 3. 4. select one board such as LOFA11yz Access to the Board view Choose the Board Click on Clone Alarm threshold configuration menu option In the Threshold table list. 6. 11. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 10. define the name of the new table Click on Clone to create the new table In the Threshold fields. In Equipment view. 7. 5. 2. 8.3 Creating an alarm threshold table 1. 9.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 10 . define the new value for each threshold Select the new table in Alarm threshold configuration window Click on Apply to assign the new table to the board types that are displayed in Board type area Click on Close to finish.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Up to 14 alarm threshold tables can be created in the 1626 LM.

7. 3. 6. select one LOFA11yz board Access to the Board view Choose the Board Alarm threshold configuration menu option In the Threshold table list.0A — Operation and Maintenance The default table and the current table cannot be modified. define the new value for each threshold Click on Modify to modify the table and close the dialog box Click on Close to finish. 2.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table 1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 2 — 11 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 4. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. In Equipment view.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 11 . 5. select the table to modify Click on Modify In the Threshold fields.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1. 8.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.g. select the table to assign Click on Apply to confirm Close the window. 3. 2. 3 — 2 — 12 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 4. 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 12 .5 Assigning an alarm threshold table From a Board view (e. LOFA11yz) Choose the Board Alarm threshold configuration menu option In the Threshold table list.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 13 . select one LOFA11yz board Access to the Board view Choose the Board Alarm threshold configuration menu option In the Threshold table list. 5.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1. 7. 6. 4. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 3 — 2 — 13 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. select the table to delete Click on Delete Click on Delete to delete the threshold table and close the dialog box Click on Close to finish.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 WARNING : The default table and current table cannot be deleted. In Equipment view. 2. 3.

Select the current Alarm threshod table then View Get or modify FUE threshold at the bottom of the window Confirm if needed with Confirm All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 2 — 14 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 4. 3. The FUE default threshold value is 10499451. which corresponds to no alarm in default state.0A — Operation and Maintenance FUE : FEC Uncorrected Errors The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in all 10Gbs TRBx of the 1626 LM) is 1020 bits.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management 1. open the board view and then the Alarm threshold configuration window: 2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. For a given Transponder supporting FUE alarm (such as TRBD1191). During one second there are 10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 14 . this alarm is raised if the UE count overcomes a defined threshold in an observation window of 1s. A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5.1 Alarms threshold configuration 1.

Exercise Select a LOFA11yz board Display the default alarm threshold table Assign it to the board Create a new table and modify the thresholds Assign again the default alarm threshold table to the board Delete your threshold table Time allowed : ______ minutes 3 — 2 — 15 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 15 .

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 16 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 3 — 2 — 16 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 17 .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 3 — 2 — 17 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

LOS: Loss Of Signal . AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 18 . In such context. TIM: Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. The problem is related to the client network.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance Port#1-OGPI: URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .Relevant in the context of remote network management. LBER: Low Bit Error Rate .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Port#1-OCH_TM: SSF: Server Signal Failure . Port#1-OCH: LOF: Loss Of Frame . SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.The SDH signal is degraded. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. 10E-6 LBER threshold is reached or exceeded.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 18 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 User side. The frame cannot be decoded.

The frame cannot be decoded. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. In such context. Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame . LOF: Loss Of Frame . FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. The problem is related to the WDM network.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 19 . The frame cannot be decoded. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal .] CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 19 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment.

Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.] CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 5 From TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 20 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The incoming signal is lost for the MUX/DEMUX. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#102-OGPI: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength .Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. Port#1-#193550-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength . LOS: Loss Of Signal .0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 20 .

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 193650 1 LT TRBC1111 Transmission view ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 3 — 2 — 21 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 User side. The problem is related to the client network.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. The problem is related to the WDM network. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The frame cannot be decoded.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. Port#1-OCH: LOF: Loss Of Frame .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. The frame cannot be decoded. Port#1-ODU1: LOF: Loss Of Frame . In such context.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 21 .The optical signal is received with a non conform content.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment.

Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.] 193700 Client NE TRBD1191 CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 TRBC1111 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 22 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The optical signal is received with a non conform content.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 WDM side. The frame cannot be decoded.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 22 . URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The frame cannot be decoded.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame . The problem is related to the WDM network. In such context. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. LOF: Loss Of Frame .

2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. LOS: Loss Of Signal .The incoming signal is lost for the MUX/DEMUX.] CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 6 From TRBC1111 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 23 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. LOW: Loss Of Wavelength .0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 23 .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#1-#193550-OMSoch: URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont.Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#108-OGPI: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength .

Alarm not yet available.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.LAPD configuration problem. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section . CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure . LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. In such context. The problem is related to the WDM network.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 24 .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view CMDX1010 BMDX1000 Client NE TRBD1191 Line Terminal LOFA11y0_T 193550 TRBC1111 Client NE Band 6 VOA 193650 1 OSCU1010 2 2 VOA 1 LT ALCT1010 194150 Band 5 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 LOFA11y0 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 24 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 25 .4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC VOA 2 Up to 96λ Up to 96λ LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT D To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) M To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) TR-OADM OTS 1 ALCT M D Up to 96λ OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 3 — 2 — 25 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.

Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 26 . In such context. CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1..2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. Port#1-#193150-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line. The problem is related to the WDM network. Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel OTS 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 O S C VOA 2 Up to 80λ Up to 80λ Channel 31. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.LAPD configuration problem.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.5 : Express channel OADC0104 WMAN3174 1 VOA OTS 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 OSC ALCT D M LOFA11y0 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 26 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .5 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_Express channel [cont. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.] Channel 31. The problem is related to the WDM network. CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure . In such context.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 27 . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. Port#1-#193150-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.5 : Express channel OTS 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir ALCT M D Up to 80λ OTS 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 80λ 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 O S C 3 — 2 — 27 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available..LAPD configuration problem.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.

Port#1-#193400-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 28 .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel OTS 1 Channel 34 : AddDrop channel OCNC1230 1 O S C VOA 2 Up to 80λ Up to 80λ OTS 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT LOFA11y0_Unidir D M LOFA11y0 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 28 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The problem is related to the WDM network. Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received.. CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure .LAPD configuration problem.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . In such context.

URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.Underlying Resource Unavailable . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Port#2-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal .6 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel [cont.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.] Up to 96λ 1:2 OADC1100 TR-OADM Up to 96λ Up to 96λ D OADC1300 Up to 96λ TDMX1180 Up to 96λ 1:8 De-multiplexing part 193400 TRBD Client NE 3 — 2 — 29 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.The incoming signal is lost on TDMX1180 channel port side.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.Underlying Resource Unavailable .Underlying Resource Unavailable .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-#193400-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength . URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 29 .The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.

Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. LOF: Loss Of Frame .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.6 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel [cont. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . The frame cannot be decoded.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 -Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame .The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded. Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. The problem is related to the WDM network. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.] Up to 96λ 1:2 OADC1100 TR-OADM Up to 96λ Up to 96λ D OADC1300 Up to 96λ TDMX1180 Up to 96λ 1:8 De-multiplexing part 193400 TRBD Client NE TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 30 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In such context. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 30 .

URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Port#1-OCH: LOF: Loss Of Frame . The frame cannot be decoded.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y0 User side.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 31 .6 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel [cont. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. The problem is related to the client network.] WMAN3174 TR-OADM Up to 32λ OADC1750 4:1 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ M Multiplexing part 4:1 193400 Client NE TRBD TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 31 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.The optical signal is received with a non conform content.0A — Operation and Maintenance Port#1-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

In particular. fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers. but does not provide full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node. The fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&ROADM node. such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management. the splitter card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 LOFA11y0_Unidir Multi-degree R-OADM : Degree-1 to Degree-4 The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on: WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node. The changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder LOFA11y0_Unidir OCNC1230 1 OSC CMDX 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) Express Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 R-OADM To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) BMDX1000 CMDX 1 BMDX1000 CMDX 12 1 VOA 2 LOFA1110 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) CMDX 12 OTS 1 ALCT ADD OTS 2 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir 3 — 2 — 32 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM. any change in the association between the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions. This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node flexibility. The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 32 . Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution. this allows to dedicate just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier necessary within the node.4 1626 LM NE type configurations 2.

The problem is related to the WDM network.. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . In such context. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available. CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure .8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel OTS 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir 1 O S C VOA 2 Channel 29 : Express channel OCNC1230 Express OTS 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 1 VOA 2 OSC ALCT Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 CMDX 1 2 VOA 1 BMDX1000 LOFA11y0 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 33 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.LAPD configuration problem. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one. Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 33 .

SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel [cont.Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure . Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management.LAPD configuration problem. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.] Channel 29 : Express channel BMDX1000 1 VOA 2 LOFA1110 CMDX 1 To/from TRBD / TRBC (up to 8) OTS 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir ALCT ADD OTS 2 LOFA11y0_Unidir 2 OSC VOA 1 OADC0104 WMAN3174 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s Express 2 OCNC1230 VOA 1 O S C 3 — 2 — 34 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. In such context.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 34 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-#192900-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength . The problem is related to the WDM network. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OGPI: URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . The problem is related to the WDM network. The problem is related to the client network. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame .The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 User side.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. Port#1-OCH: LOF: Loss Of Frame . otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one. The frame cannot be decoded.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. The frame cannot be decoded. LOS: Loss Of Signal .The optical signal is received with a non conform content. In such context. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel OTS 1 Channel 34. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.5 : AddDrop channel OCNC1230 Express LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 1 OSC VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 CMDX Client NE TRBD1191 BMDX1000 193450 TRBD11y1 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 35 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 35 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

5 : AddDrop channel OCNC1230 Express LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 1 OSC VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 CMDX Client NE TRBD1191 BMDX1000 193450 3 — 2 — 36 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one. LOF: Loss Of Frame . Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 36 . FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. The frame cannot be decoded. In such context. Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. The frame cannot be decoded.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The problem is related to the WDM network.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame .] OTS 1 Channel 34.

Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 37 .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises. CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure .Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont.] OTS 1 Channel 34. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available. Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#1-#193450-OMSoch: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength . Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. In such context.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#102-OGPI: LOW: Loss Of Wavelength .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. Port#1-OMS: SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one. LOS: Loss Of Signal . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .5 : AddDrop channel OCNC1230 Express LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 1 OSC VOA 2 WMAN3174 ADD LOFA1110 2 VOA 1 CMDX Client NE TRBD1191 BMDX1000 193450 3 — 2 — 37 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.The incoming signal is lost for the MUX/DEMUX. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.LAPD configuration problem. The problem is related to the WDM network.

Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . FUE: Fec Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view TRBD4x12_UNI Transmission view TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view 3 — 2 — 38 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The frame cannot be decoded. The frame cannot be decoded. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.The optical signal is received with a non conform content.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 38 . Wrong configuration of OUT section. The problem is related to the client network. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 User side. Port#1-OCH: LOF: Loss Of Frame .The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. RUTM) detected on TRBD board. LOS: Loss Of Signal .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OGPI: URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. LOF: Loss Of Frame . RUM.Equipment failure (RUP.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC).Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.

LAPD configuration problem.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 39 . CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Port#1-OMS_A: LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure. LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side (if OSCU exists) otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view LOFA11y0_Unidir VOA 1 2 OSC To/from WDM line OSC To/from WDM line LR 2 OSC VOA 1 OSC LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0 Transmission view 3 — 2 — 39 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#1-OTS: LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable .

12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view 2xGBE_FC board User side * #1 GE or FC #1 Front side #2 GE or FC #2 GFP-T Mapping VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v Virtual Concatenation Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48 (Bridge & Switch) SFP SFP Line #1 Line #2 Not used in 1626 LM R5.0 Front side All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 2 — 40 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 40 .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 41 .13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view ETHC1000 board User side * #1 GE #xx #12 GE #yy VLAN tagging 10GE WAN Line P#13 10GE WAN XFP P#13 Line #1 Front side Ethernet layer 2 Switch & concentration Matrix 10GE WAN Line P#14 10GE WAN XFP P#14 Line #2 Front side Back plane access 3 — 2 — 41 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 42 .SD BMDX1000 ALCT1010 6 SSF (port#101ODU2) 3 — 2 — 42 5 SSF (port#1-OMS) 2 1 LOS (port#1-OTS) NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SSF: Server Signal Failure. COCE: Configuration Or Customization Error.14 Network view situation – Example 1 1 CMDX1010 BMDX1000 LOS (port#1-OTS) 2 IPL (1st stage input) (minimum attenuation reached) 5 SSF (port#1-OMS) 6 SSF (port#101ODU2) CMDX1010 OMS Trail Client NE TRBD1111 LOFA11y0_T VOA LOFA11y0_R VOA 1 4 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 IPL: Input Power Loss.SD 1 4 .SD 2 4 .SD 1 3 .2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.SD 2 Client NE ODU2 Trail TRBD1111 LOFA11y0_R VOA ALCT1010 LOFA11y0_T VOA 2 3 .SD 1 OTS Physical connection IPL (1st stage input) (minimum attenuation reached) 2 4 . LOS: Loss Of Signal. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 IPL: Input Power Loss.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 43 . AIS: Alarm Indication Signal.15 Network view situation – Example 2 1 LOS (port#1-OGPI) CMDX1010 BMDX1000 BMDX1000 2 IPL (client input) 3 CMDX1010 AIS (port#101ODU2) LOFA11y0_T Client NE TRBD1111 VOA ODU2 Trail 1 LOFA11y0_R VOA Client NE TRBD1111 1 2 2 OpS Physical connection ALCT1010 VOA VOA 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 2 LOFA11y0_T 1 ALCT1010 OTS Physical connection 3 — 2 — 43 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. LOS: Loss Of Signal. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 IPL: Input Power Loss.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 44 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 2. LOS: Loss Of Signal.16 Network view situation – Example 3 1 LOS (port#10x-OGPI) CMDX1010 BMDX1000 BMDX1000 2 IPL (mux input x) CMDX1010 LOFA11y0_T Client NE TRBD1111 VOA LOFA11y0_R TRBD1111 VOA Client NE 1 OpS Physical connection VOA ALCT1010 2 1 2 VOA 2 LOFA11y0_R 1 2 LOFA11y0_T 1 ALCT1010 OTS Physical connection 3 — 2 — 44 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3 — 2 — 45 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 45 .

On handling optical equipment or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and that the system complies with applicable optical standards. are provided with protective covers that must always be used. Never look at an optical fiber splice. unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. laser radiation may be present.0A — Operation and Maintenance Optical safety: general rules DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. 4. unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. cable or connector. A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 46 . Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable. Although it cannot be seen. cable or connector to other persons. described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: 1. when any optical link is disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.1 Overview What : Safety procedure Why : Human eye damage risk in case of fibre break due to high power outgoing the device (≈ 23dBm) Where : On LOFA Two cases : Line with and without OADM How : Automatic laser pump shutdown when LOS detected The APSD complies with IEC 60825 1 & 2 and ITU-T G. 6. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 7. refer to the relevant « Technical handbook » such as 3AL 75138 EAAA Ed1. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals. Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice. 2. terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers. Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. as soon as possible. 8. All optical connectors. whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed. 3. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by means of magnifiers/microscopes.For more details. 3 — 2 — 46 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. . Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical links between the transmitter and the receiver.664 recommendations. 5. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical devices. unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

001 Class 4 Class 3B Class 3A Class 2 Class 1 Wavelength (nm) 400 3 — 2 — 47 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 47 . Power (mW) 1000 100 10 1 0.2 Laser class The International Electro technical Commission IEC825: Gives the safety recommendations.5 (2) 15 17 3B (500) (500) (500) 27 27 27 4 (mW) (mW) (mW) dBm dBm dBm All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4) -4 9.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Telecom laser domain Class 1 1550nm 1300nm 850nm (10) (10) (0. Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.5 10 3A (50) (32) +2.1 0.01 0.

5 mW. whereas -3 dB means attenuation of 2. etc.3 Risks Class 1 Class 2 Class 3A Class 3B Class 4 No hazard if used in normal conditions*. Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam. dBm represents absolute power. The formula to calculate dBm from mW is: dBm = 10 log10( 1mW P ) dBm Definition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. except if you use optical appliances (binoculars. * If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam. Hazard for eye and skin. monocular.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). 3 dBm means 2 mW.). -3 dBm means 0. whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is used to represent gain or attenuation. microscope. fire risk. Similarly. It is an abbreviation for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt. dBm is different from dB. No hazard if used in normal conditions.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 48 . 3 — 2 — 48 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. and 3 dB means a gain of 2. Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm. For example.

for optical power below +10mW (10dBm) • HAZARD LEVEL 1M. 500mW] (21. window (1500 . 136mW] (10dBm to 21.1996 + A2 ed. for optical power in [10mW.1994 + A11 ed.664 standard defines the optical safety mechanisms: • HAZARD LEVEL 3B.1993 + A2 ed. G.2000 Hazard Level classification and standards The classification refers to the IEC 60825 Standard (with amendments 1 & 2).0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 49 .3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.4 Laser safety labels Indications given on panels and safety interlockers: 3 — 2 — 49 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2000 • IEC 60825-2 ed. • Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD): Procedure to automatically shutdown the output All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3dBm) • HAZARD LEVEL 4.2001 • IEC 60825-1 ed. for optical power in [136mW. 2001 (1999) • EN 60825-2 ed.3dBm to 27dBm) • Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and to avoid exposure to hazardous levels power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Optical Safety compliance with European Norms standardized Norms: Compliancy to Optical Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies • EN 60825-1 ed.1800 nm): This recommendation defines 4 HAZARD LEVELs for optical fiber applications in third • HAZARD LEVEL 1. for optical power higher than 500mW (>27dBm).

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 After the fiber cut in section 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 50 . Therefore. the signal received at LOFA_R_1 becomes very low (attenuated by sections 1 and 2). This very low level is considered as a LOS.5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process No signal LOFA_T_1 1 LT1 SD 12 SD 11 10 9 8 7 LOFA_E_W No signal LOFA_T_2 2 Section 1 LOFA_W_E 3 SD 4 SD Section 2 LOFA_R_2 5 LT2 6 Repeater LOFA_R_1 3 — 2 — 50 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. LOFA_R_1 acts as LOFA_W_E. this LOFA shuts down his first stage and then sends a shutdown command to the opposite LOFA (LOFA_E_W) through the back panel. first stage of LOFA_W_E detects a LOS. shutting down his first stage and sending also a shutdown command to opposite LOFA (LOFA_T_1).3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. As a consequence. Because there is no amplification anymore in Repeater towards the LT1. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. At the LOFA_R_2 input.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 At the LOFA_W_E input. As a consequence.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. because of the total shutdown of LOFA_E_W.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 51 . Nevertheless. causing the LOS alarm. LOFA_R_1 raises a LOMS alarm. explaining the absence of LOS alarm but LOMS is raised. Optical Supervisory Channel and WDM channels are not detected because of the fibre cut in Section 1. power corresponding to the WDM window is below the acceptable level. Optical Supervisory Channel is not impacted. At the LOFA_R_1 input. being independent on amplification.6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status No signal LOFA_T_1 1 LT1 SD 12 SD 11 10 9 8 7 LOFA_E_W No traffic LOFA_T_2 2 Section 1 LOS LOFA_W_E 3 SD 4 SD Section 2 LOMS No traffic LOFA_R_2 5 LT2 6 Repeater LOFA_R_1 LOMS 3 — 2 — 51 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Optical Supervisory Channel and some power (noise) in the WDM window are detected.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In case of OADM.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 52 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process No signal LOFA_T_1 1 LT1 SD 16 SD 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 LOFA_T_W No signal LOFA_R_E LOFA_T_2 2 Section 1 LOFA_R_W 3 SD 4 SD OADM LOFA_T_E 5 6 Section 2 LOFA_R_2 7 LT2 8 LOFA_R_1 3 — 2 — 52 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. APSD will work in the way and will result in the same situation after a fibre cut occurring in section 1.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.

we receive the added channels in OADM going through LOFA_T_E and the Optical Supervisory Channel.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status No signal LOFA_T_1 1 LT1 SD 16 SD 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 LOFA_T_W No Traffic LOFA_R_E LOFA_T_2 2 Section 1 LOS LOFA_R_W 3 SD 4 SD OADM on TRBx for all pass-through channels LOFA_T_E 5 6 Section 2 SSF LOFA_R_2 7 LT2 8 LOFA_R_1 LOMS 3 — 2 — 53 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the Optical Supervisory Channel being the only one signal detected. resulting in LOW alarms in all corresponding transponders of LT2. there is no alarm on this LOFA_R_2. Assuming that the multiplex power is higher than the Degraded level. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 53 .3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 At the LOFA_R_2 input. there is no acceptable WDM signal power anymore detected at the LOFA_R_1 input. Because of LOFA_T_W total shutdown. hence the LOMS alarm on LOFA_R_1. Though channels coming from LT1 going to LT2 are lost in section 1.

operate as follow from the board view: 1. Select a LOFA stage then Configuration 3.9 APSD management for LOFA boards To get and modify the APSD state. Select Board APSD configuration… 2. Clik OK to confirm or close 3 — 2 — 54 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Modify the configuration if needed 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 54 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The control board in EMPM1000 includes logical control of laser shutdown command. A Software shutdown command is also available.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration (enabling signals) generates the shutdown commands.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board To get and modify the APSD state. Click OK to confirm or close 3 — 2 — 55 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. It polls the signal on backplane (GEN_APSD. Select Board APSD configuration… 2. operate as follow from the board view: 1.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 55 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the APSD functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected. LOS_2MBPS. Modify the configuration if needed 3. The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the 1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions).

Select the OGPI block 3.Select Transmission APSD configuration… 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Disable or Laser Forced Off 5.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 56 .3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.Modify the configuration if needed: . operate as follow: 1.11 APSD management for TRBx.Open the Transmission view of the board 2. 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards To get and modify the APSD state.Clik OK to confirm or close 3 — 2 — 56 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Clik OK to confirm or close Not available on TRBD1131 3 — 2 — 57 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.If one of the corresponding alarms is raised. Select Transmission Shutdown criteria configuration 4.AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) is alarm is raised. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Open the Transmission view of the board 2.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 57 Radio button: Off . the client/user side laser is shutdown. Select the port#x-OGPI (User side) 3.The associated Incoming Alarms / action is not selected .12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration To get and modify the TRBD/TRBC shutdown criteria.Defines the resultant consequence AIS on the signal if one of the incoming . Identify the current configuration and / or modify if needed 5.By default the first group is selected Incoming alarms -A group of specific WDM incoming alarms that can be raised from the transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD boards.The associated Incoming Alarms / Action is selected . inserted toward client/user side. .The signal flows without any change.For each group of alarms corresponds a set of 3 associated actions Action . SHUTDOWN . TRANSPARENT . operate as follow: 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Parameters Description Possible values Radio button: On .

the generic AIS is detected as a STM-LOF. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded. The generic AIS [STM-AIS] is a new maintenance signal at STM-N level a continuous repeating 2047-bit PN-11 (1 + x9 + x11) sequence In existing SDH equipment.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. The frame cannot be decoded. otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.The optical signal is received with a non conform content.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame . PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. The problem is related to the WDM network. In such context. LOF: Loss Of Frame .0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 58 . SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. The frame cannot be decoded.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1 User WDM TRBD GEN_AIS 3 — 2 — 58 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC). SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Port#101-OGPI: LOS: Loss Of Signal . PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded. FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded. The frame cannot be decoded.The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side. Port#101-OTU: otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from a remote equipment. The problem is related to the WDM network. SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.3 Automatic Power Shutdown 3. Port#101-OCH: LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate (FEC).14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2 User WDM TRBD SD 3 — 2 — 59 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The frame cannot be decoded. SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable . Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.The optical signal is received with a non conform content. PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached or exceeded.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Port#101-ODU2: LOF: Loss Of Frame . otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one. In such context.0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 59 .The optical signal is received with a non conform content. LOF: Loss Of Frame . AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred.

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 60 .Discover After Trainer has generated various faults on the training equipment (fiber disconnection. board removal.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. identify the corresponding alarms raised by the NE Give an explanation for each resulting alarm Time allowed : ______ minutes 3 — 2 — 60 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. wrong trace identifier.…).

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 61 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 3 — 2 — 61 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 3 — Module 2 — Page 62 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11712AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module Alarms Handling 3 — 2 — 62 NE Maintenance — Alarms Handling 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 3 NE Maintenance Module 3 Boards Replacement 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 1 .0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Issue 1.

Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 3—3—2 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 2 .

you should be able to: Replace any board.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 3 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate procedure 3—3—3 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.0A. belonging to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.

] 3—3—4 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 4 .

3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board 2.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 5 .1 Tools 1.1 Overview 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Replacing a PSUP unit 3—3—5 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Board insertion 2 Board replacement procedures 2.2 Board extraction 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! Page 7 8 9 10 13 14 15 16 17 1 Board handling 1.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board 2.

0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 6 .Table of Contents [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] Switch to notes view! 3—3—6 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 7 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Board handling 3—3—7 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

this tool is located at the rear of each shelf cover. you should use the electrostatic discharge cable. this one being connected to the rack earth. to avoid any damage due to potential electrical discharge from your body into the board. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. XFP modules do not need any tool to be removed / inserted.1 Board handling 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Tool : any time you handle a board. PSUP…Normally.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 8 . Tool : this metallic rod must be used to extract boards without levers such as RAIU.1 Tools For boards without levers Electrostatic discharge cable For SFP modules 3—3—8 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. They are equipped with a built-in lever. Tool : this tool must be used to remove / insert SFP modules from/ in 2xGE_FC or ETHC1000 boards.

1 Board handling 1.2 Board extraction Use the electrostatic discharge cable Verify that each optical fiber is labeled Disconnect cables on the board faceplate Use caps on optical fibers to avoid dust exposure Remove screws fixing the board to the shelf Extract the board or 3—3—9 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 9 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

3 Board insertion Use the electrostatic discharge cable orange rail Pre-set the board by aligning this one in the Open the levers Push the board on the front panel and check (if present) are pre-set at the end that levers 3 — 3 — 10 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Board handling 1.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 10 .

] Close the levers (if present) to complete board insertion Screw the board to the shelf Reconnect cables on the board Before connecting fibre to the board. make sure there is no dust on optical connector. using a scope. Clean until there is no dust spot anymore on the optical surface 3 — 3 — 11 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Forbidden operations for unit insertion : Do not push just on one lever only Do not force the units Avoid impact during board handling Avoid impact on adjacent boards during board insertion All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Board handling 1.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 11 .3 Board insertion [cont.

0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 12 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 3 — 3 — 12 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 13 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Board replacement procedures 3 — 3 — 13 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. This will be done automatically by the EC function through SC function.1 Overview Use the same board type Refer to the Part Number Master ESCT card and Mass Memory MIB Restore/Activate Software download ON/OFF dip switches on board PSUP TRU –48V power switch No need to reconfigure the slot Software and slot configuration automatically downloaded Other boards No specific procedure 3 — 3 — 14 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Most of the boards in 1626LM do not need any specific procedure to be replaced. Operators should follow a specific procedure (see after).2 Procedures 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Furthermore. there is no need of slot reconfiguration and software download. In the case of a Master ESCT2000 / Mass Memory or PSUP1000 replacement.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 14 . Operators just have to follow the safety rules regarding the board handling (see previous chapter) .

There is a database for the Hardware Equipment Configuration.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 15 The Local Configuration (communication and routing parameters) is duplicated in the physical database for commodity (2 storage areas are dedicated to communication and routing parameters in the physical database). SC LED is green) Plug the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf Wait for the communication is restored (EC and SC LEDs are green) Start Supervision and open the Equipment view to check database Configure Comm. The EEPROM media is used as a persistency reference of the Local Configuration Data. The Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) in EEPROM is always rewritten by the Local Configuration backed up from the physical database when the NE restarts./Routing parameters.2 Board replacement procedures 2. . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Actually each time the NE restarts. the content of the Local Configuration of the physical database is backed up and the EEPROM content is erased by this backup. EC communication with any SC is disabled. EC communication with any SC is disabled.0A — Operation and Maintenance The ESCT2000 board located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications and NE data base. The EEPROM stores all the necessary data to keep supervision of the NE (communication and routing parameters) even if the physical database is damaged. This mode is used to check if a configuration is ready to be applied. Once the configuration is checked to be convenient for the NE configuration. EC communication with any SC is disabled. 1 ON / 2 ON : In Testing mode. and for Communication and Routing topics. 1 OFF / 2 ON : Clear the hardware configuration and upload Communication & Routing parameters. Check that dipswitches are set to OFF Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf Take a new ESCT2000 with a new Mass Memory loaded with the same software release Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON Plug in the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf Wait for the communication is restored (EC LED is red. 1 ON / 2 OFF : Clear the hardware configuration and the Communication& Routing parameters. DIP SWITCHES CONFIGURATION : 1 OFF / 2 OFF : Normal position. Restore a NE backup and Activate it. the communication and routing physical database is not backed up on the EEPROM. the DIP SWITCH position should go to the Normal position. Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf Set all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 3 — 15 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. the Performance Monitoring. Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) are located both in NE Database (Flash memory) and in an external media (EEPROM). The NE Database is a logical database which aggregates several physical databases.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board Yes Does the Mass Memory work properly ? No Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf Remove the Mass Memory from the broken ESCT Take a new ESCT2000 Put the Mass Memory on the new ESCT2000.

on the ESCT Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf and remove the Mass Memory Put a new Mass Memory loaded with the same software release on the ESCT Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON Plug in the ESCT2000 in the master shelf Wait for the communication is restored Plug the ESCT2000 in the master shelf (EC LED is red.3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board Yes Is there a Mass Memory configured in a Dummy NE with the last NE configuration ? No Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf Remove the Mass Memory from the ESCT Put the new Mass Memory with the NE configuration.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 16 .0A — Operation and Maintenance This switch This block All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf Set all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 3 — 16 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SC LED is green) Wait for the communication is restored (EC and SC LEDs are green) Start Supervision and open the Equipment view to check database Configure Comm. Restore a NE backup and Activate it.2 Board replacement procedures 2./Routing parameters.

4 Replacing a PSUP unit 1. Therefore switch off the related circuit breaker in the TRU Disconnect the power cable on the front side Plug out the faulty PSUP board and remove it Plug in the new PSUP board Connect the power cable on the front side Turn on the power of the new PSUP board. 3. 4. 6. Therefore switch on the related circuit breaker in the TRU Check that the green LEDs of both PSUP boards are lit All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3 — 3 — 17 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Board replacement procedures 2. 7. 5. Ensure that the second PSUP board is inserted. 2.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 17 . has no active alarms and the green LED is lit Do not plug out any PSUP boards or disconnect any power cable before switching off the related circuit breaker in the TRU! This can cause a flashover at the PSUP board power connectors or at the backplane pins. 8.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. works properly. Turn off the power of the PSUP board to be replaced.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 3 — 3 — 18 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 18 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Exercise 1 Proceed to a PSUP replacement on your NE without completely turning off the corresponding shelf. following the appropriate procedure Use the installed PSUP as a spare ____ minutes 3 — 3 — 19 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 19 .

if not already done ______ minutes 3 — 3 — 20 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 20 . make sure that traffic was not disrupted and NE configuration is compliant with the original one Put back the original Flash memory in your NE Use a spare Flash memory if possible.Exercise 2 Make a backup of your NE Connect a SDH tester to one transponder at least and run traffic through your NE Replace the Flash memory of your NE following the appropriate procedure At the end of the procedure.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 21 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 3 — 3 — 21 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11713AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module Boards Replacement 3 — 3 — 22 NE Maintenance — Boards Replacement 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 3 — Module 3 — Page 22 .

0 Module 1 SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 1 .Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 4 SPLM Operation 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 2 .Blank Page 4—1—2 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module. you should be able to: Describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace 4—1—3 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 3 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 4—1—4 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 4 .

Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 SPLM description 1.2 Introduction 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 1626 LM management _ Reminder 1.1 Getting the workspace 2.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 5 .2 Main window description Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4—1—5 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 SPLM architecture 2 Getting started on SPLM workspace 2.

0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Table of Contents [cont.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 6 .] Switch to notes view! 4—1—6 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 SPLM description 4—1—7 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 7 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A).1 1626 LM management _ Reminder Three software applications can be used to operate and maintain the WDM network : 1320 CT 1350 OMS SPLM Tool DCC/OSC 1350 OMS SPLM DCN DCN GNE BtB Q3 DCC/OSC BtB WDM Metro ring network BOADM F SPLM 1320 CT 4—1—8 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. carried by the OSC : OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes) OTS. the directly connected NE to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE. “Full access” (display and modification rights) from 1320 CT can be “Requested” by the 1320 CT operator (in case of urgent needs during a DCN problem for instance) or “Granted” by the 1353 NM operator.0A — Operation and Maintenance LR DCC/OSC All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 DCC/OSC Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1353 Node Manager and 1354 Regional Manager. SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 8 . when a Network Element is under 1353 NM control (and eventually 1354 RM control). Most of the time.0. carried also by the OSC. the cross-connections and the alarms status.1 (1626LM R5. SPLM tool description The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic subnetwork.703) between each NE is available for any purpose.1 SPLM description 1. it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the same optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels. the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice channel) and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel.DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes) In addition to DCC. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G. SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9. When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface. the 1320 CT operator can only display the equipment configuration. In latter case. No modification can be done from the 1320 CT in this case.

via APE process.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI.2 Introduction SPLM tool description The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic subnetwork. In the current release the SPLM: provides a network topology management function. anticipate the required tuning tasks to avoid any transmission service disruption when BER becomes too high and FEC does not correct transmission errors.1 SPLM description 1. SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with 1350 OMS on a server. OMS and OCH layers. calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel. With SPLM you can: 4—1—9 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. manage a graphical representation of the optical network with the ability of displaying OTS. identify the channels to be monitored. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 9 . ROADM (WSS based) and TR-OADM nodes. tune the optical spectrum to be as flat as possible at terminal. tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based) configurations.

LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic line automatic commissioning. This module is able to parse a LDT file. used to optimize meshed photonic lines.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 * 1626LM R 5. defined in the Commissioning handbook. It implements the following groups of features : APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an automatic way. LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters along the photonic line. check the compliancy of its content with the NE current data. display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the operator. providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line.3 SPLM architecture * 4 — 1 — 10 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. and usable by any other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer). FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part. with respect to a given sequence of operations. and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. APE Sequencer. Line Tuning.0A is managed by 1350 OMS and not by 1353NM / 1354RM The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks : TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 10 .1 SPLM description 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Getting started on SPLM workspace 4 — 1 — 11 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 11 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Getting the workspace From 1320 CT PC desktop double click on the SPLM icon and login as follow: Login: “Operator” Password: “operator” 4 — 1 — 12 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 12 .2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Area # 1 2 Description Menu Bar: The area where all action menus and submenus are available.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 13 . Resource Tree: The area where the subnetwork components are graphically represented in a hierarchical tree structure. 3 General Information Status: The area where operation status are displayed for the selected operation entity: • Node • Physical link/OMS trail/ OCH group • Subnetwork All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2.2 Main window description 1 2 3 4 — 1 — 13 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Description Node connection states colour convention: Red: SPLM cannot reach the node Orange: the node is not connected to SPLM Green: he node is connected to SPLM SPLM Manager Connection States Red: SPLM software manager is stopped Yellow: SPLM software manager is running.] 4 5 6 7 4 — 1 — 14 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. SPLM GUI is connected to the SPLM manager process All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. SPLM GUI is not connected to the SPLM manager process Green: SPLM software manager is running. Network Displaying Tools: The area where network displaying tool icons are available.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Area # 4 5 6 7 Network Map: The map which displays a graphical representation of the photonic subnetwork nodes. SPLM Software Manager Status: A graphical representation of the connection status between SPLM GUI and SPLM manager process.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 14 .2 Main window description [cont.2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2. Graphic Tools: Icons which activate management tasks.

2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2.] 4 — 1 — 15 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 15 .2 Main window description [cont.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 .0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 16 . several lists are available : 4 — 1 — 16 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Main window description [cont.Making a right click on any column header. it is possible to customize the list: All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2.Filtering area is available on the left side .] From Components menu option.

4 — 1 — 17 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.] From any list such as Physical Links Manager a Print button is available.2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace 2.2 Main window description [cont.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 17 . The operator can select one of the printers already installed on the PC.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 18 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 4 — 1 — 18 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 4 — 1 — 19 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 19 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 4 — Module 1 — Page 20 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11714AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.End of Module SPLM Overview 4 — 1 — 20 SPLM Operation — SPLM Overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 4 SPLM Operation Module 2 Topology Management 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 1 .0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.Blank Page 4—2—2 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 2 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module. you should be able to: Setup the relevant SPLM configuration 4—2—3 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 3 .

] 4—2—4 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 4 .Module Objectives [cont.

0A — Operation 2.10 Deleting a Photonic Line 1.3 Loading the SPLM database 3.18 Deleting a Physical Link 2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5 1.1 Topology processing rules 1.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line 1.5 Calibrating a map _ Step 2 1.6 Displaying OCH Trail list 2.1 Modifying Password 3.5 Displaying and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.6 Calibrating a map _ Step 3 1.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1 1.11 Displaying the Node list 1.2 Photonic Network example 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 5 .16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Photonic Network construction 1.3 Managing the map background 1.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list 1.2 Saving the SPLM database 3.12 Declaring and uploading a Node 1.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link 1.13 Displaying Node information 1.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 4—2—5 SPLM Operation — Topology Management OMS Trail list 2.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line 2.7 Displaying the channel margin 3 Basic administration tasks 3.3 Validating a Photonic Line 2.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line 2.14 Modifying or deleting a Node 1.9 Declaring a Photonic Line 1.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent Page 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 41 42 43 44 45 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

] Switch to notes view! 4—2—6 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 6 .0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Table of Contents [cont.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 7 .1 Photonic Network construction 4—2—7 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

and usable by any other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer). Line Tuning. LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic line automatic commissioning. display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the operator.1 Photonic Network construction 1. used to optimize meshed photonic lines. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Topology processing rules 4—2—8 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line. defined in the Commissioning handbook. LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters along the photonic line. and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line. This module is able to parse a LDT file. check the compliancy of its content with the NE current data.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 8 . with respect to a given sequence of operations.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks : TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology. APE Sequencer. It implements the following groups of features : APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an automatic way. FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part.

a set of OCH groups.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The above figure details the main resources managed by the SPLM (Photonic Network. trail. A Photonic Network (only one is managed) is a WDM network composed of the several elements (subnetwork. Photonic Lines). 1 “T “Photonic Line (PL1) and 1 ring Photonic Line (PL3). node. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. A Photonic Subnetwork contains nodes. or a more complex topology such as a ring. A Photonic Subnetwork (also called Photonic Line) is a set of nodes whose boundaries are: OADM if there is neither LT nor BtB in the whole Photonic Network. and manages 4 Photonic Lines: 2 point to point Photonic Lines (PL2 and PL4). It may represent a simple point-to-point WDM line. port. 2 LR. a set of OCH trails. a set of OMS trails. physical link.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 9 . a set of physical links.1 Photonic Network construction 1. 4 OADM and 2 BtoB). Either LT (Line Terminal) or BtB (Back to Back Terminal) if any in the Photonic Network. Nodes.2 Photonic Network example 4—2—9 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. …). and the way they are organized through an example: The Photonic Network owns 14 Nodes (6 LT.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 10 . At the end of the calibration phase. it is still possible to « Calibrate » a default map.3 Managing the map background Before the network construction phase. This is done zooming in a selected geographical from a larger map (such as world map or any other default one). the selection becomes one more available choice for network construction phase. the operator has to choose a given map background. It could be done using one of the default available background. 4 — 2 — 10 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Nevertheless.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Photonic Network construction 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Then 4 — 2 — 11 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 11 .1 Photonic Network construction 1. select the Map follow the procedure step by step: Calibrate menu option.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1 To calibrate a map.

1 Photonic Network construction 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Calibrating a map _ Step 2 4 — 2 — 12 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 12 .

1 Photonic Network construction 1.6 Calibrating a map _ Step 3 4 — 2 — 13 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 13 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 14 .7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5 4 — 2 — 14 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Photonic Network construction 1.

4 — 2 — 15 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Photonic Network construction 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list To display the Line list choose Components Line menu option.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 15 .

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 16 . To declare a Line. 4 — 2 — 16 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The available Conf. Point to Point or Ring. 2. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 Declaring a Photonic Line 1.1 Photonic Network construction 1. right click in the list and select Add menu option. Fill in the Add Photonic Line window Click OK to launch the declaration. 3. Types are : Submarine and Terrestrial (to be selected for 1626 LM) The available Topology types are: Undefined (for meshed structure).

Prior to subnetwork deletion. Click OK in the Photonic Line Deletion message window.It is not possible to delete a Subnetwork which topology has been completed. select the Line in the list then right click and choose Delete menu option. 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 CAUTION: . • All the relevant trails have been calculated by SPLM and this the reason why you cannot delete it. all the associated configuration related to nodes All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. For such a subnetwork: • Service State is Validated. . and physical links are lost.When the subnetwork deletion is done. 4 — 2 — 17 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 17 .10 Deleting a Photonic Line 1. . To delete a Line. the Service State must be updated to Defined. Make sure that « Service State » = « Defined » to be able to delete the line.1 Photonic Network construction 1.

4 — 2 — 18 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 18 .1 Photonic Network construction 1.11 Displaying the Node list To display the Node list choose Components Nodes menu option.

Select a town gives the opportunity to place the Node at one particular place on the world map. 3. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Node State becomes Declared.1 Photonic Network construction 1. When upload is complete. 1. 4 — 2 — 19 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Node creation can be done before the subnetwork / Line creation as the related association is not included in the Node creation window. Node Sate becomes Ready. If upload fails. 2. To upload the node configuration: Select the node in the list Right click and choose Upload.12 Declaring and uploading a Node 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 19 .Node State turns to Uploading. To declare a Node right click in the list Choose Add Node menu option Fill in the Add Node window and launch the declaration with OK. Upload step: . 2.

right click and choose Show or Modify menu options 4 — 2 — 20 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.13 Displaying Node information There are two ways to get the Node Configuration: Select the node in the list.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 20 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Photonic Network construction 1.

4 — 2 — 21 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 .0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 21 .The following parameters can be modified: « Conf. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.14 Modifying or deleting a Node Select the Node in the list then right click and choose: Modify or Delete menu options. Deletion Modification . Type » and « GIS coordinate ».The node must not be declared as part of a subnetwork to be able to launch the deletion.1 Photonic Network construction 1.

4 — 2 — 22 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. From “ Add/Remove Node(s) in Photonic Line “ window: From Available nodes select a node and click Add>> to get Associated nodes Confirm with OK.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line 1.1 Photonic Network construction 1. 2. From the Resource tree: Select the Line / Subnetwork Right click and choose Add Nodes. 2. 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 22 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Destination node.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 23 . click on “Trace Link” icon first 2.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes 1. destination physical port. Then draw the physical link between two Nodes 4 — 2 — 23 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A Physical Link is identified by two boundaries. From the Network map.1 Photonic Network construction 1. The boundaries are identify with the following information: Source node. source physical port.

1 Photonic Network construction 1. Fill in the creation window and confirm with OK. 4 — 2 — 24 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 24 .] 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes [cont.

1 Photonic Network construction 1.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link From Physical Links Manager window.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 25 . select a Physical Link.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4 — 2 — 25 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. right click and choose Show Boards menu option.

right click and choose Delete menu option.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 26 . select a Physical Link.18 Deleting a Physical Link From Physical Links Manager.1 Photonic Network construction 1. 4 — 2 — 26 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Make sure that « Progress State » of the related subnetwork / line is “Defined” or “Under Construction” to be able to delete the Physical Link.

Exercise Get started on SPLM workspace.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 27 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Choose a given map background Declare a Photonic Line Declare the nodes Upload the node configuration Add the nodes in the Photonic Line Time allowed: Create the Physical Links between the nodes _____ minutes 4 — 2 — 27 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 4 — 2 — 28 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 28 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 29 .2 Photonic Line life cycle management 4 — 2 — 29 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It’s not possible to modify the Subnetwork topology. Progress State Defined Under Construction Correspond to Service State = Defined Ready to Finalize Waiting for OMS Trails. Data ready for optimization or Commissioning procedures. right click and choose Show menu option. Corresponds to Service State = Defined or Validated Under Optimization Optimization in progress. 4 — 2 — 30 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Subnetwork / Line life cycle is based on 2 parameters: Service State Defined Subnetwork configuration and Physical layer declaration are not complete Optimization is not possible. Correspond to Service State = Validated Under Synchronization Synchronization in progress.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line From the Resource tree. or OCH Groups calculation.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 30 . select a Line / Subnetwork. OCH Trails. Ready for use No operation in progress. Under Finalization OMS Trails OCH Trails OCH Groups calculation in progress. Topology can be changed. Validated Subnetwork configuration is complete. This value results from the validation process performed by the operator.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 31 .2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. and the representation of the subnetwork topology and configuration into SPLM. right click and choose Other Actions menu option. select a Line / Subnetwork. then Synchronize To synchronize a Line / Subnetwork: 4 — 2 — 31 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. From the Resource tree.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line Synchronize SPLM with a real subnetwork to upload the up-to-date subnetwork configuration into SPLM to make sure of the exact match between: the real subnetwork topology and configuration.

Nodes have been added to the line. The validation process will trigger the creation of all the relevant trails of the transmission layer. you cannot modify it unless you change its Service State with Invalidate command. select a Line / Subnetwork.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.3 Validating a Photonic Line A Line / Subnetwork can be validated when: Line is declared. Once a subnetwork topology is validated.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 32 . then Validate 4 — 2 — 32 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Physical links have been declared. right click and choose Other Actions menu option. To validate a Line / Subnetwork: From the Resource tree.

e.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line 4 — 2 — 33 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Physical Ports) OMS layer (OMS Trails. located in the same Photonic Network Each Node may contain a set of Physical ports.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 33 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The SPLM relies on a topology based with the 3 layers : Physical layer (Physical Links. there are no OCH ports (OMS Ports are cross-connected. i. a set of Bands and OCH ports In LR Nodes. OCH Ports) (relies on OMS layer) The managed entities follow the next basic rules: Each Node is declared inside one Photonic Network A Photonic Line is defined by a list of Nodes. a set of OMS ports. channels are not demultiplexed) OCH trail route relies on a set of OMS trails In a given Photonic Line. each Node is linked to the next Node through a Physical Link (manually defined by the operator) OMS trail route relies on a set of Physical Links All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. OMS Ports) (relies on physical layer) OCH layer (OCH Trails.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the OCH Trail. source OMS port. An OCH Group is a set of OCH trails using the same route (i. relying on the same OMS trails. The boundaries are identify with the following information: Source node. the OCH group shall automatically be built by the system in case of finalization of the photonic subnetwork.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 An OMS Trail is identified by two boundaries.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 34 . The OMS Trail. Destination node.e. destination OCH port.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2. in the same order).] 4 — 2 — 34 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The boundaries are identify with the following information: Source node. source OCH port.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line [cont. destination OMS port. Destination node. An OCH Trail is identified by two boundaries.

5 Displaying OMS Trail list From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose: Components OMS Trail menu option. click OMS trails are graphically displayed in red color. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2. 4 — 2 — 35 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 35 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 From the map.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2. 4 — 2 — 36 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 From the map. click OCH Groups are graphically displayed in blue color.6 Displaying OCH Trail list From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose: Components OCH Trail menu option.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 36 .

4 — 2 — 37 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 37 .2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2. 4. Expand the relevant subnetwork type. From SLPM resource tree. expand Line to display subnetwork resources. 3.7 Displaying the channel margin To display the channel margin. operate as follow: 1. Click Yes. Result: The Photonic Line Channel Margin dialog box is displayed. Select the relevant subnetwork and right-click Other Actions Centralized Channels Margin.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2.

4 — 2 — 38 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 6.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 Display the channel margin [cont. Result: The Start Channel Margin Algorithm dialog box is displayed.] When the Centralized Channel Margin window is displayed.? before calculation. 5. The channel margin values are flagged to ?. Click Yes.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 38 . Click Get Margin to start channel margin calculation.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 39 . the following fields are completed: Error. Margin (dB) and BER.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] As soon as the calculation is done. Output Power (dBm). 4 — 2 — 39 Click OK to close the END OF OPTIMIZATION dialog box.2 Photonic Line life cycle management 2.7 Display the channel margin [cont. 7.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 40 .Exercise Display general information for the Photonic Line Synchronize the Photonic Line Validate the Photonic Line Display the OMS Trail list Display the OCH Trail list Display the channel margin Time allowed: _____ minutes 4 — 2 — 40 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

3 Basic administration tasks 4 — 2 — 41 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 41 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 Modifying Password To change the « Operator » password. choose Administration Operator Profile Modify Password menu option Fill in the window accordingly Confirm with OK. 3. operate as follow: From the SPLM GUI main window.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 42 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 1.3 Basic administration tasks 3. 2. 4 — 2 — 42 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

4.2 Saving the SPLM database To save the SPLM database.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. operate as follow: From the SPLM GUI main window.3 Basic administration tasks 3. 4 — 2 — 43 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 1. Click OK in the Save Database dialog box. 3.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 43 . choose Administration Database Save the database menu option Fill in the window accordingly Launch with Save. 2.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Click OK in the Load Database dialog box. 4 — 2 — 44 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 44 .3 Basic administration tasks 3. 3. 2.3 Loading the SPLM database To load the SPLM database. 1. 4. choose Administration Database Load the database menu option Fill in the window accordingly Launch with Open. operate as follow: From the SPLM GUI main window.

4. Connect or Disconnect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM database. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 4 — 2 — 45 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent 1. Assign NSAP address to the SPLM manager software agent.3 Basic administration tasks 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance The NSAP address assigned to the SPLM manager software agent is the NSAP address of the local NE connected to the CT All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. operate as follow: From the SPLM GUI main window. To manage SPLM software agent. 3. choose Administration Manager menu option 2.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 45 . Start and Stop the SPLM manager software agent.

Exercise Save the SPLM database Modify the Photonic network Load the SPLM database Verify a NSAP address is assigned to the SPLM manager software agent Disconnect and connect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM database Time allowed: _____ minutes 4 — 2 — 46 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 46 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 47 .Module Summary The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks in R 5.0A: TM (Topology Management) LO (Line Optimization) The main steps to create a Photonic Network: Declare at least one Photonic Line Declare the nodes Upload the node configuration Add the nodes in the Photonic Line(s) Synchronize the Photonic Line(s) Validate the Photonic Line(s) 4 — 2 — 47 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance Create the Physical Links between the nodes All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 4 — 2 — 48 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 48 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 49 .Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 4 — 2 — 49 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 4 — Module 2 — Page 50 .End of Module Topology Management 4 — 2 — 50 SPLM Operation — Topology Management 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11715AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 1 .0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 4 SPLM Operation 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Module 3 Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Issue 1.

Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 4—3—2 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 2 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives Upon completion of this module. you should be able to: Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion 4—3—3 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 3 .

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 4 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives [cont.] 4—3—4 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA 2.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power 2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power 2.3 Running the APE sequencer 4—3—5 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC) 1.1 Introduction 3.2 Running the APE sequencer 2.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! Page 7 8 11 12 13 14 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 30 1 Getting ready to APE 1.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power 2.5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete 3.1 Introduction 1.6 Verifying output power level on transponder 3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 5 .

] Switch to notes view! 4—3—6 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Table of Contents [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 6 .

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 7 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Getting ready to APE 4—3—7 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 Introduction Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is an optimization algorithm run by the operator in case of ADD or REMOVE of service. APE algorithm applies only to the following nodes in R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The goal of APE algorithm is to obtain and maintain. APE algorithm is run during Commissioning procedure for Long Haul systems in case of first installation or ADD of service or REMOVE of service.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NDT : Network Description Table.14dBm 1 VOA 2 OSC OP2=+8dBm (NDT) ALCT P_ALC_INIT_COM =-16dBm (NDT) 4—3—8 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Getting ready to APE 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 8 . a channel power (Pref) in function of the span and the data rate.16dBm LOFA11y0_Unidir 2dB OADC0104 WMAN3174 . Back-to-Back Terminal. ROADM (WSS based). TR-OADM (WSS based) and AGE repeaters. at the output of a Network Element.0A: Line Terminal. 3 channels at 1rst installation WMAN3 Reference Power=-19dBm (NDT) P_BOOSTER_INPUT = .

APE algorithm can be run if the Automatic Level Control is set to a reference power value first (P_ALC_INIT_COM provided by NDT). Each group of channels will be optimized into the same APE Line Sequencing demand.] The power tuning process is the following: The user indicates channels which must be optimized. SPLM indicates this list of channels to the different NEs. NEs calculate new attenuations for selected channels in function of Pref and Pch (read from Optical Channel Monitor) and send these attenuations to WMAN3 board. one or several OCH groups can be selected to start the APE algorithm. Once the ALC reference power is set. pass-thru nodes and destination).1 Getting ready to APE 1. SPLM regroups these channels which have the same route / optical path (same source . NDT: Network Design Table.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI. 4—3—9 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 9 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Introduction [cont.

To apply relevant reference powers to all the involved boards and nodes of a selected group of channels. to avoid conflicts between board processes and APE process.1 Getting ready to APE 1.1 Introduction [cont.15dBm > P_ALC_INIT _COM 1 1 channel is added: 4 channels now WMAN3 Reference Power=-19dBm (NDT) 2dB LOFA11y0_Unidir OADC0104 .0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 10 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 4 — 3 — 10 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. To re-activate control loops of WMAN boards.13dBm (total power change) WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 OSC OP2=+9dBm 2 5 ALCT New Initial ALC Target Reference Power =-15dBm 4 At the end of APE process: To set all the involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode. 3 P_BOOSTER _INPUT = . to deactivate control loops of WMAN boards. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] The APE sequencer runs automatically all the required actions: To set all the involved amplifiers to Gain mode.0A — Operation and Maintenance The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI.

the transmitted channel number can vary to a large extent. helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low channel count to avoid non-linear effects on working channels.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI. It is therefore necessary to keep the channels’ power within the correct transmission limits whatever their actual number. it is located within an OMS Trail. As ALC acts on the booster amplifier input via the ALCT board. This adjustment is called Automatic Level Control (ALC) and it is performed by means of an extra channel that enables the total optical power to be kept constant at the input of the booster whatever the number of channel is.1 Getting ready to APE 1. This is mainly due to the fact that the first installed channel number can be quite low compared to 1626 LM maximum capacity. 4 — 3 — 11 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. you need to assign a specific initial reference power value to the ALC. helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are missing.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 11 .2 Automatic Level Control (ALC) During 1626 LM life cycle. This power value is given by the Network Description Table (NDT) which is provided at the commissioning phase. Before running the APE process. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The ALC power value is related to your network configuration and the number of channels supported by your network. The ALC: ALC enables to maintain the booster amplifier input at a constant power.

Select an OMS Trail Right-click and select Set Initial ALC Target Reference Power 5. From the map. Click OK. set the required value for both direction (Go and Return) . Power. 4 — 3 — 12 From Initial ALC Target Ref. OMS Trails are graphically displayed in red color 4.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 12 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The Initial ALC Target Reference Power window appears. 1.1 Getting ready to APE 1. click 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Initial ALC Target Reference Power is set only at first installation.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power Make sure the Network Description Table (NDT) is available and amplifiers have been set to their initial output power before setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power (P_ALC_INIT_COM). 3. SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 4 — 3 — 13 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 13 .

3. From the map.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2. 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4 — 3 — 14 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 14 . click OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color Select one or several OCH group(s) Right-click and select Optimize with APE The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power 1.

Verify that Optimize Channels radio button is activated.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont. Right-click and select Involved. select an OCH group.] 4. Right-click and select Not Involved. To add an OCH group for power setting: From the list. 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 15 . Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status. select an OCH group. To remove an OCH group from power setting process: From the list.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4 — 3 — 15 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.

Double-click .0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 16 .1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2. 4 — 3 — 16 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell corresponding to an OCH group selected for reference power setting.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and all the boards of the selected OCH group are listed.] 6... sorted by direction and by node.

] 7. in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell corresponding to the board selected for reference power setting.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 17 . 4 — 3 — 17 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5... Double-click.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont. The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and Reference Power values are listed for each channel frequency supported by the selected board of a specific node for a given direction.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

] 8.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont. Repeat action Step 7 or Click Quit to return to the Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2. To update the reference power channel by channel: To update the reference power for all channels: Click Pref by Channel radio button. Update the reference power. The update applies on the reference power of the selected board of a specific node for a given direction. Each frequency row are greyed. Click Apply and OK to return to the previous window. check that the power corresponds to the related transponder output power.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 18 . 4 — 3 — 18 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Click on Pref Value (dBm) cell corresponding to the related channel frequency and assign the relevant value. Click Global Pref (by OCH Group) radio button. The Enter a Global Pref Value (dBm) combo box is activated. In case of Line Terminal or Back-to-Back Terminal.

4 — 3 — 19 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Click Yes to start the APE sequencer. 12. Click OK 11.2 Running the APE sequencer Running the APE sequencer in GO direction then RETURN direction. 10.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A trace of all the performed actions is displayed. 9.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 19 . Click Quit to return to the initial window.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2. Click Start. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 20 .2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power To open “Channel Configuration” window: Display the relevant WMAN board view Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option 4 — 3 — 20 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 21 .4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA To open “APT/VOA Configuration” window: Display the relevant LOFA board view Choose Board APT/VOA menu option 4 — 3 — 21 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.

5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power To open “TDMX configuration of port” window: Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option 4 — 3 — 22 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 22 .2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 23 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Verifying output power level on transponder To verify the output power level of a given a transponder: Display the relevant transponder board view Choose Board Optical power level configuration menu option 4 — 3 — 23 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 2.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 24 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 4 — 3 — 24 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 25 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 4 — 3 — 25 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

This procedure: assigns to the relevant ports of boards crossed by the channels to be deleted.1 Introduction Use this procedure when you want to run the APE sequencer in the context of preparing your network for channel deletion. namely: runs the APE sequencer.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 26 . the minimum output power. After this procedure. -27 dBm for WMAN boards. 4 — 3 — 26 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. -30 dBm for TDMX boards.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3. you can delete the related cross connections without any impact on the traffic. taking into account the channels to ignore.

2. click OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color Select one or several OCH group(s) Right-click and select Optimize with APE The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3. From the map.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 4 — 3 — 27 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 27 . 3.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 28 . To remove an OCH group from power setting process: From the list.] 4. select an OCH group. Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status. Verify that Delete Channel(s) radio button is activated. Right-click and select Not Involved. To add an OCH group for power setting: From the list.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont. 4 — 3 — 28 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Right-click and select Involved.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3. select an OCH group. 5.

4 — 3 — 29 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. The Select OCH Trails to delete on OCH Group window is displayed.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 29 . From OCH Trails to delete. From Available OCH Trails.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3.. select a channel. Click OK.. 7. in the relevant Select Channel(s) to delete cell. The channel is removed from OCH Trails to delete and added to Available OCH Trails. Click <<< . To flag channels for deletion: The channel is removed from Available OCH Trails and added to OCH Trails to delete. Double-click . To cancel channel deletion flagging: 8. The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed. select a channel.] 6. Click >>> .

3 Running the APE sequencer 9. 4 — 3 — 30 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 30 . 11. 10. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Click Quit to return to the initial window.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A trace of all the performed actions is displayed. Click Start. Don’t forget to delete the relevant cross connections (next step). 9. Click OK Click Start Click Yes to start the APE sequencer. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window.3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 3. 12.

Exercise According to the trainer instructions: Set the Initial ALC Target Reference Power Select one OCH group in a Photonic Line Verify the results Verify the results Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization for a given direction Run the APE sequencer for channel deletion Time allowed: _____ minutes 4 — 3 — 31 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 31 .

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 32 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 4 — 3 — 32 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 33 .Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 4 — 3 — 33 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11716AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 4 — Module 3 — Page 34 .End of Module Line Optimization 4 — 3 — 34 SPLM Operation — Line Optimization 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Module 1 RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 1 .Section 5 RMPM Operation and Maintenance 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Blank Page 5—1—2 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 2 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Module Objectives Upon completion of this module. you should be able to: Describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM 5—1—3 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 3 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

] 5—1—4 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 4 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives [cont.

1 Distributed Raman Amplification 1.7 Warnings Page 7 8 13 15 16 19 20 21 24 25 26 27 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms 5.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Product description 1.4 RMPM software structure 2 Cabling description 2.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site 2.2 Remote management 3.1 Laser class _ reminder 5.4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site 2.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 5 .1 RMPM communication 3.4 Inputs All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 5—1—5 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 5 Laser safety and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Two RMPM in the first remote site 3.0A — Operation 5.5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site 2.3 Commands 4.3 Pump Module Block Diagram 1.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack 2.1 Introduction 4.2 Optical cabling 2.3 One RMPM in the first remote site 3.6 RMPM in several remote sites 4 Housekeeping management 4.6 Electrical cabling 3 Remote management 3.6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APR 5.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module 1.3 Safety instructions 5.2 Risks _ reminder 5.2 External Points view 4.4 Automatic Power Reduction 5.4 One RMPM in the second remote site 3.

] Switch to notes view! 5—1—6 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Table of Contents [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 6 .

1 Product description 5—1—7 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 7 .

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Light incident on the molecules creates scattered light at a longer wavelength than that of the incident light. SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) produces photons with the same wavelength.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process. In WDM systems.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 8 . The light generated at the lower frequencies is called the Stokes wave. In the Raman amplifier. The fraction of power transferred to the Stokes wave grows rapidly as the power of the input signal is increased. To reduce the amount of loss. phase and polarization than the transmitted signal and thus the stimulated scattering mechanism can be used to amplify the signal. A portion of the light travelling at each frequency is downshifted across a region of lower frequencies. the shorter-wavelength channels will lose some power to the longerwavelength channels. In multiwavelengths systems. SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) is caused by the interaction of light with molecular vibrations.1 Distributed Raman Amplification Excited atoms : high energy level Stimulated emission Short wavelength source Residue emission Low energy level atoms 5—1—8 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Spontaneous Raman effect is undesirable since it may result in amplification of adjacent channels.1 Product description 1. the power on each channel needs to be below a certain level.

1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.] Raman amplification can be used to reduce the impact on the OSNR of the longest spans the longest spans have the strongest impact on the received OSNR DCM Amplified signals Optical pump power Raman pumps DCM EDFA EDFA The effect of the Raman amplifier can be roughly seen as a reduction of the span losses 5—1—9 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Product description 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 9 .

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 10 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 In the last 20 to 40 Km of transmission line adjacent to Raman source. Raman pump unit WDM C Band signals and in band OSC EDFA Pump All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont. the pump wavelength is attenuated and the outgoing signal is amplified.] Raman amplification in a WDM line reduces the gain of involved EDFA and improves the OSNR 5 — 1 — 10 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Product description 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Product description 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 11 .1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.] Raman amplification performance depends on the fiber type of the line: 5 — 1 — 11 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 12 .] Gain and gain equalization are achieved by adjusting pumps’ power Resulting gain profile P1 P2 P3 P4 Gain [dB] Wavelength [nm] 5 — 1 — 12 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Product description 1.

typ.4 dB) Low insertion loss 5 — 1 — 13 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Min OSNR improvement ≈ 7.5 dBm) pump power.5 mW.5dB RMPM1300. dBm represents absolute power. It is an abbreviation for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt. For example. Min Gain = 14dB.1 Product description 1. two pumps Raman amplifier. The formula to calculate dBm from mW is: dBm = 10 log10( 1mW P ) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. three pumps Raman amplifier. long span masking in multi-span links.5dB Three operating modes: Max pump power.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 13 . 3 dBm means 2 mW. whereas -3 dB means attenuation of 2. Gain setting 1530-1562nm operating bandwidth. or ultra long haul links. -3 dBm means 0. whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is used to represent gain or attenuation. Manual pump power. Min OSNR improvement ≈ 5. and 3 dB means a gain of 2. dBm Definition dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW).2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module RMPM1200. such as single span links up to ≈ 300km. When used in conjunction with conventional Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) technology. from Band #1 to Band #10 of the 1626 LM loading plan Flat gain shape (Max ∆G = 1. Min Gain = 9dB. Distributed Raman Amplification (DRA) enables many important applications. typ. 475mW (+27 dBm) pump power. Similarly. dBm is different from dB.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Raman Multi-Pump Module (RMPM) is a device which ensures extra power margins for long spans applications within the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM. 690mW (+28.

TeraLight (G. LEAF (G.555).655).653) Safety and automatic power reduction SNMP management interface Redundant hot swappable power supplies and fans 5 — 1 — 14 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. PSCF (G.1 Product description 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 14 .] Maximum span loss with current specifications ≈ 52dB for RMPM1300 and 49dB for RMPM1200 Dual pumping wavelength: 1424nm & 1452nm Designed for most deployed fibers: SMF (G.652).655). TrueWave (G.654) and DSF (G.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module [cont.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 15 . Detector Short Band DC – Measures ASE power within the Short Band (1500-1520nm for C-Band amplifiers) entering through the line port. and measures the supervisory channel power entering from the supervisory port. Various detectors exist within the pump module : Detector Short Band MOD – This detector is used only in counter-propagating operation. and measures the modulation power of the OSC.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The block diagram describes the main building blocks of the pump module within the RMPM.1 Product description 1. Detector Pump power – This detector measures the composite pump power exiting the line port. Pass band I: 1420-1480 Pass band II: 1500-1565 Line WDM for supervisory 1510/C Band coupler (wideband 1550) 2x2 Output 1510nm Detector Pump Power Detector DPes Coupler 1%. Detector Pes – Measures back reflected light in the pump wavelengths entering through the line port.3 Pump Module Block Diagram WDM 1480/1550. Back reflection (DW) 2x2 Coupler (DW) 2x2 Detector Dpin EDFA Detector Osc Forward WDM pump combiner Detector Short Band Detector Dpin Line Coupler 50% (WB) OSC Monitor 1452nm 1452nm Pump 1 Pump 2 1424nm Pump 3 DC Mod 5 — 1 — 15 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. typically located within the Short Band. Detector Dpin Line – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from the line port. Detector OSC forward – This detector is used in co-propagating operation. In counter propagating direction the measured power also includes that of the supervisory channel. Detector Dpin EDFA – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from the EDFA Port All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

con) RAMAN amplifier software (file: raman_yyyy.4 RMPM software structure RAMAN amplifier software in charge of: Optical data traffic Eye-safety mechanism EMS software For monitoring and controlling the RAMAN remotely Implements an SNMP agent SNMP is a standard network management protocol EMS GUI software (Java applet) (file: raman_xxxxalc.1 Product description 1.H64) EMS SNMP Agent software (file: raman_zzzzalc.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 16 .bin) 5 — 1 — 16 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 17 .4 RMPM software structure [cont.1 Product description 1. Internet Explorer 1) http:// 150. OSC band power.1.1. back-reflection power) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. OSC input power (in dBm) Cause of an RMPM shutdown Absence of 48V power supply at each connector input History of most important parameters (pump power.] GUI software A Java applet is loaded via the network into any web browser upon typing the unit’s IP address. the user is able to: Shutdown or restart manually the RMPM Configure the automatic shutdown process of the RMPM Adjust the Raman gain from 3dB to the maximum available gain Adjust the Raman pump diode power from 50mW to the maximum available power Monitoring parameters Set the RMPM to get the maximum available power and the line fiber type Through the EMS GUI software interface.192 port 80 2) Retrieve Java applet (HTTP ‘Get’ request) 3) Send Java applet (and HTTP header) 4) SNMP communication 5 — 1 — 17 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. pump current and pump temperature Total signal input power. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and SNMP communication. the user should be able to monitor: Individual and total launched pump power (in mW) For each pumping wavelength.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Control parameters Through the EMS GUI software interface.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 5 — 1 — 18 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 18 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 19 .2 Cabling description 5 — 1 — 19 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM.2 Cabling description 2.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack It’s recommended to implement the RMPM in the ETSI Optinex rack as follows : 5 — 1 — 20 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but in the Optinex ETSI rack.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 20 .

The RMPM can be associated to a line amplifier and also to the pre-amplifier of the line terminal.2 Optical cabling 1626LM NE 5 — 1 — 21 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Cabling description 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The pump power is launched contra-directionally in the line fiber then it acts as a distributed preamplifier for the LOFA.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 21 . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

] The E2000 high power cable is connected to the Line Port (Green connector) : The RMPM Output port (MU type) is connected to the Input port of the LOFA : 5 — 1 — 22 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Optical cabling [cont.2 Cabling description 2.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 22 .

2 Cabling description 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Optical cabling [cont.] The RMPM OSC port (MU type) is connected to the OSC Input port of the OSCU : The RMPM Monitor port (MU type) can be connected to an Optical Spectrum Analyzer : 5 — 1 — 23 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 23 .

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 24 .2 Cabling description 2.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site 5 — 1 — 24 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 25 .4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site 5 — 1 — 25 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Cabling description 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 26 .5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site 5 — 1 — 26 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 Cabling description 2.

2 Cabling description 2. 5 — 1 — 27 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Electrical cabling Two power supply cables coming from the Top Rack Unit are connected to the RMPM : There are two redundant power connectors on the front panel of the RMPM.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 27 . The RMPM can work when only one of the connectors is connected to a power supply.

up to 8 status and up to 8 commands can be managed. GND means ground.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 NC means not connected. Through the DB25 housekeeping connector.6 Electrical cabling [cont. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 5 — 1 — 28 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.] The Housekeeping connector allows the user to manage some electrical relays and opto-couplers in order to monitor some status of the Raman Pump Module or to remotely command its restart and shutdown.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 28 .2 Cabling description 2.

] The Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet port in the RMPM.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Electrical cabling [cont.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 29 .g a PC equipped with Ethernet Network card) 5 — 1 — 29 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2 Cabling description 2. The Ethernet port is the Craft Terminal Connector used for connecting the RMPM to an Ethernet network (LAN) via a HUB or Switch device or a peer device (e.

2 Cabling description 2.] The RS232 connector (DB9) is used for first time setup upon integration of the RMPM into the network or modifying configuration. The RS232 connector is usually used to configure the IP address of the RMPM or to modify the SNMP security passwords to upgrade its software.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 30 .6 Electrical cabling [cont. 5 — 1 — 30 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

] RMPM front panel has four LED indicators : The four front panel LEDs indicate pump unit status 5 — 1 — 31 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 31 .6 Electrical cabling [cont.2 Cabling description 2.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 32 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 5 — 1 — 32 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 33 .3 Remote management 5 — 1 — 33 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. GetResponse.3 Remote management 3. SetRequest SNMP Agent SNMP Traps (Alarm on/off) MIB 5 — 1 — 34 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 RMPM communication Manager (GUI) Management Application RMPM (EMS) SNMP Data GetRequest. either locally or remotely through a LAN.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on a PC.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 34 .

703 – Ethernet media converter Using Ethernet HUB for more than one RMPM in one site The GUI is accessible from any remote location Through OSC + USIB link.2 Remote management Simple web-based user interface (GUI) Seamless and unlimited access and control of RMPM units from everywhere in the organization network and via the internet. 5 — 1 — 35 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. depending on security restrictions. Using OSCU and USIB board from 1626LM Using G.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. a media converter is necessary between the USIB and the RMPM to convert the 64kb/s G703 frame into 10M Ethernet frame.3 Remote management 3.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 35 .

3 One RMPM in the first remote site 5 — 1 — 36 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Remote management 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 36 .

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 One RMPM in the second remote site 5 — 1 — 37 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 37 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Note : In such case the USIB in intermediate sites must be de-configured (for the OSC traffic to be in pass-through).3 Remote management 3.

3 Remote management 3.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 38 .5 Two RMPM in the first remote site 5 — 1 — 38 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 39 .6 RMPM in several remote sites 5 — 1 — 39 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Remote management 3.

Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate the optical cabling he discovered. Looking at the training equipment.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 40 .Discover Looking at the training equipment. Time allowed : ___ minutes 5 — 1 — 40 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. identify the optical cabling between the RMPM and the 1626LM. identify the electrical connectors used at level of RMPM and the way to manage it.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 41 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Housekeeping management 5 — 1 — 41 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 Introduction Input (CPI#) and output (CPO#) housekeeping points are managed by the operator. 5 — 1 — 42 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. can be declared and managed by the operator.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 42 . which are managed by the equipment.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Output housekeeping points. Input housekeeping points correspond to the external defect which not concern the NE itself and are reported by means of gates on the controller card.4 Housekeeping management 4. Two commands and four alarms synthesis are available for RMPM.

0 there are 9 input and 9 output points (see the above screen shot) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Warning: the quantity of Housekeeping points must be checked case by case according to 1626 LM release.0 there are 8 input and 8 output points but from R5.4 Housekeeping management 4. As example: in R3.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 43 .2 External Points view 5 — 1 — 43 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

4 Housekeeping management 4.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 44 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Outputs (commands)) : All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 Commands Commands Manual shutdown Manual restart A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Outputs (commands)) : 5 — 1 — 44 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 45 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Inputs (commands)) : All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Inputs A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Inputs (alarms)) : 5 — 1 — 45 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Housekeeping management 4.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 5 — 1 — 46 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 46 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 Laser safety 5 — 1 — 47 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 47 .

5 Laser safety 5. Power (mW) 1000 100 10 1 0.5 10 3A (50) (32) +2.001 Class 4 Class 3B Class 3A Class 2 Class 1 Wavelength (nm) 400 5 — 1 — 48 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.01 0.4) -4 9.1 0.5 (2) 15 17 3B (500) (500) (500) 27 27 27 4 (mW) (mW) (mW) dBm dBm dBm All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 48 .1 Laser class _ reminder The International Electro technical Commission IEC825: Gives the safety recommendations.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Telecom laser domain Class 1 1550nm 1300nm 850nm (10) (10) (0.

whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is used to represent gain or attenuation. and 3 dB means a gain of 2. It is an abbreviation for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt. 3 dBm means 2 mW.). fire risk. etc. dBm represents absolute power.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 dBm Definition dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). Similarly. except if you use optical appliances (binoculars. Hazard for eye and skin. dBm is different from dB. monocular. For example. whereas -3 dB means attenuation of 2. microscope. 5 — 1 — 49 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm. Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam. * If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam. The formula to calculate dBm from mW is: dBm = 10 log10( 1mW P ) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 mW. -3 dBm means 0.2 Risks _ reminder Class 1 Class 2 Class 3A Class 3B Class 4 No hazard if used in normal conditions*.5 Laser safety 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 49 . No hazard if used in normal conditions.

INSTRUCTIONS The optical interfaces peculiar to powers 3A. BASIC PRINCIPLES LASER RADIATION: DO NOT LOOK INSIDE THE BEAM CLASS-3A LASER RADIATION UNIT 5 — 1 — 50 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 Safety instructions Precautions to be taken in class 3A… Hazard in class 3B and 4: So you need to quantify and locate the corresponding power.5 Laser safety 5. Do not observe a connector or a fiber unless you are at a distance of 10 cm or more.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 50 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Place systematically the protective caps on a free connector. 3B and 4 are identified by the following symbol: Do not observe a connector or a fiber in its longitudinal axis.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the amplifier may emit up to 29 dBm (700 mW) A potential hazard can occur in case of fiber break or connector opening. The Raman amplifier product is thus classified as a Class 1M laser product according to IEC 60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001.10. To avoid this risk. 5 — 1 — 51 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Laser safety 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 51 . when the Raman amplifier is connected through the line port to a closed fiber transmission line. the Raman Amplifier is equipped with four different firmware mechanisms designed to detect a fiber break or connector opening. and to activate Automatic Power Reduction (APR) of the Raman pumps to reduce output power to below the level defined for Class 1M laser products. and CDRH 21 CFR §1040.4 Automatic Power Reduction During normal operation.

5 Laser safety 5.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms Pump power back-reflection The pump back reflection entering the Raman unit from the line port is continuously monitored. This mechanism continuously monitors the ASE (or Noise) in the Short Band (1500-1520nm for the case of a C-Band amplifier) entering the Raman unit from the line port.0A — Operation and Maintenance High loss along the transmission line. APR of the Raman pumps will be activated). then part of the pump-energy propagating along the line will be backreflected. Amplified Spontaneous Emission in the Short Band). and changes in the signal band power (simultaneously with other mechanisms) indicate an open or degraded transmission line. and in particular discrete loss points occurring close to the Raman amplifier. or sharp bends and other stress point along the fiber. and thus can occur at discrete loss points. There are two levels of APR protection : The system level of protection. The Raman amplifier provides four independent laser-protection mechanisms related to safety of operating personnel and transmission equipment. Those mechanisms ensure that when the transmission line fails (even tens of kilometers from the amplifier location). enables classification of the full communication system (according to IEC 60825-2) as Class 1M. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) Amplified Spontaneous Emission (ASE) in the short band: Signal Band Power 5 — 1 — 52 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Absence of the signal indicates an open connector or fiber break. High back-reflection is often associated to loss.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 52 . Changes in ASE indicate an open or degraded line (high loss points). Changes in the back reflection level indicate an open connector in the system. The total signal band (C-Band) power is monitored. ensures that the product itself is qualified as Class 1M (according to IEC 60825-1 and CDRH 21 CFR §1040. The product level of protection.10). This mechanism continuously monitors the presence of the OSC signal. and thus the achievable Raman gain. and compared to the output pump power. A high level of backreflection can degrade the performance of the laser-diode. based on all four mechanisms. and thus decrease the available pump power. If there is high back-reflection. based on two of the mechanisms (Pump power back-reflection. and will return to the pump laser diode from which it originated. Discrete loss points can occur due to dirty or faulty connectors. so that any open connector or broken fiber in the direct vicinity of the amplifier will activate Automatic Power Reduction (APR) of the Raman pumps. can severely decrease the available pump power for DRA (Distributed Raman Amplification). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APR Two possible scenarios can automatically restart the RMPM : When RMPM detects modulated OSC signal with power > -42dBm.5 Laser safety 5. if RMPM turns “ON” and one of the reasons for APR still exists. RMPM will shutdown within 150 ms. In both of these cases. 5 — 1 — 53 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5dBm for 3 pump module. When RMPM detects Carrier Wave power in OSC Band > -50dBm for 2 pump module or > -52.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 53 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

5 — 1 — 54 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Laser safety 5. Once the product level of APR protection is disabled.7 Warnings The product level of APR protection is password protected. the amplifier is classified as a Class 4 laser product. Alcatel-Lucent advises to keep the APR protection at all times and not disable it.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. and exposure to direct or scattered radiation may cause severe physical injury.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 54 .

0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 55 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 5 — 1 — 55 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

End of Module RMPM Description 5 — 1 — 56 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Description 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 1 — Page 56 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11717AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 1 .Section 5 RMPM Operation and Maintenance Module 2 RMPM Handling and Maintenance 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0 Do not delete this graphic elements in here: 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 2 . Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 5—2—2 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. you should be able to: Get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions 5—2—3 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 3 .Module Objectives Upon completion of this module.

0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 4 .Module Objectives [cont.] 5—2—4 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab 1.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.6 Safety parameters 1.5 ARP Time configuration 1.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab 1.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab 1.1 Getting the workspace 1.1 Replacing a Power supply 2.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status 1.11 RMPM Reboot 1.8 Product parameters and history 1.3 Replacing the Dust Filter Page 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 23 24 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 5—2—5 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.3 System configuration parameters 1.9 Alarms 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 5 .4 Pump operating modes 1.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab 1.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab 2 RMPM Maintenance 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.7 Status parameters 1.2 Replacing a FAN 2.

Table of Contents [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] Switch to notes view! 5—2—6 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 6 .

1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 5—2—7 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 7 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

255. 2.0 If it is not possible to reach the RMPM. Both. Open a web browser (such as Internet Explorer) application Type the specific unit’s IP address in the address field (this is the HTTP connection request to the unit) RMPM acts as an HTTP (web) server with fully customizable web pages 5—2—8 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1.1.1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 150.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 8 .1. contact your administrator who will check the IP address and the DCN state. the IP @ of the PC is 150.0 .255. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1.1 Getting the workspace 1.1. RMPM and PC are located in the same subnetwork: 150.2 / 255.192 is the default RMPM IP @ For the above case.

0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 9 .] GUI Login screens are displayed: Enter the SNMP passwords: Default passwords are: public for Read Password private for Write Password Super user who can change RMPM settings Monitor user who can only view RMPM information Example: Sup123 Enter the user password: The main GUI will be displayed 5—2—9 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Getting the workspace [cont.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

shown above.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. contains eight sub-windows and three operating icons.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The RMPM GUI Panel consists of five tabs.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab 5 — 2 — 10 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 10 . The “Main” tab. The eight subwindows are : Configuration – General operating parameters Status – General Status information RMPM Production Parameters – Production related information Communication – Indicates if communication is operative Sample – SNMP protocol related parameters History since reboot – Events that occurred in the past 24 hours since reboot HSKU Command Status – Indication for commands given through Housekeeping port and not through management Operating icons are : Alarms – graphical representation of high importance alarms On / Off switch (green / red icon) Restart button (blue icon) Return to factory settings button (red arrow icon All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Relevant only in Gain setting operating mode.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Relevant only in Manual pump power operating mode. Transmission line fiber type (for adaptive Gain Flattening) : SMF. Leaf. Sets pump powers in order to achieve required gain and optimal gain flattening for required fiber type. G654. Power settings in mW of the 1424nm pump. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 5 — 2 — 11 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Manual pump power. Relevant only in Manual pump power operating mode. Teralight or G653 (DSF). Truewave.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Gain setting).0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 11 .3 System configuration parameters Operating Mode Pump Operating Mode (Max pump power. W1 Manual Power Set (mW) W2 Manual Power Set (mW) Manual Gain Set (dB) Line Fiber Type Power settings in mW of the 1452nm pump(s).

Click on the … on the right to open the Operating Mode window Choose the required mode Click on OK to confirm Manual pump power mode Cancel 5 — 2 — 12 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Pump operating modes Max pump power mode In this mode. Click on OK to confirm 1. No gain flattening mechanism in this mode. Enter the required gain 3. In this mode. 3. The ratio between different wavelength pumps is set according to the transmission fiber type. Enter the required power level 3. Gain setting mode 2. operate as follow: 1. best OSNR improvement occurs. operate as follow: 2. maximum pump power (EOL) is launched through the line port into the transmission fiber. the pump power for each of the pump laser diodes can be set manually. operate as follow: 2.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Click on the … on the right to open the Wx Manual Power set window for W1 and / or W2 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. the pump power of each wavelength is adjusted to provide a required average gain and gain flattening according to the transmission fiber type.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 12 .To change the pumps power settings configuration.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Gain setting mode . Click on OK to confirm 1.To change the gain configuration. To change the operating mode. With this operating mode. Click on the … on the right to open the Manual Gain set (dB) window Manual pump power mode . In this mode.

operate as follow: Click on the … on the right to open the ARP Time window 2. the RMPM will shutdown according to the «Pumps Shutdown switches » configuration. Cancel 5 — 2 — 13 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Click on OK to confirm 1.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. After relevant repair action.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 13 .5 ARP Time configuration In case of problem. the ARP Time is set to 10 seconds. the RMPM will restart according to the « Automatic Restart Procedure Time » configuration By default. To change the ARP Time. Choose the required setting 3.

Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case module PCB temperature exceeds 85°C. OSC Band Threshold [dB] – Threshold for transient in OSC Band loss in which a change of ASE level in the 1500-1520 nm Band in a period of less than 150 ms. or of a sudden drop in this Band. ARP Time . All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 High Temp High Back Reflection OSC Loss OSC Band Drop 5 — 2 — 14 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.. OSC Band Threshold = Expected OSC Band power – OSC Band Power + 1 Pump power [dBm] + High Back Reflection threshold [dB] > Back reflected power [dBm] Change password – This allows changing the password that is required to disable switch status All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. Can be set to any value between 1 second to 100 seconds. OSC Band Drop) must be enabled. High Temp. Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case OSC modulation loss. Default value 10 seconds. all switches (Input Loss.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 14 .6 Safety parameters Input Loss Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown or activating in case of line input loss in the C Band.0A — Operation and Maintenance High Back Reflection Threshold (dB) – Threshold relative to pump power in which back-reflection alarm/shutdown becomes active. Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case of less than required power in 1500-1520nm Band.Delay between Automatic shutdown and Restart. CAUTION : To guarantee the laser safety. OSC Loss. activates alarm/shutdown.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case High Back reflection ration threshold (in dB relative to pumps power) or transient in back reflection. High Back Reflection.

Back Reflection Ratio – Ratio (dB). Internal Module Temp Temperature (PCB) of Raman module (Celsius). -49. RMPM Temp The Pizza Box temperature should typically be the ambient temperature. Otherwise detailed faults/alarms are reported.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 15 . – Power Supply Status : OK or fail of Power Suply 1 or fail of power supply 2.5dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm OSC Power – Power of modulated OSC in dBm. Internal Pwr Supply Stat.0A — Operation and Maintenance Pumps Power – Combined total Pumps Power (mW). This also takes into account the backreflected pump power (noise). Power W1 – Pump power in 1452 nm wavelength band in mW. The module temperature should be below 75°C before starting. Power W2 – Pump power in 1424 nm wavelength band in mW. of the Back relection power to the pumps power For good fibers it should be around -30dB. When OK then Raman is properly operating. Pumps Status . Current (3) – Pump #3 current in mA. When a status item follows OK then this item is of minor importance.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. It should be > -22dB. Temperature of PCB Pizza Box (Celsius). Gain (dB) Module Gain when it is operated in Gain setting Mode. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Input Power 5 — 2 — 15 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. OSC State – Modulated Optical Supervisory Channel signal status : Exists or Not exists. Current (1) – Pump #1 current in mA. Back Reflection Power – Back Reflection power (dBm). -52dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm For RMPM1200. OSC Band Power – Power in 1500-1520nm band (ASE power + OSC Power in dBm). Total input Power from the Line (dBm). Fans Status – Fans status : OK or Fail Fan 1 or 2 or 3 or 4. For RMPM1300. Current (2) – Pump #2 current in mA.7 Status parameters Status Detailed Raman Status.Raman pumps status : Pumps Active or Shutdown. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.8 Product parameters and history RMPM Production Parameters Serial Number Software Version Hardware Version Firmware Version Production date History Since Reboot This window shows the number of times since reboot that: Pumps off event occurred OSC Band Loss event occurred High Back Reflection event occurred All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 5 — 2 — 16 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 16 .

Power Supply A or B Green = Power Supply A or B is OK Red = Power Supply A or B failed ARP pause Red = Raman amplifier in ARP pause (length dictated by ARP time parameter).0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 17 . Raman amplifier will turn on when ARP pause will be terminated.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Input Loss Green = Input signal in C Band above threshold Red = Input signal in C Band below threshold.9 Alarms Pumps On Green = Pumps On Red = Pumps Off Green = Power in 1500-1520nm band is OK Red = Power in 1500-1520nm indicates fiber cut and shutdown occurred Green = No High Back Reflection in pump band Red = High Back Reflection (transient or threshold) occurred followed by a shutdown Green = OSC exists (modulated signal) Red = OSC does not exist OSC Band Loss High Back Reflection OSC Loss 5 — 2 — 17 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. restart can not occur Internal Power Supply Green = Internal power supply is OK Red = Internal power supply failed Ext.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Green = Raman in steady All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

External Points _ Input Points User Label settings . 4. some External Points (inputs and outputs) have to be customized as follow: 1. 2. 3. then right click and select Configuration Update the User label accordingly and confirm with OK In case of single associated RMPM. Open the External Points window selecting View External Points Right click and select Show External Input Points or Show External Output Points or Show All External Points Select an Input and/or an Output point (such as ExtInPt#1 or ExtOutPt#1001).0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 18 .0A — Operation and Maintenance . 7 and 8 _ ExtOutPt#1001 and 1002 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.External Points _ Output Points User Label settings All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 2.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status In the related 1626 LM NE. the following External Points have to be configured as described below: 5 — 2 — 18 ExtInPt#1.

10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont. To perform these actions.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 19 .1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Shutdown steps: From 1626 LM USM. 3. operate as follow: 1. 4. open the External Points window selecting View External Points Select #1001 (Manual shutdown) then right click and select Configuration Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will shutdown) Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain in shutdown state) 5 — 2 — 19 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.] External outputs #1001 (Manual shutdown) and #1002 (Manual restart) can be used together to shutdown and restart the RMPM. 2.

2. Restart steps: From 1626 LM USM. open the External Points window selecting View External Points Select #1002 (Manual restart) then right click and select Configuration Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will restart) Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain in started state) 5 — 2 — 20 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. 4. 3.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 20 .

0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 21 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] This alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings : Line Degraded Alarm 5 — 2 — 21 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.

1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.] This alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings : RMPM Degraded Alarm 5 — 2 — 22 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 22 .

From the “Main” tab.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1. Click on Yes in the dialog box to confirm the action 3.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 23 . After a few seconds.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. click on the relevant icon 2.11 RMPM Reboot Reboot description Equivalent to power down and up through 48V power supply Configuration parameters before the reboot kept in memory are re-applied To perform a reboot cycle. operate as follow: 1. make sure that RMPM is back in operational state 5 — 2 — 23 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

time and date stamped as shown above. events will be logged.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 24 . . Pumps on (after APR shutdown or power up) 32768: House Keeping shutdown or restart command All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 5 — 2 — 24 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Refer to the Appendix (RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers) for more details. Note 2 : Events will be logged also when the GUI window is not opened.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance The Events History tab summarizes the events. The events history can be cleared by pressing “Reset Events History” button in the GUI.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab Meaning of the event codes: 2176: OSC loss along with ARP time 4096: Not stabilized mode (NST). Note 1 : If there is no real-time clock hardware in the RMPM. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. but the timestamp will show “0-0-0 0:0:0:”.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Pumps Pwr Chart tab shows pumps output power weekly average samples.1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab Week number 5 — 2 — 25 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 25 .

14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab Week number 5 — 2 — 26 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 26 .1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The OSC Ban Pwr Chart tab shows the OSC Band power weekly averaged samples.

1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Back Reflection Pwr Chart tab shows the back reflection power weekly averaged samples.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab Week number 5 — 2 — 27 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 27 .

Exercise According to the instructions of the trainer : Get started on RMPM GUI Discover the current configuration and status of the RMPM Using ON/OFF button.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 28 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. shutdown and restart the RMPM. Customize the user label of the relevant House Keeping points Using House Keeping points shutdown and restart the RMPM Launch an RMPM reboot Analyze the Events history Compare the charts and the current related values Verify that the Back-reflection pump ratio is greater than -22dB ____ minutes 5 — 2 — 28 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Analyze the alarm status for each case.

0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 29 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 RMPM Maintenance 5 — 2 — 29 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

At service time. shut down the related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.1 Replacing a Power supply RMPM has a redundant power supply.2 RMPM maintenance 2.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 30 . Take off lid at upper cover of RMPM by taking out the seven screws as shown in the figure below Take out the three screws harnessing the small PCB card with defective power supply on it to the RMPM motherboard Pull out the power supply Replace with new power supply (insert power supply card into socket) Harness power supply PCB with screws to motherboard PCB Put back lid and close the screws Extract the board 5 — 2 — 30 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. At service time.2 RMPM maintenance 2. shut down the related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 31 . Disconnect the wire to wire connector of the defective FAN Take out the defective FAN Replace with a new FAN Connect new FAN with the wire to wire connector Put back side cover and six screws 5 — 2 — 31 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. Take out the six screws connecting the side cover of RMPM as seen in the drawing below.2 Replacing a FAN RMPM has a redundant FAN.

3 Replacing the Dust Filter To allow good air flow into module while maintaining good protection from dust entering the module.2 RMPM maintenance 2.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. It is possible to replace the dust filter taking out the two screws in the front panel that are related to the dust filter cassette 5 — 2 — 32 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 32 . a dust filter is located in front of fans.

Exercise Proceed to a FAN replacement on your RMPM without completely turning off the power supply. following the appropriate procedure Use the installed FAN as a spare ____ minutes 5 — 2 — 33 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 33 .

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 5 — 2 — 34 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 34 .

Self-assessment on the Objectives Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation 5 — 2 — 35 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 35 .

End of Module RMPM Handling and Maintenance 5 — 2 — 36 RMPM Operation and Maintenance — RMPM Handling and Maintenance 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11718AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 5 — Module 2 — Page 36 .

0 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 1 .0 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A Operation and Maintenance TOP18025D0SGDENI1.Do not delete this graphic elements in here: Section 6 Appendix 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Module 1 Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally Document History Edition 01 Date 2009-03-25 Author Steunou L. Remarks First edition All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Blank Page 6—1—2 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 2 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Module Objectives None 6—1—3 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 3 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 4 .] 6—1—4 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.Module Objectives [cont.

1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes 8. UEP alarm description and related corrective actions 5. TD alarm description and related corrective actions 5.7 VM. OCCO alarm description and related corrective actions 5.8 TF. RUM alarm description and related corrective actions 5. HT alarm description and related corrective actions 5.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid 5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board 7 WIS overview 7.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid 4.6 LAN.11 OPD.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames 6.1 Equipment alarm list 5.Table of Contents Switch to notes view! 1 SFP modules 2 XFP modules 3 ALCT channels 4 Transponder channels 4.1 IEEE 802.0A Operation and 6.16 AUP.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actions 5.17 TOOR alarm description and All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 related corrective actions 6—1—5 Appendix — Miscellaneous 6 Ethernet —frames Maintenance overview 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. UDCL alarm description and related corrective actions 5.14 PD.4 RUU.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actions 5.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actions 5.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead 7.2 RUP.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actions 5.1 frame 6.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actions 5.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actions 5. PP alarm description and related corrective actions 5.2 WAN PHY MS Overhead 8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 5 . IPD alarm description and related corrective actions 5. EM alarm description and related corrective actions 5.2 ALS Code Numbers 9 Abbreviations and Acronyms Page 7 9 11 13 14 17 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 47 48 50 53 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.3 RUTM.

0A — Operation and Maintenance This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Table of Contents [cont.] Switch to notes view! 6—1—6 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 6 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 7 .1 SFP modules 6—1—7 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

2 DDM 1GbESXDDM 1GbELXDDM 1GbEZXDDM FC/2FCmm FC/2FCsm DWA200->600 6—1—8 L-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMF I-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMF 1000BASE-SX / B&W SFP / LC / MMF L-16. laser power. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 DDM L-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC / SMF Equipped on TRBC1111 Equipped on 2xGBE_FC Equipped on ETHC1000 I-16.1 DDM L-16.2 / B&W SFP / LC / SMF 1000BASE-LX/LH / B&W SFP / LC / SMF FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC / SMF FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC / SMF APD DWDM / DWDM SFP / LC / SMF 1000BASE-ZX / B&W SFP / LC / SMF Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.SFP modules list ACRONYM Description (Interface / Module type / Connector / fiber type) S-16.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 8 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) is an SFP function supporting analog parameters measurements as temperature.1 DDM S-16. laser bias. It is an optional feature: the availability information is present in the SFP remote inventory.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 XFP modules 6—1—9 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 9 .

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 10 .1/10GBASE-L / B&W XFP / LC / SMF 10GBASE-S / B&W XFP / LC / MMF S-64.2) / B&W XFP / LC / SMF 6 — 1 — 10 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.2b/10GBASE-E / B&W XFP / LC / SMF Description (Interface / Module type / Connector / fiber type) Equipped on TRBD1191 Equipped on TRBC4x12 Equipped on ETHC1000 P1L1-2D2 (L-64.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.XFP modules list ACRONYM XI641 XS642 X10GBASES XP1L12D2 I-64.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 11 .3 ALCT channels 6 — 1 — 11 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

55 THz 194.75 THz 193.35 THz 194.35 THz 192.15 THz 193.35 THz 192. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 ALCT board is not available in Band 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 12 .95 THz 10 11 12 6 — 1 — 12 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.95 THz 194.75 THz 191.55 THZ 192.ALCT frequencies BAND# 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ALCT Frequency 195.15 THz 191.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Transponder channels 6 — 1 — 13 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 13 .

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 14 .1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid 6 — 1 — 14 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.4 Transponder channels 4.

] 6 — 1 — 15 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.4 Transponder channels 4.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid [cont.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 15 .

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 16 .4 Transponder channels 4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 6 — 1 — 16 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 17 .4 Transponder channels 4.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid 6 — 1 — 17 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 18 .Notes Page Switch to notes view! 6 — 1 — 18 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 19 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 6 — 1 — 19 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

1 Equipment alarm list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 6 — 1 — 20 Probable cause RUM UEP RUP Alarm type Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Page 22 22 23 24 24 25 26 27 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 RUTM RUU SCP PP Equipment 23 OCCO LAN VM HT TD TF 9 OPL OPD IPL Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 20 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.

1 Equipment alarm list [cont.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.] 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Probable cause COCE PD IPD Alarm type Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Page 31 32 33 34 34 35 36 37 36 HVCSP UDCL AUP TOOR EM WD 6 — 1 — 21 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 21 .

RUM alarm description and related corrective actions RUP RUM 6 — 1 — 22 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 RUP.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 22 .

UEP alarm description and related corrective actions RUTM UEP 6 — 1 — 23 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 23 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.3 RUTM.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

OCCO alarm description and related corrective actions RUU OCCO 6 — 1 — 24 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 24 .4 RUU.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actions SCP 6 — 1 — 25 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 25 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.

6 LAN.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 26 . PP alarm description and related corrective actions LAN PP 6 — 1 — 26 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

HT alarm description and related corrective actions VM HT 6 — 1 — 27 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 27 .7 VM.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.

TD alarm description and related corrective actions TF TD 6 — 1 — 28 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 28 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.8 TF.

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 29 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actions OPL 6 — 1 — 29 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actions IPL 6 — 1 — 30 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 30 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 31 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.11 OPD. IPD alarm description and related corrective actions OPD IPD 6 — 1 — 31 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actions COCE 6 — 1 — 32 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 32 .

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actions HVCSP 6 — 1 — 33 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 33 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 34 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. UDCL alarm description and related corrective actions PD UDCL 6 — 1 — 34 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.14 PD.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actions WD 6 — 1 — 35 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 35 .

16 AUP. EM alarm description and related corrective actions AUP EM 6 — 1 — 36 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 36 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.

17 TOOR alarm description and related corrective actions TOOR 6 — 1 — 37 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 37 .5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 6 — 1 — 38 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 38 .

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 39 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.6 Ethernet frames overview 6 — 1 — 39 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 40 .Used to synchronise the receivers MAC addresses .Length of the data field Data .6 Ethernet frames overview 6.From 46 to 1500 bytes FCS .Destination and Source MAC @ such as: 00 20 60 12 34 Type .1 IEEE 802.1 frame Destination MAC Address 6 Source MAC Address 6 Type or Data FCS Length 2 4 Preamble 8 Number of bytes The common fields are: Preamble .Frame Check Sequence also called CRC taking into account the fields from Destination MAC @ to Data All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 6 — 1 — 40 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Indicate the type of protocol used by the upper layer Length .

802.6 Ethernet frames overview 6.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames Destination MAC Address Source MAC Address Preamble 1Q 2 TCI 2 Type Data FCS or Length 2 4 8 6 6 Number of bytes Customer VLAN tag Preamble Destination MAC Address Source MAC Address 1Q 2 TCI 2 1Q 2 TCI 2 Type Data FCS or Length 2 4 8 6 6 Number of bytes Provider VLAN tag Customer VLAN tag 6 — 1 — 41 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1Q field (a constant fixed value: 8100) 3 bits: user priority 802.1 P/Q is also called “customer tag” The second tag : IEEE 802.Tag Control Information .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The “added” fields (802.1ad is called Q in Q tag or provider tag All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 41 . in a given VLAN (Virtual Local Area network).1P (8 levels: from 0 to 7) 1 bit: CFI (Canonical Field Identifier) 12 bits: VLAN identifier 802. In such a case: The first tag : IEEE 802.1Q (0 to 4095) VLAN tags can be stacked when crossing the service provider networks. are: 1Q TCI .1P/Q).

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 42 . The « WDM tag » follows 802. The « WDM tag » is added even if the incoming frames are already tagged twice.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board --Source MAC Address 1Q 2 TCI 2 1Q 2 TCI 2 1Q 2 TCI 2 Type Data FCS or Length 2 4 6 Number of bytes WDM VLAN tag Provider VLAN tag Customer VLAN tag A « WDM tag » is added on all frames carried on the 10 GbE interface.6 Ethernet frames overview 6.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. 6 — 1 — 42 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.1ad concept. The tag is added for each 1 GbE port and removed before user restitution.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 43 .7 WIS overview 6 — 1 — 43 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

as well. Byte A1 A2 J0 Z0 B1 E1 F1 D1-D3 Description Framing Framing RS Trace Growth RS BIP-8 Orderwire RS User Channel RS DCC STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHY Frame alignment Fixed : 0xF6 Frame alignment Fixed : 0x28 User programmable RS message Undefined Unused : 0xCC Bit interleave Parity for RS error monitoring of previous frame optional 64kbps channel between STE Unused : zero optional for user communication optional for data communication 6 — 1 — 44 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 44 . as SONET/SDH management information.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead The WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) is specified by IEEE 802. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1. The WIS operates between the 64B/66B PCS (Physical Coding Sublayer) and serial PMD (Physical Medium Dependant) layers common to the LAN PHY.7 WIS overview 7.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The WIS provides a simplified SONET/SDH framer for the 10 Gbit/s Ethernet WAN PHY.3ae.

Z2 M1 E2 6 — 1 — 45 MS DCC Synch Growth FEBE Orderwire Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. bi-directional (101).0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 45 . set to zero unidirectional (100). no MS synch required Undefined Unused : zero Reports detected Block Errors (B2) to Far End optional 64kbps channel between STE Unused : zero All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 K2 Linear APS D4-D12 S1 Z1. no pointer case of negative pointer justification. MS-AIS or MS-RDI (1110). Also used for frequency justification Used to adjust the fill of input buffers in Fixed : 0x00. no request Protection Switching request type Channel (bits 5-8): Channel to switch from Fixed : 0x1.2 WAN PHY MS Overhead Byte H1. indicate MS-RDI. working channel Channel (bits 1-4): Channel to switch to Fixed : 0x1. rest undefined optional for data communication Unused : zero Synchronisation status Fixed : 0x0F. working channel redundancy (bit 5) : 1+1 or 1:n Fixed : 0 1+1 Status (bits 6-8): Indicates MS-AIS (111).2 H3 B2 K1 Description Pointer byte Pointer action MS BIP-1536 Linear APS STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHY Location of SPE in each STS relative to the pointer (in bytes). Also action required used for frequency justification Bit interleave Parity for MS error monitoring of previous frame Request (bits 1-4) : Specifies Automatic Fixed : 0x0.7 WIS overview 7.

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 6 — 1 — 46 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 46 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 47 .8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 6 — 1 — 47 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 48 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The Raman Amplifier Status Codes appear in the “Status” parameter. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes 6 — 1 — 48 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes [cont.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 49 .8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.] 6 — 1 — 49 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

2 ALS Code Numbers 6 — 1 — 50 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The ALS Code Numbers are listed for different types of events.8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 50 .

if both input loss and high back reflection : status : ALS 3). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.2 ALS Code Numbers [cont.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 51 . The sum of these numbers is displayed together with the « ALSnnn » status code.0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 The APRs are shutdown scenarios. The ALS code numbers corresponding to the various APR scenarios described in the table above. where « nnn » is the sum (for example.] 6 — 1 — 51 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 8.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Notes Page Switch to notes view! 6 — 1 — 52 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 52 .

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.9 Abbreviations and Acronyms 6 — 1 — 53 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 53 .

Abbreviations and Acronyms A ACO ADM AIS ALC ALCT ALS AMS APE APR APSD APT AS ASAP ASE Alarm to notes view! SwitchCut Off Multiplexer Add and Drop Alarm Indication Signal Automatic Loading Channel Automatic laser ConTrol Automatic Laser Shutdown Alcatel (Proprietary) Maintenance Signal Automatic Power Equalization Automatic Power Reduction Automatic Power ShutDown Automatic Power Tuning Alarm Surveillance Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Amplified Spontaneous Emission E EC Equipment Controller EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMPM External Multi Pump Module EOL End Of Life EOW Engineering Order Wire ES Erroneous Seconds ESCT Equipment Shelf Controller ESD Electrostatic Discharge ETHC ETHernet Controller F FC FCS FDI FEC FIT FPGA Fiber Channel Frame Check Sequence Forward Defect Indication Forward Error Corrector Failure In Time Field Programmable Date Array Generic Communication Channel Generic Framing Procedure Geographic Information System Gateway Network Element Graphical User Interface House Keeping HouSe Keeping Unit International Electrotech.0A — Operation and Maintenance Back-to-Back 1626 LM B&W Black & White C CBR Ch CLNP CM CMDX CPE CPI CSF CT CWDM D DCC DCF DCN DCU DDM DMS DTV DW DWDM G GCC GFP GIS GNE All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 GUI H HK HSKU I IEC IL IPL ISPB ISSB L LAN LAPD LH LM LOF LOFA LOMS LOS LOSC LOSCF LR LSP LT M MAC MCC MIB MSV MZ Constant Bit Rate Channel Connection Less Network Protocol Channel Margin Channel Multiplexer / DemultipleXer Customer Premises equipment Card Presence Interface Customer Sub-system Failure Craft Terminal Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing Data Communication Channel Dispersion Compensating Fiber Data Communication Network Device Compensating Unit Digital Diagnostic Monitoring Degraded Multiplex Section Digital Threshold Voltage Digital wapper Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 54 . Commission Insertion Loss Input Power Loss Intra Shelf Parallel Bus Intra Shelf Serial Bus Local Area Network Link Access Protocol for D channel Long Hall Light manager Loss Of Frame Line Optical Fiber amplifier Loss Of Multiplex Section Los Of Signal Loss Of Supervisory Channel Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame Line Repeater Laser Shutdown for Protection Line Terminal Media Access Control Multirate Channel Card Management Information Base Mid-Stage VOA Mach-Zehnder B BBE Background Blocks Errors BBU Background Blocks Uncorrected BEC Background Errors Corrected BER Bit Error Rate BMDX Band Multiplexer / DemultipleXer BNC Bayonet Not Coupling B-OADM Band-OADM BOFA Band Optical Fiber Amplifier BOL 6 — 1 — 54 Beginning Of Life — Miscellaneous BtB Appendix(Light Manager) R 5.

0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 55 .Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.] N NDC NE NF NNI NRZ NSAP NTP Negative Dispersion Chromatic Switch to notes view! Network Element Noise Figure Network to Network Interface Non Return to Zero Network Service Access Point Network Time Protocol S SAC SBS SC SCS SDH SES SFF SFP SMF SNMP SONET SPC SPI Span Attenuation Control Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Shelf Controller Severely Corrected Seconds Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Severely Erroneous Seconds Small Form Factor Small Form Factor Pluggable Single Mode Fiber Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical NETwork Super Physical Contact Serial Peripheral Interface SDH Physical Interface Smart Photonic Layer Manager Server Signal Failure Severely Uncorrected Seconds O OADC Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADM Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer OAM Operation And Maintenance OCC Optical Channel Carrier OCH Optical CHannel OCPU Optical Channel Protection Unit SPLM OCHA Optical CHannel Adaptation SSF OCM Optical Channel Monitoring SUS OCNC Optical CoNnectivity Coupler T ODU Optical channel Data Unit OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm OH Over Head TCI Tag Control Information OMDX Optical Multiplexer / DemultipleXer TCO Total Cost of Ownership OMS Optical Multiplex Section TDF Total Dropped Frames OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection TDM Time Division Multiplexing OMSA Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation TEC Thermo-Electric Cooler All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 OPS 6 — 1 — 55Miscellaneous Physical Section Optical TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch Appendix — OPU 1626 LM (Light Manager) R channel Payload Unit Optical 5.0A — Operation and Maintenance TDMX Tunable DeMux OS Operation System TP Termination Point OSA Optical Spectrum Analyzer TRBC TRiButary Concentrator OSC Optical Supervisory Channel TRBD TRiButary Direct OSCU Optical Supervisory Channel TRCF Total Received Correct Frames OSNCP Optical Sub-Network Connection TRCO Total Received Correct Octet Protection TR-OADM Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames OTN Optical Transport Network TRU Top Rack Unit OTS Optical Transport Section TTF Total Transmitted Frames OTU Optical channel Transport Unit TTI Trail Trace Identifier TTO Total Transmitted Octets P PCB Printed Circuit Breaker U PCS Physical Coding Sublayer UDC User Data Channel PDG Polarization Dependant Gain UFEC User Forward Error Correction PDL Polarization Dependant Loss ULH Ultra Long Hall PGE Programmable Gain Equalization UNI User to Network Interface PM Performance Monitoring URU Underlying Resources Unavailable PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion USIB USer Interface Board PSUP Power SUPply V R VLAN Virtual Local Area Network RAIU Rack Alarm Interface Unit VOA Variable Optical Amplifier RM Remote Monitoring VSR Very Short Reach RMPM Raman Multi Pump Module ROADM Reconfigurable OADM RPO Receiver Parameter Optimization All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.] W WAN WB WDM WIS WMAN WSS Switch to notes view! Wavelength Blocker Wide Area Network Wavelength Division Multiplexing WAN Interface Sublayer Wavelength MANager Wavelength Selective Switch 6 — 1 — 56 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 56 .

Notes Page Switch to notes view! 6 — 1 — 57 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 57 .0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.

0A — Operation and Maintenance All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 3JK11719AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0 Section 6 — Module 1 — Page 58 .End of Module Miscellaneous 6 — 1 — 58 Appendix — Miscellaneous 1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

Page 1 .Last But One Page Switch to notes view! 1 @@PRODUCT @@COURSENAME This page is left blank intentionally All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME .

use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME .All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Passing on and copying of this document.Page 2 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful